SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Copyright © – by e Ubuntu Manual Team. Some rights reserved.
cb a

is work is licensed under the Creative Commons Aribution–Share
Alike . License. To view a copy of this license, see Appendix A, visit
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/./, or send a leer to Creative
Commons,  Second Street, Suite , San Francisco, California, ,
USA.

Geing Started with Ubuntu . can be purchased from http://ubuntu-manual.
org/buy/gswu/en_US. A printed copy of this book can be ordered for
the price of printing and delivery. An electronic copy of this book can be
downloaded for free. We permit and even encourage you to distribute a
copy of this book to colleagues, friends, family, and anyone else who might
be interested.

http://ubuntu-manual.org

Revision number:        Revision date: -- :: +
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Contents

    Prologue 
      Welcome 
      Ubuntu Philosophy 
      A brief history of Ubuntu 
      Is Ubuntu right for you? 
      Contact details 
      About the team 
      Conventions used in this book   

   Installation 
      Geing Ubuntu 
      Trying out Ubuntu 
      Installing Ubuntu—Geing started 
      Finishing Installation 
      Ubuntu installer for Windows 

   e Ubuntu Desktop 
     Understanding the Ubuntu desktop 
     Unity 
     Using Launcher 
     e Dash 
     Workspaces 
     Managing windows 
     Browsing files on your computer 
     Nautilus file manager 
     Searching for files and folders on your computer 
     Customizing your desktop 
     Accessibility 
     Session options 
     Geing help 

   Working with Ubuntu 
     All the applications you need 
     Geing online 
     Browsing the web 
     Reading and composing email 
     Using instant messaging 
     Microblogging 
     Viewing and editing photos 
     Watching videos and movies 
     Listening to audio and music 
     Burning CDs and DVDs 
     Working with documents, spreadsheets, and presentations 
     Ubuntu One 

   Hardware 
      Using your devices 
      Hardware identification   
       .


       Displays 
       Connecting and using your printer   
       Sound 
       Using a webcam 
       Scanning text and images 
       Other devices 

    Soware Management 
       Soware management in Ubuntu 
       Using the Ubuntu Soware Center 
       Managing additional soware 
       Manual soware installation 
       Updates and upgrades 
       Ubuntu for advanced users 
       Introduction to the terminal 
       Ubuntu file system structure 
       Securing Ubuntu 
       Why Ubuntu is safe 
       Basic security concepts 
       Users and groups 
       System updates 
       Firewall 
       Encryption 

    Troubleshooting 
       Resolving problems 
       Troubleshooting guide 
       Geing more help 

    Learning More 
       What else can I do with Ubuntu? 
       Open source soware 
       Distribution families 
       Choosing amongst Ubuntu and its derivatives 
       Finding additional help and support 
       e Ubuntu community 
       Contributing 

A    License 
       Creative Commons Aribution–ShareAlike . Legal Code   
       Creative Commons Notice 

     Glossary    

     Credits    

     Index 
Prologue
Welcome

Welcome to Geing Started with Ubuntu, an introductory guide wrien to
help new users get started with Ubuntu.
    Our goal is to cover the basics of Ubuntu (such as installation and work-
ing with the desktop) as well as hardware and soware management, work-
ing with the command line, and security. We designed this guide to be
simple to follow, with step-by-step instructions and plenty of screenshots,
allowing you to discover the potential of your new Ubuntu system.
    Please bear in mind that this guide is still very much a work in progress
and always will be. It is wrien specifically for Ubuntu . , and          LTS is an abbreviation for “Long Term Support.”
although we have aimed to not limit our instructions to this version,           A new LTS version is released every 2 years.
                                                                                Starting with Ubuntu 12.04 LTS, both the
it is unavoidable that some things will change over the life of Ubuntu.         Desktop version and the Server version will
Whenever a new version of Ubuntu is released, we will incorporate up-           have five years support, meaning you get free
dates and changes into our guide, and make a new version available at           security updates for at least five years.

http://www.ubuntu-manual.org.
    Geing Started with Ubuntu . is not intended to be a comprehensive
Ubuntu instruction manual. It is more like a quick-start guide that will get
you doing the things you need to do with your computer quickly and easily,
without geing bogged down with technical details. As with prior versions,
Ubuntu .  incorporates many new features, including enhancements
to the Unity shell and . More about the Unity shell and what it means,       HUD is an abbreviation for heads-up display.
and the , can be found in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop.                      It is a new concept, integrated into Unity as of
                                                                                Unity 5.2; it is still in development.
    For more detailed information on using Unity and the Ubuntu desk-
top, see the “Ubuntu Desktop Guide,” which can be obtained in any of the
following ways:

‣ in the Dash, type yelp;
‣ in the desktop menubar, click Help ‣ Ubuntu Help;
‣ go to https://help.ubuntu.com, Ubuntu .  ‣ Ubuntu Desktop Help.
   e Internet is also an excellent resource. For example, on https://help.
ubuntu.com you will find documentation on installing and using Ubuntu,
and at the Ubuntu Forums, http://ubuntuforums.org, and Ask Ubuntu,
http://askubuntu.com, you find answers to many Ubuntu related questions.         More information about Ubuntu’s online
   If something isn’t covered in this manual, chances are you will find the      and system documentation can be found in
                                                                                Chapter 7: Learning More.
information you are looking for in one of those locations. We will try our
best to include links to more detailed help wherever we can.

Ubuntu Philosophy

e term “Ubuntu” is a traditional African concept that originated from
the Bantu languages of southern Africa. It can be described as a way of         People sometimes wonder how to pronounce
connecting with others—living in a global community where your actions          Ubuntu. Each “u” is pronounced the same as in
                                                                                the word put.
affect all of humanity. Ubuntu is more than just an operating system: it is
a community of people that come together voluntarily to collaborate on
an international soware project that aims to deliver the best possible user
experience.
       .


The Ubuntu Promise

‣ Ubuntu will always be free of charge, along with its regular enterprise
  releases and security updates.
‣ Ubuntu comes with full commercial support from Canonical and hun-
  dreds of companies from across the world.
‣ Ubuntu provides the best translations and accessibility features that the
  free soware community has to offer.
‣ Ubuntu’s core applications are all free and open source. We want you to
  use free and open source soware, improve it, and pass it on.

A brief history of Ubuntu

Ubuntu was conceived in  by Mark Shuleworth, a successful South
African entrepreneur, and his company Canonical. Shuleworth recognized         Canonical is the company that provides financial
the power of Linux and open source, but was also aware of weaknesses that       and technical support for Ubuntu. It has
                                                                                employees based around the world who work
prevented mainstream use.                                                       on developing and improving the operating
   Shuleworth set out with clear intentions to address these weaknesses        system, as well as reviewing work submitted by
and create a system that was easy to use, completely free (see Chapter :       volunteer contributors. To learn more about
                                                                                Canonical, go to http://www.canonical.com.
Learning More for the complete definition of “free”), and could compete
with other mainstream operating systems. With the Debian system as a
base, Shuleworth began to build Ubuntu. Using his own funds at first,           Debian is the Linux operating system that
installation s were pressed and shipped worldwide at no cost to the           Ubuntu is based upon. For more information
                                                                                visit http://www.debian.org/.
recipients. Ubuntu spread quickly, its community rapidly grew, and soon
Ubuntu became the most popular Linux distribution available.
   With more people working on the project than ever before, its core fea-
tures and hardware support continue to improve, and to its core features
and hardware support, and Ubuntu has gained the aention of large organi-
zations worldwide. One of IBM’s open source operating systems is based on
Ubuntu. In , the French Police began to transition their entire computer
infrastructure to a variant of Ubuntu—a process which has reportedly saved
them “millions of euros” in licensing fees for Microso Windows. By the
end of , the French Police anticipates that all of their computers will
be running Ubuntu. Canonical profits from this arrangement by providing
technical support and custom-built soware.
   While large organizations oen find it useful to pay for support services,    For information on Ubuntu Server Edition, and
Shuleworth has promised that the Ubuntu desktop system will always             how you can use it in your company, visit http://
                                                                                www.ubuntu.com/business/server/overview.
be free. As of , Ubuntu is installed on an estimated % of the world’s
computers. is equates to tens of millions of users worldwide, and is
growing each year. As there is no compulsory registration, the percentage
of Ubuntu users should be treated as an estimate.

What is Linux?

Ubuntu is built on the foundation of Linux, which is a member of the Unix
family. Unix is one of the oldest types of operating systems and has pro-
vided reliability and security in professional applications for almost half a
century. Many servers around the world that store data for popular web-
sites (such as YouTube and Google) run some variant of a Unix system.
e Linux kernel is best described as the core, or almost the brain, of the
operating system.
   e Linux kernel is the controller of the operating system; it is responsi-
ble for allocating memory and processor time. It can also be thought of as
the program which manages any and all applications on the computer itself.
          


    Linux was designed from the ground up with security and hardware                  While modern graphical desktop environments
compatibility in mind, and is currently one of the most popular Unix-based            have generally replaced early command-line
                                                                                      interfaces, the command line can still be a
operating systems. One of the benefits of Linux is that it is incredibly flex-          quick and efficient way of performing many
ible and can be configured to run on almost any device—from the smallest               tasks. See Chapter 5: Release upgrade for
micro-computers and cellphones to larger super-computers. Unix was en-                more information, and Chapter 2: The Ubuntu
                                                                                      Desktop to learn more about gnome and other
tirely command line-based until graphical user interfaces (s) began to             desktop environments.
emerge in the early s.
    ese early s were difficult to configure, clunky, and generally only
used by seasoned computer programmers. In the past decade, however,
graphical user interfaces have come a long way in terms of usability, reli-
ability, and appearance. Ubuntu is just one of many different Linux distri-
butions, and uses one of the more popular graphical desktop environments              To learn more about Linux distributions, see
called .                                                                         Chapter 7: Learning More.



Is Ubuntu right for you?

New users to Ubuntu may find that it takes some time to feel comfortable
when trying a new operating system. You will no doubt notice many sim-
ilarities to both Microso Windows and Mac  , and some differences.
Users coming from Mac   are more likely to notice similarities due to the
fact that both Mac   and Ubuntu originated from Unix. e Unity shell,
which is the default in Ubuntu, is a completely new concept, which needs
some exploring to get used to it. See Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop for
more information about the Unity shell.
    Before you decide whether or not Ubuntu is right for you, we suggest
giving yourself some time to grow accustomed to the way things are done
in Ubuntu. You should expect to find that some things are different from
what you are used to. We also suggest taking the following into account:

Ubuntu is community based. at is, Ubuntu is developed, wrien, and
  maintained by the community. Because of this, support is probably
  not available at your local computer store. Fortunately, the Ubuntu
  community is here to help. ere are many articles, guides, and manuals
  available, as well as users on various Internet forums and Internet Relay
  Chat () rooms that are willing to assist beginners. Additionally, near
  the end of this guide, we include a troubleshooting chapter: Chapter :
  Troubleshooting.
Many applications designed for Microso Windows or Mac   will not run on Ubuntu.
  For the vast majority of everyday computing tasks, you will find suitable
  alternative applications available in Ubuntu. However, many profes-
  sional applications (such as the Adobe Creative Suite) are not developed
  to work with Ubuntu. If you rely on commercial soware that is not
  compatible with Ubuntu, yet still want to give Ubuntu a try, you may
  want to consider dual-booting. Alternatively, some applications devel-        To learn more about dual-booting (running
  oped for Windows will work in Ubuntu with a program called Wine. For          Ubuntu side-by-side with another operating
                                                                                system), see Chapter 1: Installation.
  more information on Wine, go to http://www.winehq.org.
Many commercial games will not run on Ubuntu. If you are a heavy gamer,
  then Ubuntu may not be for you. Game developers usually design games
  for the largest market. Since Ubuntu’s market share is not as substantial
  as Microso’s Windows or Apple’s Mac  , most game developers
  will not allocate resources towards making their games compatible with
  Linux. If you just enjoy a game every now and then, there is active game      See Chapter 5: Software Management to learn
  development within the community, and many high quality games can             more about Ubuntu Software Center.

  be easily installed through the Ubuntu Soware Center.
       .


Contact details

Many people have contributed their time to this project. If you notice any
errors or think we have le something out, feel free to contact us. We do
everything we can to make sure that this manual is up to date, informative,
and professional. Our contact details are as follows:

‣   Website: http://www.ubuntu-manual.org/
‣   Email: ubuntu-manual@lists.launchpad.net
‣   : #ubuntu-manual on irc.freenode.net
‣   Bug Reports: https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu-manual/+filebug

About the team

Our project is an open source volunteer effort to create and maintain qual-
ity documentation for Ubuntu and its derivatives.

Want to help?

We are always looking for talented people to work with, and due to the size
of the project we are fortunate to be able to cater to a wide range of skill
sets:

‣   Authors, editors
‣   Programmers (Python or TEX)
‣   User interface designers
‣   Icon and title page designers
‣   Event organizers and ideas people
‣   Testers
‣   Web designers and developers
‣   Translators and screenshoers
‣   Bug reporters and triagers

   To find out how you can get started helping, please visit http://ubuntu-manual.
org/getinvolved.

Conventions used in this book

e following typographic conventions are used in this book:

‣ Buon names, menu items, and other  elements are set in boldfaced
  type.
‣ Menu sequences are sometimes typeset as File ‣ Save As…, which means,
  “Choose the File menu, then choose the Save As….”
‣ Monospaced type is used for text that you type into the computer, text
  that the computer outputs (as in a terminal), and keyboard shortcuts.
1       Installation
Getting Ubuntu

Before you can get started with Ubuntu, you will need to obtain a copy of        Many companies (such as Dell and System76)
the Ubuntu installation image for  or . Some options for doing this are     sell computers with Ubuntu preinstalled. If
                                                                                 you already have Ubuntu installed on your
outlined below.                                                                  computer, feel free to skip to Chapter 2: The
                                                                                 Ubuntu Desktop.

Minimum system requirements

Ubuntu runs well on most computer systems. If you are unsure whether it          The majority of computers in use today will
will work on your computer, the Live  is a great way to test things out        meet the requirements listed here; however,
                                                                                 refer to your computer documentation or
first. Below is a list of hardware specifications that your computer should        manufacturer’s website for more information.
meet as a minimum requirement.
‣    GHz x processor (Pentium  or beer)
‣     of system memory ()
‣     of disk space (at least   is recommended)
‣   Video support capable of × resolution
‣   Audio support
‣   An Internet connection (highly recommended, but not required)


Downloading Ubuntu

e easiest and most common method for geing Ubuntu is to download
the Ubuntu  image directly from http://www.ubuntu.com/download.
Choose how you will install Ubuntu:
‣ Download and install
‣ Try it from a  or  stick
‣ Run it with Windows

Download and Install / Try it from a CD or USB stick

For the Download and install, or Try it from a  or  stick options, select
whether you require the -bit or -bit version (-bit is recommended for
most users), then click “Start download.”

Installing and run alongside Windows

For the Run it with Windows option, simply select “Start download,” and
then follow the instructions for the Ubuntu installer for Windows.

32-bit versus 64-bit

Ubuntu and its derivatives are available in two versions: -bit and -bit.
is difference refers to the way computers process information. Comput-           32-bit and 64-bit are types of processor
ers capable of running -bit soware are able to process more information       architectures. Most new desktop computers
                                                                                 have a 64-bit capable processor.
than computers running -bit soware; however, -bit systems require
more memory in order to do this. Nevertheless, these computers gain per-
formance enhancements by running -bit soware.

‣ If your computer has a -bit processor install the -bit version.
     .


‣ If your computer is older, a netbook, or you do not know the type of
  processor in the computer, install the -bit version.

   If your computer has a -bit processor, click on the “-bit” option
before you click “Start download.”

Downloading Ubuntu as a torrent

When a new version of Ubuntu is released, the download servers can get             Torrents are a way of sharing files and informa-
“clogged” as large numbers of people try to download or upgrade Ubuntu             tion around the Internet via peer-to-peer file
                                                                                   sharing. A file with the .torrent extension is
at the same time. If you are familiar with using torrents, you can download        made available to users, which is then opened
the torrent file by clicking “Alternative downloads,” and then “BitTorrent          with a compatible program such as uTorrent,
download.” Downloading via torrent may improve your download speed,                Deluge, or Transmission. These programs
                                                                                   download parts of the file from other people all
and will also be help to spread Ubuntu to other users worldwide.                   around the world.


Burning the CD image

Once your download is complete, you will be le with a file called ubuntu-          While the 64-bit version of Ubuntu is referred
.-desktop-i.iso or similar (i here in the filename refers to the -bit   to as the “AMD64” version, it will work on Intel,
                                                                                   AMD, and other compatible 64-bit processors.
version. If you downloaded the -bit version, the filename contains amd
instead). is file is a  image—a snapshot of the contents of a —which
you will need to burn to a .

Creating a bootable USB drive

If your  is able to boot from a  stick, you may prefer to use a 
memory stick instead of burning a . Scroll down to “Burn your  or
create a  drive,” select  or  stick, choose the  you are using to
create the  drive, and then click Show me how. If you select the “
Stick” option, your installation will be running from the  memory stick.
In this case, references to Live , will refer to the  memory stick.

Trying out Ubuntu

e Ubuntu  and  stick function not only as installation media, but
also allow you to test Ubuntu without making any permanent changes to
your computer by running the entire operating system from the  or 
stick.
    Your computer reads information from a  at a much slower speed than          In some cases, your computer will not recognize
it can read information off of a hard drive. Running Ubuntu from the Live           that the Ubuntu CD or USB is present as it
                                                                                   starts up and will start your existing operating
 also occupies a large portion of your computer’s memory, which would            system instead. Generally, this means that
usually be available for applications to access when Ubuntu is running from        the priority given to boot devices when your
your hard drive. e Live / experience will therefore feel slightly            computer is starting needs to be changed. For
                                                                                   example, your computer might be set to look
slower than it does when Ubuntu is actually installed on your computer.            for information from your hard drive, and then
Running Ubuntu from the / is a great way to test things out and               to look for information on a CD or USB. To run
allows you to try the default applications, browse the Internet, and get a         Ubuntu from the Live CD or USB, we want the
                                                                                   computer to look for information from the
general feel for the operating system. It’s also useful for checking that your     appropriate device first. Changing your boot
computer hardware works properly in Ubuntu and that there are no major             priority is usually handled by BIOS settings; this
compatibility issues.                                                              is beyond the scope of this guide. If you need
                                                                                   assistance with changing the boot priority, see
    To try out Ubuntu using the Live / stick, insert the Ubuntu  into       your computer manufacturer’s documentation
your  drive, or connect the  drive and restart your computer.                 for more information.
    Aer your computer finds the Live / stick, and a quick loading
screen, you will be presented with the “Welcome” screen. Using your
 


mouse, select your language from the list on the le, then click the but-
ton labeled Try Ubuntu. Ubuntu will then start up, running directly from
the Live / drive.

                                                                                 Figure 1.1: The “Welcome” screen allows you to
                                                                                 choose your language.




   Once Ubuntu is up and running, you will see the default desktop. We
will talk more about how to actually use Ubuntu in Chapter : e Ubuntu
Desktop, but for now, feel free to test things out. Open some applications,
change seings and generally explore—any changes you make will not be
saved once you exit, so you don’t need to worry about accidentally breaking
anything.
   When you are finished exploring, restart your computer by clicking the         Alternatively, you can also use your mouse to
“Power” buon in the top right corner of your screen (a circle with a line       double-click the “Install Ubuntu 12.04” icon that
                                                                                 is visible on the desktop when using the Live
through the top) and then select Restart. Follow the prompts that appear on      CD. This will start the Ubuntu installer.
screen, including removing the Live  and pressing Enter when instructed,
and then your computer will restart. As long as the Live  is no longer in
the drive, your computer will return to its original state as though nothing
ever happened!

Installing Ubuntu—Getting started

At least   of free space on your hard drive is required in order to install   Clicking on the underlined “release notes” link
Ubuntu; however,   or more is recommended. is will ensure that              will open a web page containing any important
                                                                                 information regarding the current version of
you will have plenty of room to install extra applications later on, as well     Ubuntu.
as store your own documents, music, and photos. To get started, place the
Ubuntu  in your  drive and restart your computer. Your computer
should load Ubuntu from the . When you first start from the , you
will be presented with a screen asking you whether you want to first try
out Ubuntu or install it. Select the language you want to view the installer
in and click on the Install Ubuntu buon. is will start the installation
process.
   If you have an Internet connection, the installer will ask you if you
would like to “Download updates while installing.” We recommend you
do so. e second option, “Install this third-party soware,” includes the
Fluendo  codec, and soware required for some wireless hardware. If
you are not connected to the Internet, the installer will help you set up a
wireless connection.
   e “Preparing to install Ubuntu” screen will also let you know if you
     .


have enough disk space and if you are connected to a power source (in case
you are installing Ubuntu on a laptop running on baery). Once you have
selected your choices, click Continue.

Internet connection

If you are not connected to the Internet, the installer will ask you to choose
a wireless network (if available).                                               We recommend that you connect during install,
                                                                                 though updates and third-party software can be
. Select Connect to this network, and then select your network from the         installed after installation.

   list.
. If the list does not appear immediately, wait until a triangle/arrow ap-
   pears next to the network adapter, and then click the arrow to see the
   available networks.
. In the Password field, enter the network  or  key (if necessary).
. Click Connect to continue.


                                                                                 Figure 1.2: Set up wireless.




Allocate drive space

is next step is oen referred to as partitioning. Partitioning is the process   If you are installing on a new machine with no
of allocating portions of your hard drive for a specific purpose. When you        operating system, you will not get the first
                                                                                 option. The upgrade option is only available if
create a partition, you are essentially dividing up your hard drive into sec-    you are upgrading from a previous version of
tions that will be used for different types of information. Partitioning can      Ubuntu.
sometimes seem complex to a new user; however, it does not have to be. In
fact, Ubuntu provides you with some options that greatly simplify this pro-
cess. e Ubuntu installer will automatically detect any existing operating
system installed on your machine, and present installations options based
on your system. e options listed below depend on your specific system
and may not all be available:

‣   Install alongside other operating systems
‣   Install inside Windows
‣   Upgrade Ubuntu … to .
‣   Erase … and install Ubuntu
‣   Something else
 


Install alongside other operating systems.

If you are a Windows or Mac user and you are trying to install Ubuntu for                 Ubuntu provides you with the option of either
the first time, select the Install alongside other operating systems option.               replacing your existing operating system
                                                                                          altogether, or installing Ubuntu alongside
is option will enable you to choose which operating system you wish to                   your existing system. The latter is called dual-
use when you computer starts. Ubuntu will automatically detect the other                  booting. Whenever you turn on or restart your
operating system and install Ubuntu alongside it.                                         computer, you will be given the option to select
                                                                                          which operating system you want to use for
                                                                                          that session.
     For more complicated dual-booting setups, you will need to configure the parti-
     tions manually.



                                                                                          Figure 1.3: Choose where you would like to
                                                                                          install Ubuntu.




Upgrade Ubuntu … to 12.04

is option will keep all of your Documents, music, pictures, and other
personal files. Installed soware will be kept when possible (not all your
currently installed soware may be supported on the new version). System-
wide seings will be cleared.

Erase disk and install Ubuntu

Use this option if you want to erase your entire disk. is will delete any
existing operating systems that are installed on that disk, such as Windows
, and install Ubuntu in its place. is option is also useful if you have
an empty hard drive, as Ubuntu will automatically create the necessary
partitions for you.

     Formaing a partition will destroy any data currently on the partition. Be sure to
     back up any data you want to save before Formaing.
                                                                                          Ubuntu installs a home folder where your
                                                                                          personal files and configuration data are
Something else                                                                            located by default. If you choose to have your
                                                                                          home folder on a separate partition, then in the
is option is for advanced users and is used to create special partitions, or             event that you decide to reinstall Ubuntu or
format the hard drive with a file system different to the default one.                      perform a fresh upgrade to the latest release,
                                                                                          your personal files and configuration data won’t
   Aer you have chosen the installation type, click Continue, or Install                 be lost.
Now.                                                                                      More information and detailed instructions
                                                                                          on partitioning are available at: https://help.
                                                                                          ubuntu.com/community/HowtoPartition.
     .


Confirm Partition choices and start install

If you chose Something else, configure the partitions as you need. Once
you are happy with the way the partitions are going to be set up, click the
Install Now buon at the boom right to move on.
    To reduce the time required for installation, Ubuntu will continue the
installation process in the background while you configure important user
details—like your username, password, keyboard seings and default time-
zone.

Where are you?


                                                                              Figure 1.4: Tell Ubuntu your location.




   e next screen will display a world map. Using your mouse, click your
geographic location on the map to tell Ubuntu where you are. Alternatively,
you can use the drop-down lists underneath the map. is allows Ubuntu
to configure your system clock and other location-based features. Click
Forward when you are ready to move on.

Keyboard layout


                                                                              Figure 1.5: Verify that your keyboard layout is
                                                                              correct.




  Next, you need to tell Ubuntu what kind of keyboard you are using.
 


In most cases, you will find the suggested option satisfactory. If you are
unsure which keyboard option to select, you can click the Detect Keyboard
Layout buon to have Ubuntu determine the correct choice by asking you
to press a series of keys. You can also manually choose your keyboard
layout from the list of options. If you like, enter text into the box at the
boom of the window to ensure you are happy with your selection, then
click Continue.

Who are you?

Ubuntu needs to know some information about you so it can set up the
primary user account on your computer. When configured, your name will
appear on the login screen as well as the user menu, which we discuss in
Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop.
   On this screen you will need to tell Ubuntu:

‣   your name
‣   what you want to call your computer
‣   your desired username
‣   your desired password
‣   how you want Ubuntu to log you in


                                                                               Figure 1.6: Setup your user account.




   Enter your full name under “Your name?”. e next text field is the name
your computer uses, for terminals and networks. You can change this to
what you want, or keep the predetermined name. Next is your username,
the name that is used for the user menu, your home folder, and behind the
scenes. You will see this is automatically filled in for you with your first
name. Most people find it easiest to stick with this. However, it can be
changed if you prefer.
   Next, choose a password and enter it into the password field on the
le, and then enter same password into the password field on the right.
When both passwords match, a strength rating will appear to the right
that will show you whether your password is “too short,” “weak,” “fair,” or
“strong.” You will be able to continue the installation process regardless
of your password strength, but for security reasons it is best to choose a
strong one. is is best achieved by having a password that is at least six
characters long, and is a mixture of leers, numbers, symbols, and upper-
     .


case/lowercase. Avoid obvious passwords that include your birth date,
spouse’s name, or the name of your pet.

Login Options

Finally, at the boom of this screen you have three options from which to
choose regarding how you wish to log in to Ubuntu.

‣ Log in automatically
‣ Require my password to log in
‣ Encrypt my home folder

Log in automatically

Ubuntu will log in to your primary account automatically when you start
up the computer so you won’t have to enter your username and password.
is makes your login experience quicker and more convenient, but if
privacy or security are important to you, we don’t recommend this option.
Anyone who can physically access your computer will be able to turn it on
and also access your files.

Require my password to login

is option is selected by default, as it will prevent unauthorized people
from accessing your computer without knowing the password you cre-
ated earlier. is is a good option for those who, for example, share their
computer with other family members. Once the installation process has
been completed, an additional login account can be created for each family
member. Each person will then have their own login name and password,
account preferences, Internet bookmarks, and personal storage space.

Encrypt my home folder

is option provides you with an extra layer of security. Your home folder
is where your personal files are stored. By selecting this option, Ubuntu
will automatically enable encryption on your home folder, meaning that
files and folders must be decrypted using your password before they can be
accessed. erefore if someone had physical access to your hard drive (for
example, if your computer was stolen and the hard drive removed), they
would not be able to see your files without knowing your password.

     If you choose this option, be careful not to enable automatic login at a later date.
     It will cause complications with your encrypted home folder, and will potentially
     lock you out of important files.



Finishing Installation

Ubuntu will now finish installing on your hard drive. As the installation
progresses, a slideshow will give you an introduction to some of the de-
fault applications included with Ubuntu. ese applications are covered in
more detail in Chapter : Working with Ubuntu. e slideshow will also
highlight the Ubuntu support options:
   Aer approximately twenty minutes, the installation will complete and
you will be able to click Restart Now to restart your computer and start
 


                                                                            Figure 1.7: Ubuntu community support options.
                                                                            Where to get help for Ubuntu.




Ubuntu. e  will be ejected, so remove it from your  drive and press
Enter to continue.

                                                                            Figure 1.8: You are now ready to restart your
                                                                            computer.




  Wait while your computer restarts, and you will then see the login win-
dow (unless you selected automatic login).
     .


Login Screen

Aer the installation is over and the computer is restarted, you will be
greeted by the login screen of Ubuntu. e login screen uses LightDM
which is a light on resources and easy to customize display manager. e
login screen will present you with your username and you will have to
enter the password to get past it. Click your username and enter your pass-
word. Once done, you may click the arrow or press Enter to get into the
Ubuntu desktop. Ubuntu’s login screen supports multiple users and also
supports custom backgrounds for each user. In fact, Ubuntu automati-
cally will pick up your current desktop wallpaper and set it as your login
background. Ubuntu’s login screen also lets you select the different en-
vironments to login. In a default Ubuntu installation, you will have two
environments; Ubuntu and Ubuntu-D. If you want to login to Ubuntu-D,
click on the Ubuntu icon and select Ubuntu-D from the list and then enter
your password to login. e login screen allows you to update your key-             A guest session is also available at the login
board language, volume intensity and enable/disable accessibility seings          screen. You can activate this session for guests
                                                                                   using your laptop or desktop.
before you log in to your desktop. It also displays date/time and baery
power for laptops. You can also shut down or restart your system from the
login screen.

                                                                                   Figure 1.9: Login Screen.




Ubuntu installer for Windows

You can install and run Ubuntu alongside your current installation of Win-
dows:

. Download the Ubuntu installer for Windows http://www.ubuntu.com/
   download/ubuntu/windows-installer
. Run the download file
. Install Ubuntu

Download and run the installer

Aer the file, wubi.exe, is downloaded, run the file to start the installation. If
a security message appears, click Continue, to proceed with the installation:
 


                                                                            Figure 1.10: User Account Control dialog




Installation

e Ubuntu Installer will start. Choose and enter a “Username” and “Pass-
word.” e password must be entered twice to ensure accuracy. Aer
choosing a password, click Install. e Ubuntu Installer will download and
install Ubuntu. is process will take some time. e download file size is
Mb. Aer the installation is complete, click Finish on the “Completing
the Ubuntu Setup Wizard” screen to reboot the computer.

                                                                            Figure 1.11: Ubuntu Windows Installer




Installation complete

Aer the computer restarts, you can select “Ubuntu” from the boot menu.
You will then be logged in to Ubuntu and will be presented with your new
desktop!
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
2       The Ubuntu Desktop
Understanding the Ubuntu desktop

Initially, you may notice many similarities between Ubuntu and other             Ubuntu 12.04 has an emphasis on “social
operating systems such as Microso Windows or Mac  . is is because           from the start” and features social network
                                                                                 integration in the desktop for sites like Twitter
they are all based on the concept of a graphical user interface ()—i.e.,      and Facebook.
you use your mouse to navigate the desktop, open applications, move files,
and perform most other tasks. In short, things are visually-oriented. is
chapter is designed to help you become familiar with various applications
and menus in Ubuntu so that you become confident in using the Ubuntu
.

                                                                                 Figure 2.1: The Ubuntu 12.04 default desktop.




Unity

All -based operating systems use a desktop environment. Desktop envi-
ronments encompass many things, such as:
‣ e look and feel of your system
‣ e way the desktop is laid out
‣ How the desktop is navigated by the user
   In Linux distributions (such as Ubuntu), there are a number of desktop        To read more about other variants of Ubuntu,
environments available. Ubuntu uses Unity as the default desktop envi-           refer to Chapter 7: Learning More.

ronment. Aer installing and logging in to Ubuntu, you will see the Unity
desktop. is initial view is comprised of the e Desktop Background and
two bars—one is horizontally located at the top of your desktop and appro-
priately named e top bar, and the other bar is vertically oriented at the far
le, called the Launer.

The Desktop Background

Below the top bar is an image that covers the entire desktop. is is the
default desktop background, or wallpaper, belonging to the default Ubuntu
     .


. theme known as Ambiance. To learn more about customizing your
desktop (including changing your background), see the section on Cus-
tomizing your desktop below.

The top bar

e top bar incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu .. e right          The top bar is also referred as the top panel.
part of the bar is called the indicator area. Each installation of Ubuntu may
contain slightly different types and quantities of icons based on a number of
factors, including type of hardware and available on-board accessories. e
most common indicators are (starting from the le):                              For more about:
                                                                                  ‣ the Messaging Indicator see Microblogging;
Keyboard indicator allows you to select the keyboard layout you would like        ‣ the Network Indicator see Getting online;
   and change your keyboard preferences.                                          ‣ the Session Indicator see Session options.
Messaging indicator incorporates all your social applications. From here,        The keyboard indicator only shows when you
   you can access your instant messenger, your email client, your mi-            have chosen more than one keyboard layout in
                                                                                 the keyboard settings during installation.
   croblogging application, and even UbuntuOne, your personal cloud!
Network indicator allows you to manage your network connections and
   connect quickly and easily to a wired or wireless network.
Sound indicator provides an easy way to adjust the sound volume as well as
   access your music player and sound seings.
Clock displays the current time and provides an easy way to access your
   calendar and Time and Date seings.
User menu allows you to easily switch between different users and access
   your online and user accounts.
Session indicator provides an easy way to access System Seings, Updates,
   Printers, and session options for locking your computer, logging out of
   your session, restarting the computer, or shuing down completely.


                                                                                 Figure 2.2: The Indicators of the top bar.




   Every application has a menu (like File, Edit, View, etc.). In Unity, the
application menu isn’t on the titlebar of the application as is commonly the
case with other  environments. Instead, it is located on the le area of
the top bar. To show an application’s menu, just move your mouse to the
top bar. is capability of Unity to only show the application’s menu when
needed is especially beneficial for netbook and laptop users as it provides
you with more free work space.                                                   Note that some older applications may still
                                                                                 display their menu within the application
                                                                                 window.
The Launcher

e vertical bar of icons on the le side of the screen is called the Launcher.
e Launcher provides easy access to applications, mounted devices, and
the Trash. All running applications on your system will place an icon in
this Launcher while the application is running. e first icon at the top of
the Launcher is the Dash, a major innovation and core element of Unity
—we will explore the Dash in a later section of this chapter. By default,
other applications appear on the Launcher, including applications such as
LibreOffice and Firefox, the Workspace lens, any mounted devices, and, of
course, the always-important Trash lens at the boom of the Launcher.            Workspaces helps you to select the workspace
                                                                                 or the window you want. Trash contains
                                                                                 deleted files.
                                                                                 Tip: Pressing Super+S will show the
                                                                                 Workspaces.
   


                                                                                 Figure 2.3: The Ubuntu 12.04 Launcher Panel on
                                                                                 the left with a sample of applications on it.




Using Launcher

Running applications

To run an application from the Launcher (or cause an already-running             If you hold the Super key, a number will appear
application to appear), just click on the application’s icon. Running applica-   on each of the first ten applications, along with
                                                                                 a margin containing useful shortcuts. You can
tions will have one or more triangles on the le side of its icon, indicating    launch an application with a number n on it by
the number of application windows open for this application. e appli-           typing Super+n.
cation in the foreground (meaning on top of all other open application
windows) has a white triangle on the right side of its icon. You can also run
an application through the Dash. We will talk about the Dash, in the e
Dash section.

Adding and removing applications from the Launcher

ere are two ways to add an application to the Launcher:
                                                                                 Figure 2.4: Just below the Home Folder icon,
‣ Open the Dash, find the application to add, and drag and drop it to the         you will see the Firefox icon. Notice the
  Launcher                                                                       triangle on the right side indicating it is the
                                                                                 application in the foreground (on top of all
‣ Run the application you want to add to the Launcher, right-click on the        other applications), and the triangle on the
  application’s icon on the Launcher, and select Keep in the Launer.            left side indicating there’s only one window
                                                                                 associated with Firefox at this time.
   To remove an application from the Launcher, right-click on the applica-
tion’s icon, then select Remove from the Launer or deselect Keep in the
Launer—if the application is running.

The Dash

e Dash is a tool to help you access and find applications and files on your       The Dash allows you to search for information,
computer quickly. If you are a Windows user, you’ll find the Dash to be           both locally (installed applications, recent files,
                                                                                 bookmarks, etc.) as well as remotely (Twitter,
a more advanced Start Menu. If you are a Mac user, the Dash is similar to        Google Docs, etc.). This is accomplished by
Launchpad in the dock. If you’ve used a previous version of Ubuntu or an-        utilizing one or more lenses, each responsible
other  Linux distribution, the Dash replaces the   menus. To          for providing a category of search results for
                                                                                 the Dash. For more information about the Dash
                                                                                 and its lens, see: https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Unity
     .


explore the Dash, click on the top-most icon on the Launcher; the icon has
the Ubuntu logo on it.Aer selecting the Dash icon, another window will

                                                                                Figure 2.5: The Dash




appear with a search bar on the top as well as grouping of recently accessed
applications, files, and downloads. e search bar provides dynamic results
as you enter your search terms. e five lenses at the boom are links to
your Home lens, Applications lens, Files lens, and Music and Videos lenses.
Lenses act as specialized search categories in the Dash.

Search for files and applications with the Dash

e Dash is an extremely powerful tool and allows you to search your
entire system for applications and filenames based on search terms.

Find files/folder

e Dash can help you find the names of files or folders. Simply type in
what you remember of the name of the file or folder and the Dash will
show results it finds as you type. Note that the Files lens can also assist
you in finding files or folders. e Files lens shows you the most recent
files accessed, as well as recent downloads. You can use the filter results
buon in the top-right corner of the Dash to filter down the results to your
requirements by file or folder modification times, by file type (.odt, .pdf,
.doc, .tex., etc.), or by size.

Find applications

e standard Ubuntu installation comes with many applications. Users
can also download thousands more applications from the Ubuntu Soware
Center. As you collect an arsenal of awesome applications (and get a bonus      Ubuntu Software Center and software manage-
point for alliteration!), it may become difficult to remember the name of a       ment will be discussed in detail at Chapter 5:
                                                                                Software Management.
particular application. Simply use the Application lens on the Dash. is
lens will automatically categorizes installed applications under “Most Fre-
quently Used,” “Installed,” or “Apps Available for Download.”You can also       If you are new to the world of Ubuntu, be
enter a name of the application or a part of it, and the Dash will return the   sure to read the Chapter 3: Working with
                                                                                Ubuntu. It will provide you help in choosing the
results. Even if you don’t remember the name of the application at all, type    application(s) that suit your needs.
a keyword that is relevant to that application and Dash will find it, in most
   


cases (e.g., type music and Dash will return you the default music player
any any music player you’ve used).

                                                                             Figure 2.6: You can see the default results when
                                                                             you press Application lens, and also the criteria
                                                                             on the right side.




Workspaces

Workspaces are also known as virtual desktops. ese separate views
of your desktop allow you to group applications together, and by do-
ing so, help to reduce cluer and improve desktop navigation. In one
workspace, you can open all of your media applications; your office suite
in another, and your web browser open in a third workspace. Ubuntu has
four workspaces by default.

Switching between workspaces

To switch between workspaces, click on the Workspaces Switcher located
on the Launcher. is lens allows you to toggle through the workspaces
(whether they contain open applications or not), and choose the one you
want to use.

Managing windows

When opening a program in Ubuntu (such as a web browser or a text editor
—see Chapter : Working with Ubuntu for more information on using
applications)—a window will appear on your desktop. e windows in
Ubuntu are very similar to those in Microso Windows or Mac  . Simply
stated, a window is the box that appears on your screen when you start a
program. In Ubuntu, the top part of a window (the titlebar) will have the
title of the window centered (most oen, the title will be the name of the
application). A window will also have three buons in the top-le corner.
From le to right, these buons represent close, minimize window, and
maximize window. Other window management options are available by
right-clicking anywhere on the title bar.
     .


                                                                                 Figure 2.7: This is the top bar of a window,
                                                                                 named Titlebar. The close, minimize, and
                                                                                 maximize buttons are on the top-left corner of
                                                                                 window.




Closing, maximizing, restoring, and minimizing windows

To close a window, click on the in the upper-le corner of the window
—the first buon on the le-hand side. e buon immediately to the right
of the is the minimize buon ( ) which removes the window from the
visible screen and places it in the Launcher. is buon doesn’t close the
application, it just hides the application from view. When an application
is minimized to the Launcher, the le-side of the icon in the Launcher will
display a triangle showing you the application is still running. Clicking
the icon of the application that is minimized will restore the window to
its original position. Finally, the right-most buon ( ) is the maximize
buon, which makes the application window fill the entire screen. Clicking
the maximize buon again will return the window to its original size. If
a windows is maximized, its top-le buons and menu are automatically
hidden from view. To make them appear, just move your mouse to the le
side of the top bar.

Moving and resizing windows

To move a window around the workspace, place the mouse pointer over              You can also move a window by holding the Alt
the window’s title bar, then click and drag the window while continuing          key and dragging the window.

to hold down the le mouse buon. To resize a window, place the pointer
on an edge or corner of the window so that the pointer turns into a larger,
two-sided arrow, (known as the resize icon). You can then click and drag to
resize the window.

                                                                                 Figure 2.8: The Workspaces Switcher on the
                                                                                 Launcher.




Switching between open windows

In Ubuntu there are many ways to switch between open windows.                    Super key is also known as the Windows key
                                                                                 (Win key). Press Super+D to hide all window
                                                                                 and display the desktop, the same works to
. If the window is visible on your screen, you can click any portion of it to   restore all windows.
   raise it above all other windows.
   


. Use Alt+Tab to select the window you wish to work with. Hold down
   the Alt key, and keep pressing Tab until the window you’re looking for
   appears in the popup.
. Click on the corresponding icon on the Launcher. Move your mouse to
   the le side of your screen to show the Launcher, and right-click on the
   application icon. If the application has multiple windows open, double-
   click on the icon in order to select the window you want.

Moving a window to different workspace

To move a window to a different workspace, make sure the window isn’t
maximized. If it is maximized, click on the right-most buon on the le
side of the title bar to restore it to its original size. en right-click on the
window’s title bar and select:

‣ Move to Workspace Le, to move the window to the le workspace
‣ Move to Workspace Right, to move the window to the right workspace
‣ Move to Another Workspace, and then choose the workspace you wish
  to move the window to.

Window always on the top or on visible workspace

At times, you may want to have a window always on top so that it can be
seen or monitored while you work with other applications. For example,
you may want to browse the web and, at the same time, view and answer
to any incoming instant message. To keep a window on top, right-click
on the window’s title bar, then select Always on the top. Note that this
window will be on the top of all windows that are opened in the current
workspace. If you want to have a window always on the top regardless of
the workspace, right-click on the window’s titlebar, then select Always on
Visible Workspace. is window will now be on top of all other windows
across all workspaces.

Browsing files on your computer

ere are two ways to locate files on your computer—either search for                You can open your Home folder from the
them or access them directly from their folder. You can search for a file via       Launcher.

the Dash or Files & Folders in the Launcher. You can also use the Files &
Folders tool to access commonly used folders (such as Documents, Music,
Downloads), as well as most recently accessed files.

Places

To access Places, move your mouse over the top bar and select Places. e           If you do not see the desktop menu, click
Places menu holds a list of commonly used folders (such as Documents,              somewhere on the desktop and it will appear.

Music, Downloads, and the Home Folder). You can also browse the files
on your computer by clicking Computer in this menu. If you set up a home
network, you will find a menu item to access shared files or folders. You can
also access the Sear for Files tool from the Places menu, or browse a list
of recently opened folders.

Your Home Folder

e home folder is used to store your personal files. Your home folder
matches your login name. When you open your personal folder, you will
     .


see there are several more folders inside, including: Desktop (which con-
tains any files that are visible on the desktop), Documents, Downloads,
Music, Pictures, Public, Templates, and Videos. ese are created automati-
cally the installation process. You can add more files and folders as needed.

Nautilus file manager

Just as Windows has Windows Explorer and Mac   has Finder to browse
files and folders, Ubuntu uses the Nautilus file manager by default. We will
now look at Nautilus in more detail.

The Nautilus file manager window

When you select the Home Folder shortcut in the Launcher or click on a
folder in the Dash, or double-click on a folder on the desktop, the Nautilus
file manager window opens. e default window contains the following
features:

Menu bar e menubar is located at the top of the screen. ese menus
   allow you to modify the layout of the browser, navigate, bookmark
   commonly used folders and files, and view hidden folders and files.             If you bookmark a folder, it will appear in the
Toolbar e toolbar contains tools for navigation as well as resizing the         Bookmarks menu and in the left pane.

   window. A drop-down list gives you the option of switching the view
   from Icon View to List View or Compact View. e search icon (which
   looks like a magnifying glass) opens a field so you can search for a file by
   name. Just below the toolbar, you will see a representation of your cur-      If you start typing a location in the toolbar
   rent browsing. is is similar to the history function in most browsers;       starting with a / character, Nautilus will
                                                                                 automatically change the navigation buttons
   it keeps track of where you are and allows you to backtrack if necessary.     into a text field labeled Location. It is also
   You can click on the locations to navigate back through the file browser.      possible to convert the navigation buttons into
le page e le pane of the file browser has shortcuts to commonly used           a text field by pressing Ctrl+L.

   folders. When a folder is bookmarked, it appears in the le pane. No
   maer what folder is open, the le pane will always contain the same
   folders. is le pane can be changed to display different features (such
   as Information, Tree, History, etc.) by clicking the down arrow beside
   “Places” near the top.
central pane e largest pane shows the files and folders in the directory
   that you are currently browsing.


Navigating Nautilus

To navigate between folders, use the bookmarks in the le pane of the            What is a Directory? Or a Folder? A directory is
Nautilus file manager. You can also retrace your steps by clicking on the         a division of space in a file system that you can
                                                                                 use to organize files. A folder is the name given
name of a folder in the path bar. Double-clicking on a visible folder will       to a directory in a Graphical User Interface (GUI)
cause you to navigate to it.                                                     environment like Nautilus.



Opening files

A file, in its simplest form, is data. Data can represent a text document,
database information, or data that will be used to produce music or video.
To open a file, you can either double-click on its icon or right-click the icon
and select Open With.
   


                                                                                 Figure 2.9: Nautilus file manager displaying
                                                                                 your home folder.




Creating new folders

To create a new folder from within Nautilus, click File ‣ Create Folder.
en, name the folder that appears by replacing the default “Untitled
Folder” with your desired label (e.g., “Personal Finances”). You can also
create a new folder by pressing Ctrl+Shift+N, or by right-clicking in the
file browser window and selecting Create Folder from the popup menu
(this action will also work on the desktop).

Hidden Files and Folders

If you wish to hide certain folders or files, place a dot (.) in front of the     You can easily view hidden files by clicking
name (e.g., “.Personal Finances”). In some cases it is impossible to hide files   View ‣ Show Hidden Files or by pressing
                                                                                 Ctrl+H. Hiding files with a dot (.) is not a
and folders without prefixing them with a dot. In Nautilus, these folders can     security measure—it simply provides a way to
be hidden by creating a .hidden file. is is accomplished by opening the          keep folders organized and tidy.
file and typing the name of the file or folder you wish to hide. Make sure
that each file or folder is on a separate line. When you open Nautilus, the
folder will no longer be visible.

Copying and moving files and folders

You can copy files or folders in Nautilus by clicking Edit ‣ Copy, or by right-   You can also use the keyboard shortcuts
clicking on the item and selecting Copy from the popup menu. When using          Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to cut, copy, and
                                                                                 paste (respectively) files and folders.
the Edit menu in Nautilus, make sure you’ve selected the file or folder you
want to copy first (by le-clicking on it once). Multiple files can be selected
by le-clicking in an empty space (i.e., not on a file or folder), holding the
mouse buon down, and dragging the cursor across the desired files or
folders. is “click-drag” move is useful when you are selecting items that
are grouped closely together. To select multiple files or folders that are
not positioned next to each other, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking
on each item individually. Once multiple files and/or folders are selected,
you can use the Edit menu to perform actions just like you would for a
single item. When one or more items have been “copied,” navigate to the          When you “cut” or “copy” a file or folder,
desired location then click Edit ‣ Paste (or right-click in an empty area of     nothing will happen until you “paste” it
                                                                                 somewhere. Paste will only affect the most
the window and select Paste) to copy them to the new location. While the         recent item that was cut or copied.
copy command can be used to make a duplicate of a file or folder in a new         In the Nautilus Edit menu, you will also find
location, the cut command can be used to move files and folders around.           the Copy To and Move To buttons. These can
                                                                                 be used to copy or move items to common
                                                                                 locations and can be useful if you are using
                                                                                 panes (see below). Note that it is unnecessary
                                                                                 to use Paste when using these options.
     .


at is, a copy will be placed in a new location, and the original will be
removed from its current location. To move a file or folder, select the item
you want to move then click Edit ‣ Cut. Navigate to the desired location,
then click Edit ‣ Paste. As with the copy command above, you can also               If you click on a file or folder, drag it, and then
perform this action using the right-click menu, and it will work for multiple       hold down the Alt key and drop it to your
                                                                                    destination folder, a menu will appear asking
files or folders at once. An alternative way to move a file or folder is to click     whether you want to copy, , move, or link the
on the item, and then drag it to the new location.                                  item. Notice that the symbol of the mouse
                                                                                    cursor changes from an arrow into a question
                                                                                    mark as soon as you hold down the Alt key.
Using multiple tabs and multiple Nautilus windows

Opening multiple Nautilus windows can be useful for dragging files and
folders between locations. e option of tabs (as well as panes) is also avail-
able in Nautilus. To open a second windows when browsing a folder in                When dragging items between Nautilus
Nautilus, select File ‣ New Window or press Ctrl+N. is will open a new             windows, tabs, or panes, a small symbol will
                                                                                    appear over the mouse cursor to let you
window, allowing you to drag files and/or folders between two locations.             know which action will be performed when
To open a new tab, click File ‣ New Tab or press Ctrl+T. A new row will ap-         you release the mouse button. A plus sign
pear above the space used for browsing your files containing two tabs—both           (+) indicates you are about to copy the item,
                                                                                    whereas a small arrow means the item will be
will display the directory you were originally browsing. You can click these        moved. The default action will depend on the
tabs to switch between them to click and drag files or folders between tabs          folders you are using.
the same as you would between windows. You can also open a second pane
in Nautilus so you can see two locations at once without having to switch
between tabs or windows. To open a second pane, click View ‣ Extra Pane,
or press F3 on your keyboard. Again, dragging files and folders between
panes is a quick way to move or copy items.

Searching for files and folders on your computer

You can search for files and folders using the Dash or Nautilus.                     Search for files and folders quickly by pressing
                                                                                    Ctrl+F in Nautilus and then typing what you
                                                                                    want to find.
Search using the Dash

In the Dash, click Sear for Files. Open the drop-down menu on the right
side of the search bar. Select Folders, All Files, or one of the special folders,
e.g., Documents. It is sufficient to type the first few leers of the file or
folder for which you are searching.

Search using Nautilus

In Nautilus, click Go ‣ Sear for Files, or press Ctrl+F. is opens the
search field where you can type the name of the file or folder you want to
find.

Customizing your desktop

One of the advantages to a windowed environment through Unity is the
ability to change the look and feel of your desktop. Don’t like the default
charcoal Ubuntu theme? Do you have a picture of your third cousin’s aunt’s
uncle’s nephew’s pet chihuahua that you’d love to see on your desktop as
wallpaper? All of this (and more) is possible through desktop customiza-
tions in Unity. Most customizations can be reached via the Session Indicator
and then selecting System Settings to open the System Seings application
window. e Dash, desktop appearance, themes, wallpapers, accessibility,
and other configuration seings are available here. For more information
see Session options.
   


                                                                              Figure 2.10: You can change most of your
                                                                              system’s settings here.




Appearance


                                                                              Figure 2.11: You can change the theme in the
                                                                              Look tab of the “Appearance” window.




   You can change the background, fonts, and window theme to further
modify the look and feel of your desktop. To begin, open Appearance by
either right-clicking on your background and selecting Change Desktop
Baground or selecting Session Indicator ‣ System Settings ‣ Appearance.

Theme

e “Appearance” window will display the current selected background
wallpaper and theme. emes control the appearance of your windows,
buons, scroll bars, panels, icons, and other parts of the desktop. e Am-
biance theme is used by default, but there are other themes from which you
can choose. Just click once on any of the listed themes to give a new theme
a try. e theme will change your desktop appearance immediately.

Desktop background

Under Baground, you may choose from Wallpapers, Pictures Folder,
and Colors and Gradients. When Wallpapers is selected, you will see
     .


Ubuntu’s default selection of backgrounds. To change the background
simply click the picture you would like to use. You’re not limited to this
selection though. To use one of your own pictures, click the +… buon, and
navigate to the image you would like to use, double-click the image, and the
change will take effect immediately. is image will then be added to your
list of available backgrounds. If you want to choose from a larger selection
of desktop backgrounds, click the “Get More Backgrounds Online” link at
the boom of the ”Appearance Preferences” window. is link will open
your web browser, and direct you to the http://art.gnome.org/backgrounds
website.

Accessibility

Ubuntu has built-in tools that make using the computer easier for people
with certain physical limitations. You can find these tools by opening the
Dash and searching for “Universal Access.” On the Seeing tab you can man-
age the text size, the contrast of the interfaces, enable a zoom tool and even
a screen reader. Selecting high-contrast themes and larger on-screen fonts
can assist those with vision difficulties. You can activate “Visual Alerts”
though the Hearing tab, if you have hearing impairment. Also you can ad-
just keyboard and mouse seings to suit your needs through the Typing
and Pointing and Cliing tabs respectively.

                                                                                 Figure 2.12: Universal allows you to enable
                                                                                 extra features to make it easier to use your
                                                                                 computer.




Orca screen reader

Orca is a useful tool for people with visual impairments. Orca comes pre-
installed in Ubuntu. To run Orca, click on the Dash and type Orca, and
click on the displayed result. Orca is the ”Screen Reader” part of Universal
Access and can be launched once the “Screen Reader” is activated. Orca’s
voice synthesizer will activate and assist you through the various options
such as voice type, voice language, Braille, and screen magnification. Once
you have finished selecting your seings, you will need to log out of the
computer (Orca will offer to do this for you). When you log back in, the
Orca seings you selected will automatically run every time you use your
computer.
   


Session options

When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to log
out, suspend, restart, or shut down through the Session Indicator on the
far right side of the top panel. You can also quickly access these options by
pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Del keys.

Logging out

Logging out will leave the computer running but return you to the login
screen. is is useful for switching between users, such as when a different
person wishes to log in to their account, or if you are ever instructed to “log
out and back in again.”                                                            Before logging out, you should always verify
                                                                                   your work in any open applications is saved.

Suspend

To save energy, you can put your computer into suspend mode, which will
save its current condition to internal memory, power off all devices, and
allow you to start back up more quickly. While in a suspended state, the
computer will use just a trickle of energy; this is required because the ses-
sion is saved to internal memory, and if no power goes to internal memory,
the data will be lost.

Rebooting

To reboot your computer, select Shut Down… from the “Session Indicator”
and click on Restart.

Shut down

To totally power down your computer, select Shut Down… from the “Ses-
sion Indicator” and click on Shutdown.

Other options

From the Session Indicator, you can also select Lo Screen to require              You can lock your screen quickly by using the
a password before using the computer again—this is useful if you need              keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+L. Locking your
                                                                                   screen is recommended if you move away from
to leave your computer for some duration. You can also use the Session             your computer for a short amount of time.
Indicator to set up a guest session for a friend, or to switch users to log into
another user account without closing your applications.

Getting help

General Help

Ubuntu, just like other operating systems, has a built-in help reference           Many applications have their own help section
called the Ubuntu Desktop Guide. To access it, click on the Dash and type          which can be accessed by clicking the Help
                                                                                   menu within the application window.
Help. Alternately, you can press F1 while on the desktop, or click Ubuntu
Help in the top bar.

Heads-Up Display help

e  (heads-up display) is a new help feature introduced in Ubuntu
.. is is a keyboard-friendly utility to help you find commands, fea-
tures, and preferences embedded deep within the menu structure of an
     .


                                                                                 Figure 2.13: The HUD (heads-up display) shows
                                                                                 application-specific help information based on
                                                                                 your general input.




application.Activate the  by pressing the le Alt+F2 keys on the key-
board. If you want to search a menu item such as creating a new message
in underbird, then just type message in the  and the option for com-
posing a new email message will come up in the list of matching results.
You can press the Enter key to active the command. e  works for              The HUD feature may not be available in all
almost all applications that are natively installable in Ubuntu; it also works   applications as this is a new capability in Ubuntu
                                                                                 12.04. Your mileage may vary!
for some applications running under wine.
                                                                                 WINE is an acronym for Wine Is Not an Emula-
                                                                                 tor. It allows you to run some Windows-based
On-Line help                                                                     applications in Ubuntu. Discussion of how to
                                                                                 use WINE is beyond the scope of this manual,
If you can’t find an answer to your question in this manual or in the Ubuntu      but it is worth checking out if you need to run
                                                                                 Windows applications under Ubuntu.
Desktop Guide, you can contact the Ubuntu community through the
Ubuntu Forums (http://ubuntuforums.org).Many Ubuntu users open an

                                                                                 Figure 2.14: The built-in system help provides
                                                                                 topic-based help for Ubuntu.




                                                                                 We encourage you to check any information
account on the forums to receive help, and in turn provide support to others     you find on other websites with multiple
as they gain more knowledge. Another useful resource is the Ubuntu Wiki          sources when possible, but only follow direc-
                                                                                 tions if you understand them completely.
(https://wiki.ubuntu.com), a website maintained by the Ubuntu community.
3       Working with Ubuntu
All the applications you need

If you are migrating from a Windows or Mac platform, you may wonder
if the programs that you once used are available for Ubuntu. Some of the
programs you already use have native Linux versions. And, for those that
don’t, there are free and open-source applications that will cover your
needs. is section will recommend some alternates that will work well
on Ubuntu. Most of the applications listed in this section are available via     You can search for more applications in the
the Soware Center. ose followed by an asterisk (*) can be downloaded           Ubuntu Software Center by the category that
                                                                                 you are interested in.
directly from their official websites.

Office Suites

‣ Windows: Microso Office, LibreOffice
‣ Mac  : iWork, Microso Office, LibreOffice
‣ Linux: LibreOffice, KOffice,  Office, Kexi (database application)

   In Ubuntu you may choose among many office suites. e most popular
suite is the LibreOffice (formerly OpenOffice). Included in the suite:
‣   Writer—word processor
‣   Calc—spreadsheet
‣   Impress—presentation manager
‣   Draw—drawing program
‣   Base—database
‣   Math—equation editor
   LibreOffice Suite is installed by default. Note that Base is not installed by
default and it can be installed through Ubuntu Soware Center.

Email Applications

‣ Windows: Microso Outlook, Mozilla underbird
‣ Mac  : Mail.app, Microso Outlook, Mozilla underbird
‣ Linux: Mozilla underbird, Evolution, KMail

   As with office suites, there are multiple options for email applications.
One very popular email application is Mozilla underbird, which is also
available for Windows. underbird is the default email application in
Ubuntu. Another option is Evolution—similar to Microso Outlook, it also
provides a calendar.

Web Browsers

‣ Windows: Microso Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Chromium,
  Google Chrome
‣ Mac  : Safari, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Chromium, Google Chrome
‣ Linux: Mozilla Firefox, Opera*, Chromium, Google Chrome*, Epiphany
                                                                                 Opera is available for download from http://
  e most popular web browsers can be installed directly from the                www.opera.com/browser/download/. Google
                                                                                 Chrome is available for download from https://
Ubuntu Soware Center.                                                           www.google.com/chrome/.
     .


PDF Readers

‣ Windows: Adobe Reader
‣ Mac  : Adobe Reader
‣ Linux: Evince, Adobe Reader, Okular

   Evince is a user-friendly and minimalistic reader, and it is the default
PDF reader. If Evince doesn’t cover your needs, Adobe Reader is available
for Ubuntu too.

Multimedia Players

‣ Windows: Windows Media Player, VLC
‣ Mac  : icktime, VLC
‣ Linux: Totem, VLC, MPlayer, Kaffeine

   For multimedia, Ubuntu users have a wide variety of options for high
quality players. Two popular and powerful media players for Ubuntu are
VLC and Mplayer. Meanwhile, the classic and user-friendly Totem is the
default media player in Ubuntu.

Music Players and Podcatchers

‣ Windows: Windows Media Player, iTunes, Winamp
‣ Mac  : iTunes
‣ Linux: Rhythmbox, Banshee, Amarok, Audacity, Miro

   ere are several options for listening to music with Ubuntu: Rhythmbox
(installed by default), Rhythmbox, and Amarok, among many others. With
these you can listen to music and your favorite podcasts. Audacity is similar
to Winamp. ere is Miro for those of you who watch video podcasts and
TV series from the Internet.

CD/DVD Burning

‣ Windows: Nero Burning ROM, InfraRecorder
‣ Mac  : Burn, Toast Titanium
‣ Linux: Brasero, Kb, Gnome-baker

   e are several popular disk burning applications such as Gnome-baker,
Brasero, Ubuntu’s default CD burner, and Kb. ese burners are powerful
tools, offering user-friendly interfaces, many features and they are all open
source and free of charge!

Photo Management

‣ Windows: Microso Office Picture Manager, Picasa
‣ Mac  : Aperture, Picasa
‣ Linux: Shotwell, gumb, Gwenview, F-Spot

   You can view and manage your favorite photos with Shotwell, Ubuntu’s
default photo manager, or with gumb, Gwenview, and F-Spot.

Graphics Editors

‣ Windows: Adobe Photoshop, GIMP
   


‣ Mac  : Adobe Photoshop, GIMP
‣ Linux: GIMP, Inkscape

   GIMP is a very powerful graphics editor. You can create your own
graphics, taper your photographs, modify your pictures. GIMP, a power-
ful alternative to Photoshop, covers the needs of novice users, professional
photographers, and designers.

     GIMP is not loaded by default, but can be installed via the Soware Center.



Instant Messaging

‣ Windows: Windows Live Messenger, AIM, Yahoo! Messenger, Google
  Talk
‣ Mac  : Windows Live Messenger, AIM, Yahoo! Messenger, Adium,
  iChat
‣ Linux: Empathy, Pidgin, Kopete, aMSN

   None of the other platform  clients have Linux versions. However,
you can use Pidgin, Empathy or Kopete to communicate over most proto-
cols including: AIM, MSN, Google Talk (Jabber/XMPP), Facebook, Yahoo!,
and ICQ. is means you need only one client to communicate with all of
your friends. e drawback is that some of these clients have limited video
support. If you are using MSN exclusively, aMSN may be worth a try.

VoIP Applications

‣ Windows: Skype, Google Video Chat
‣ Mac  : Skype, Google Video Chat
‣ Linux: Ekiga, Skype, Google Video Chat

   VoIP technologies allow you to talk to people over the Internet. e
most popular such application is Skype, which is available for Linux. An
open-source alternative Ekiga supports voice communication using the SIP
protocol. Note that Ekiga isn’t compatible with the Skype.

BitTorrent Clients

‣ Windows: µTorrent, Azureus
‣ Mac  : Transmission, Azureus
‣ Linux: Transmission, Deluge, Azureus, KTorrent, Flush, Vuze, BitStorm
  Lite

  ere are a number of BitTorrent clients for Ubuntu: Transmission,
Ubuntu’s default client, is simple and light-weight, Deluge, Azureus and
KTorrent offer many features and can satisfy the most demanding of users.

Getting online

is section of the manual will help you to check your connection to the
Internet and help you configure it where needed. Ubuntu can connect to
the Internet using a wired, wireless, or a dial up connection. Ubuntu .
also supports more advanced connection methods, which will be briefly
discussed at the end of this section.
     .


   A wired connection is when your computer connects to the Internet
using an Ethernet cable. is is usually connected to a wall socket or a
networking device—like a switch or a router.
   A wireless connection is when your computer connects to the Internet         In order to connect wirelessly, you must be in
using a wireless radio network—usually known as Wi-Fi. Most routers now         a location with a working wireless network.
                                                                                To set up your own wireless network, you will
come with wireless capability, as do most laptops and netbooks. Because of      need to purchase and install a wireless router
this, Wi-Fi is the most common connection type for these types of devices.      or access point. Some locations may already
Wireless connectivity makes laptops and netbooks more portable when             have a publicly accessible wireless networks
                                                                                available. If you are unsure whether your
moving to different rooms of a house and while traveling.                        computer has a wireless card, check with your
   A dialup connection is when your computer uses a modem to connect to         manufacturer.
the Internet through a telephone line.

NetworkManager

In order to connect to the Internet using Ubuntu, you need to use the Net-      Figure 3.1: Different connection states and
workManager utility. NetworkManager allows you to turn network con-             their respective icons.

nections on or off, manage wired and wireless networks, and make other
network connections, such as dial up, mobile broadband, and VPN’s.
    You can access NetworkManager by using its icon found the top panel.
is icon may look different depending on your current connection state.
Clicking this icon will reveal a list of available network connections. e
current connection (if any) will have the word “disconnect” underneath it.
You can click on “disconnect” to manually disconnect from that network.
    is menu also allows you to view technical details about your current
connection or edit all connection seings. In the image to the right you        Figure 3.2: Here you can see the currently
will see a tick mark next to “Enable Networking.” Click on the tick mark        active connection is “Wired connection 1.”

to disable all network connections. Clicking a second time will enable
networking again. is can be very useful when you are required to turn off
all wireless communications, like in an airplane.

Establishing a wired connection

If you have an Ethernet cable running from a wall socket or networking          Are you already online? If the NetworkManager
device, such as a switch or router, then you will want to setup a wired         icon in the top panel shows a connection then
                                                                                you may have successfully connected during
connection in Ubuntu.                                                           the Ubuntu setup process. You can also simply
    In order to connect to the Internet with a wired connection, you need to    open a browser and see if you have access
know whether your network supports  (Dynamic Host Configuration              to the Internet. If so, you do not need to do
                                                                                anything for the rest of this section.
Protocol).  is a way for your computer to automatically be configured
to access your network and/or Internet connection.  is usually auto-
matically configured on your router. is is usually the quickest and easiest
way of establishing a connection to the Internet. If you are unsure whether
your router is setup to use , you may wish to contact your ’s (In-
ternet Service Provider) customer service line to check. If your router isn’t
configured to use  then they will also be able to tell you what configu-
ration seings you need in order to get online.

Automatic connections with DHCP

If your network supports  then you may already be set up for online
access. To check this, click on the NetworkManager icon. ere should be
a “Wired Network” heading in the menu. If “Wired connection ” appears
directly underneath, then your machine is currently connected and proba-
bly setup for . If “Disconnected” appears in gray underneath the wired
network section, look below to see if an option labeled “Wired connec-
                                                                                Figure 3.3: This window displays your IP address
                                                                                and other connection information.
   


tion ” appears in the list. If so, click on it to aempt to establish a wired
connection.
   To check if you are online, click on the NetworkManager icon in the              An IP (Internet Protocol) address is a unique
top panel and select the Connection Information option. You should see a            number assigned to your machine so that your
                                                                                    router can identify you on the network. Think
window showing details of your connection. If your  address is displayed          of it like a phone number for your computer.
as ... or starts with ., then your computer was not successfully          Having this unique address allows the router
assigned connection information through . If it shows another address           to speak to your computer, and therefore
                                                                                    send/receive data.
(e.g., ...), then it is likely that your  connection to the           If you are still not online after following these
router was successful. To test your Internet connection, you may want to            steps, you may need to try setting up your
open the Firefox web browser to try loading a web page. More information            network connection manually using a static IP
                                                                                    address.
on using Firefox can be found later in this chapter.

Manual configuration with static address

If your network does not support  then you need to know a few items
of information before you can get online. If you do not know any of this
information, then you call your .

‣ An  address—is is a unique address used for identifying your com-
  puter on the network. An  address is always given in four numbered
  groups, separated by dots, for example – .... When connect-
  ing using , this address will periodically change (hence, the name
  ”dynamic”). However, if you have configured a static  address, your IP
  address will never change.
‣ A network mask—is tells your computer the size of the network to
  which it is being connected. It is formaed the same way as the  ad-
  dress, but usually looks something like ....
‣ A gateway—is is the  address of the device that your machine looks
  to for access to the Internet. Usually, this will be the router’s  address.
‣  server—is is the  address of the  (Domain Name Service)
  server.  is what your computer uses to resolve  addresses to domain                 If you do not know your ISP’s DNS
  names. For example http://www.ubuntu.com resolves to ....                      server addresses, Google has DNS
                                                                                           servers that anyone in the world
  is is the  address of the Ubuntu website on the Internet.  is
                                                                                           can use for free. The addresses of
  used so you don’t have to remember  addresses. Domain names (like
                                                                                           these servers are: Primary – 8.8.8.8
  ubuntu.com) are much easier to remember. You will need at least one                      Secondary – 8.8.4.4
   server address but you can enter up to three addresses in case one
  server is unavailable.

    To manually configure a wired connection, click on the NetworkManager
icon and select Edit Connections. Make sure you are looking at the “Wired
tab” inside the “Network Connections” window. e list may already have
an entry, such as “Wired connection ” or a similar name. If a connection is
listed, select it and click the Edit buon. If no connection is listed, click the
Add buon.
    If you are adding a connection, you need to provide a name for the
connection. is will distinguish the connection being added from any
other connections added in future. In the “Connection Name” field, choose a
name such as “Wired Home.”
    To setup the connection:

. Make sure that the Connect automatically option is selected under the
   connection name.
. Switch to the v Settings tab.
. Change the Method to “Manual.”
                                                                                    Figure 3.4: In this window you can manually edit
. Click on the Add buon next to the empty list of addresses.
                                                                                    a connection.
     .


. Enter your  address in the field below the Address header.
. Click to the right of the  address, directly below the Netmask header
   and enter your network mask. If you are unsure, “...” is the
   most common.
. Click on the right of the network mask directly below the Gateway
   header and enter the address of your gateway.
. In the  Servers field below, enter the address of your  server(s).
   If you are entering more than one, separate them with commas—for
   example, “..., ...”.
. Click Apply to save your changes.


     A  address is a hardware address for your computer’s network card. Entering
     this information is sometimes important when using a cable modem connection.
     If you know the  address of your network card, this can be entered in the
     appropriate text field in the Wired tab of the editing window. To find the MAC
     addresses for all installed networking devices, open a terminal window, and at
     the command line prompt, type ifconfig. is will display a lot of information
     about each of the network devices installed on the computer. e wired devices
     will be labeled as LAN, LAN, etc. e wireless devices will appear as WLAN,
     WLAN, etc.

   When you have returned to the Network Connections screen, your
newly added connection should now be listed. Click Close to return to the
desktop. If your connection was configured correctly, the NetworkManager
icon should have changed to show an active wired connection. To test if
your connection is properly set up, simply open a web browser. If you can
access the Internet, then you are connected!

Wireless

If your computer is equipped with a wireless (Wi-Fi) card and you have a
wireless network nearby, you should be able to set up a wireless connection
in Ubuntu.

Connecting to a wireless network for the first time

If your computer has a wireless network card, you can connect to a wireless           To improve speed and reliability of your
network. Most laptops and netbooks have a built-in wireless networking                wireless connection, try moving closer to your
                                                                                      router or wireless access point.
card.
    Ubuntu is usually able to detect any wireless network in range of your
computer. To see a list of wireless networks, click on the NetworkMan-
ager icon. Under the “Wireless Networks” heading you should see a list of
available wireless networks. Each network will be shown by its name and a
signal meter to the le showing its relative signal strength. e signal meter
looks like a set of bars similar to what is seen when viewing signal strength
of a cell phone. Simply put, the more bars, the stronger the signal.
    A wireless network can be open to anyone, or it can be protected with
a password. A small padlock will be displayed by the signal bar if any
wireless network within range are password-protected. You will need to
know the correct password in order to connect to these secured wireless
networks.
    To connect to a wireless network, select the desired network by clicking
on its name within the list. is will be the name that was used during
the installation of the wireless router or access point. Most s (Internet
   


service providers) provide pre-configured routers with a sticker on them
detailing the current wireless network name and password. Most publicly
accessible wireless networks will be easily identifiable by the name used for
the wireless network—for example “Starbucks-Wireless.”
    If the network is unprotected (i.e., the signal meter does not show a pad-
lock), a connection should be established within a few seconds—and with-
out a password required. e NetworkManager icon in the top panel will
animate as Ubuntu aempts to connect to the network. If the connection
is successful, the icon will change to display a signal meter. An on-screen
notification message will also appear informing you that the connection
was successful.
    If the network is password-protected, Ubuntu will display a window
called “Wireless Network Authentication Required” as it tries to make a
connection. is means that a valid password is required to make a connec-
tion. is is what the screen should look like:

                                                                                 Figure 3.5: Enter your wireless network
                                                                                 password.




   If you know the password, enter it in the Password field and then click
on the Connect buon. As you type the password, it will be obscured from
view to prevent others from reading the password as you type it. . Once the      To verify the characters you are entering for
password is entered, click on the Connect buon. e NetworkManager               the password, you can view the password by
                                                                                 selecting the Show Password check box. Then,
icon in the top panel will animate as Ubuntu aempts to connect to the           you can make the password obscure again by
network. If the connection is successful, the icon will change to display a      selecting the Show password check box again
signal meter. An on-screen notification message will also appear informing
you that the connection was successful.
   If you entered the password incorrectly, or if it doesn’t match the cor-
rect password (for example if it has recently been changed and you have
forgoen), NetworkManager will make another aempt to connect to the
network, and the “Wireless Network Authentication Required” window will
re-appear so that you can re-type the password. You can hit the Cancel but-
ton to abort the connection. If you do not know the correct password, you
may need to call you ’s customer support line or contact your network
administrator.
   Once you have successfully established a wireless connection, Ubuntu
will store these seings (including the password) to make it easier to con-
nect to this same wireless network in the future. You may also be prompted
to select a keyring password here. e keyring stores passwords in one
place so you can access them all in the future by remembering just the
keyring password.

Connecting to a saved wireless network

If you have previously established a connection to a wireless network, this
connection information will be stored by Ubuntu. is will allow you to
connect to the network again without having to re-enter the password.
    In addition, Ubuntu will automatically try to connect to a wireless net-
     .


work in range if it has the seings saved. is works on both open and
secure wireless networks.
   If you have numerous wireless networks in range that are saved on
your computer, Ubuntu may choose to connect to a one network while you
may want to connect to another network. To remedy this action, click on
the NetworkManager icon. A list of wireless networks will appear along
with their signal meters. Simply click on the network to which you wish to
connect, and Ubuntu will disconnect from the current network and aempt
to connect to the one you have selected.
   If the network is secure and Ubuntu has the details for this network
saved, Ubuntu will automatically connect. If the details for this network
connection are not saved, or incorrect, or have changed, then you will be
prompted to enter the network password again. If the network is open (no
password required), all of this will happen automatically and the connection
will be established.

Connecting to a hidden wireless network

In some environments, you may need to connect to a hidden wireless net-
work. ese hidden networks do not broadcast their names, and, therefore,
their names will not appear in the list of available wireless networks even
if they are in range. In order to connect to a hidden wireless network, you
will need to get its name and security details from your network adminis-
trator or .
    To connect to a hidden wireless network:

. Click on NetworkManager in the top panel.
. Select Connect to a hidden wireless network. Ubuntu will then open
   the “Connect to Hidden Wireless Network” window.
. In the Network name field, enter the name of the network. is is also
   known as the  (Service Set Identifier). You must enter the name ex-
   actly how it was given to you. For example, if the name is “Ubuntu-
   Wireless,” entering “ubuntu-wireless” will not work as the “U” and “W”
   are both uppercase in the correct name.
. In the Wireless security field, select one of the options. If the network
   is an open network, leave the field set to “None.” If you do not know the
   correct seing for the field, you will not be able to connect to the hidden
   network.
. Click the Connect buon. If the network is secure, you will be prompted
   for the password. Provided you have entered all of the details correctly,
   the network should then connect, and you will receive an on-screen
   notification informing you that the connection was a success.

   As is the case with visible wireless networks, hidden wireless network
seings will be saved once a connection is made, and the wireless network
will then appear in the list of saved connections NetworkManager.

Disabling and enabling your wireless card

By default, wireless access is enabled if you have a wireless card installed in   Many modern laptops also have a physical
your computer. In certain environments (like on airplanes), you may need          switch/button built into the chassis that
                                                                                  provides a way to quickly enable/disable the
to temporarily disable your wireless card.                                        wireless card.
   To disable your wireless card, click on the NetworkManager icon and
deselect the Enable Wireless option. Your wireless radio will now be turned
off, and your computer will no longer search for wireless networks.
   


   To reactivate your wireless card, simply reverse the process above.
 Ubuntu will then begin to search for wireless networks automatically. If
 you are in range of a saved network, you will automatically be connected.

 Changing an existing wireless network

 At times you may want to change the seings of a saved wireless network
 —for example, when the wireless password gets changed.
    To edit a saved wireless network connection:

 . Click on the NetworkManager icon and select Edit Connections…
 . A “Network Connections” window will open. Click on the Wireless tab.
 . By default, saved networks are in chronological order with the most
    recently connected at the top. Find the network you want to edit, click
    on it, and click on the Edit buon.
 . Ubuntu will now open a window called “Editing ⟨connection name⟩”,
    where ⟨connection name⟩ is the name of the connection you are editing.
    is window will display a number of tabs.
 . Above the tabs, there is a field called Connection name where you can
    change the name of the connection to give it a more recognizable name.
 . If the Connect automatically option is not selected, Ubuntu will detect
    the wireless network but will not aempt a connection until it is se-
    lected from the NetworkManager menu. Select or deselect this option as
    needed.
 . On the Wireless tab, you may need to edit the  field. A  is the
    wireless connection’s network name. If this field isn’t set correctly,
    Ubuntu will not be able to connect to the wireless network in question.
 . Below the  is a Mode field. e “Infrastructure” mode means that
    you would be connecting to a wireless router or access point. e “ad-
    hoc” mode is for a computer-to-computer connection (where one com-
    puter shares another’s connection) and is oen only used in advanced
    cases.
 . On the Wireless Security tab, you can change the Security field. A
    selection of “None” means that you are using an open network that
    doesn’t require a password. Other selection in this tab may required
    additional information:
     /-bit Key is an older security seing is still in use by some
       older wireless devices. If your network uses this method of security,
       you will need to enter a key in the Key field that will appear when
       this mode is selected.
     -bit Passphrase is the same older security as above. However,
       instead of having a key, your network administrator should have
       provided you with a passphrase to connect to the network.
     &  Personal is the most common security mode for wireless
       networking. Once you select this mode, you will need to enter a
       password in the Password field.
     If your network administrator requires , Dynamic  or  &
        Enterprise then you will need to have the administrator help
       you with those modes.
. In the v Settings tab, you can change the Method field from “Auto-
    matic ()” to “Manual” or one of the other methods. For seing up
    manual seings (also known as a static address), please see the section
    above on manual setup for wired network connections.
     .


. When you finish making changes to the connection, click Apply to save
    your changes and close the window. You can click Cancel at any time to
    close the window without saving any changes.
. Finally, click Close on the “Network Connections” window to return to
    the desktop.

    Aer clicking Apply, any changes made to the network connection will
 take effect immediately.

 Other connection methods

 ere are other ways to get connected with Ubuntu.
    With NetworkManager, you can configure “Mobile Broadband” connec-
 tions to connect to the Internet through your cellular data carrier.
    You can connect to  (Digital Subscriber Line) networks, a method of
 connecting to the Internet through your phone line via a modem.
    It is also possible for NetworkManager to establish a  (Virtual Private
 Network) connection. ese are most commonly used to create a secure
 connection to a workplace network.
    e instructions for making connections using “Mobile Broadband,” ,
 or  are beyond the scope of this guide.

 Browsing the web

 Once you have connected to the Internet, you should be able to browse the
 web. Mozilla Firefox is the default application for this in Ubuntu.

                                                                                 Figure 3.6: The default Ubuntu home page for
                                                                                 the Firefox web browser.




 Starting Firefox

 ere are several ways to start Firefox. By default Ubuntu has the Firefox
 icon within the Launcher (the vertical bar down the le side of the screen).
 Select this icon to open Firefox. Or, open the Dash (the top-most icon in the
   


Launcher) and search for ‘firefox’ using the search box. If your keyboard
has a “” buon, you can press that buon to start Firefox.

Navigating web pages

Viewing your homepage

When you start Firefox, you will see your home page. By default, this is the
Ubuntu Start Page.
   To quickly go to your home page, press Alt+Home on your keyboard or
press on the home icon in Firefox.

Navigating to another page

To navigate to a new web page, you need to enter its Internet address (also      URL stands for uniform resource locator, which
known as a ) into the Location Bar. s normally begin with “hp://”         tells the computer how to find something on
                                                                                 the Internet—such as a document, web page or
followed by one or more names that identify the address. One example             an email address. WWW stands for World Wide
is “http://www.ubuntu.com/.” (Normally, you can omit the “hp://“ part.          Web, which means the web pages by which
Firefox will fill it in for you.)                                                 most people interact with the Internet.



                                                                                 Figure 3.7: You can enter a web address or
                                                                                 search the Internet by typing in the location
                                                                                 bar.

   To navigate:

. Double-click in the Location Bar, or press Ctrl+L, to highlight the 
   that is already there.
. Enter the  of the page you want to visit. e  you type replaces
   any text already in the Location Bar.
. Press Enter.

   If you don’t know the  that you need, type a search term into the
Search Bar to the right of the Location bar. Your preferred search engine
—Google by default—will return a list of websites for you to choose from.
(You can also enter your query directly into the Location Bar).

Selecting a link

Most web pages contain links that you can select. ese are known as
“hyperlinks.” A hyperlink can let you move to another page, download a
document, change the content of the page, and more.
   To select a link:

. Move the mouse pointer until it changes to a pointing finger. is hap-
   pens whenever the pointer is over a link. Most links are underlined text,
   but buons and pictures on a web page can also be links.
. Click the link once. While Firefox locates the link’s page, status messages
   will appear at the boom of the window.

Retracing your steps

If you want to visit a page you have viewed before, there are several ways       To go backwards and forwards you can also use
to do so.                                                                        Alt+Left and Alt+Right respectively.


‣ To go back or forward one page, press the Ba or Forward buon by
  the le side of the Location Bar.
     .


‣ To go back or forward more than one page, click-and-hold on the re-
  spective buon. You will see a list of pages you have recently visited. To
  return to a page, select it from the list.
‣ To see a list of any s you have entered into the Location Bar, press
  the down arrow at the right end of the Location Bar. Choose a page from
  the list.
‣ To choose from pages you have visited during the current session, open
  the History menu and choose from the list in the lower section of the
  menu.
‣ To choose from pages you have visited over the past few months, open
  the History ‣ Show All History (or press Ctrl+Shift+H). Firefox opens a
  “Library” window showing a list of folders, the first of which is “History.”
  Select a suitable sub-folder, or enter a search term in the search bar (at
  the top right), to find pages you have viewed before. Double-click a
  result to open the page.

Stopping and reloading

If a page is loading too slowly or you no longer wish to view a page, press       The Reload button is at the right end of the
Esc to cancel it. To reload the current page if it might have changed since       Location Bar.

you loaded it, press on the Reload buon or press Ctrl+R.

Opening new windows

At times, you may want to have more than one browser window open. is
may help you to organize your browsing session beer, or to separate web
pages that you are viewing for different reasons.
   ere are four ways to create a new window:

‣ On the top bar, select File ‣ New Window.
‣ Press Ctrl+N.
‣ Right-click on Firefox’s icon on the Launcher and select Open New
  Window.
‣ Click on Firefox’s icon on the Launcher using your middle mouse buon.

   Once a new window has opened, you can use it exactly the same as
the first window—including navigation and opening tabs. You can open
multiple windows.

Opening a link in a new window

Sometimes, you may want to click a link to navigate to another web page,
but do not want the original to close. To do this, you can open the link in its
own independent window.
   ere are two ways to open a link in its own window:

‣ Right-click a link and select Open Link in New Window.
‣ Press-and-hold the Shift key while clicking a link.

Tabbed browsing

An alternative to opening new windows is to use Tabbed Browsing instead.
  Tabbed browsing lets you open several web pages within a single Firefox         A new tab is independent of other tabs in the
window, each independent of the other. is frees space on your desktop as         same way that new windows are independent
                                                                                  of other windows. You can even mix-and-match
you do not have open a separate window for each new web page. You can             —for example, one window may contain tabs
                                                                                  for your emails, while another window has tabs
                                                                                  for your work.
   


open, close, and reload web pages in one place without having to switch to
another window.
   You can alternate quickly between different tabs by using the keyboard
shortcut Ctrl+Tab.

Opening a new blank tab

ere are three ways to create a new blank tab:

‣ Click on the Open new tab buon (a green plus-sign) on the right side of
  the last tab.
‣ On the top bar, open File ‣ New Tab.
‣ Press Ctrl+T.

  When you create a new tab, it contains a blank page with the Location
Bar focused. Typing a web address () or other search term to open a
website in the new tab.

Opening a link in its own tab

Sometimes, you may want to click a link to navigate to another web page,
but do not want the original to close. To do this, you can open the link in its
own tab.
   ere are several ways to open a link in its own tab.
                                                                                  A tab always opens “in the background”—in
                                                                                  other words, the focus remains on the original
‣ Right-click a link and select Open Link in New Tab.                             tab. The last method (Ctrl+Shift) is an
                                                                                  exception; it focuses the new tab immediately.
‣ Press-and-hold the Ctrl key while clicking a link.
‣ Click the link using either the middle mouse buon or both le and right
  mouse buons simultaneously.
‣ Drag the link to a blank space on the tab bar or onto the Open new tab
  buon.
‣ Press-and-hold Ctrl+Shift while clicking a link.

Closing a tab

Once you have finished viewing a web page in a tab, you have various ways
to close it:

‣   Click on the Close buon on the right side of the tab.
‣   Click the tab with the middle mouse buon or the mouse wheel.
‣   Press Ctrl+W.
‣   Right-click the tab and select Close Tab.

Restoring a closed tab

Sometimes, you may close the wrong tab by accident, or want to bring back
a tab that you have recently closed. Bring back a tab in one of the following
two ways:

‣ Press Ctrl+Shift+T to re-open the most recently closed tab.
‣ Select History ‣ Recently Closed Tabs, and choose the name of the tab to
  restore.
     .


Changing the tab order

Move a tab to a different location on the tab bar by dragging it to a new
location using your mouse. While you are dragging the tab, Firefox displays
a small indicator to show the tab’s new location.

Moving a tab between windows

You can move a tab into a new Firefox window or, if one is already open,
into a different Firefox window.
   Drag a tab away from the tab bar, and it will open into a new window.
Drag it from the tab bar into the tab bar of another open Firefox window,
and it will move there instead.

Searching

You can search the web from within Firefox without first visiting the home
page of the search engine. By default, Firefox will search the web using the
Google search engine.

Searching the web

To search the web in Firefox, type a few words into the Firefox search Bar.
For example, if you want to find information about the Ubuntu:

. Move your cursor to the Sear Bar using your mouse or press Ctrl+K.
. Type the phrase Ubuntu. Your typing replaces any text currently in the
   Search Bar.
. Press the magnifying glass or Enter to search.

  Search results from Google for “Ubuntu” will appear in the Firefox win-
dow.

Selecting search engines

If you do not want to use Google as your search engine in the Search Bar,
you can change the search engine that Firefox uses.
    To change your preferred search engine, press the search logo (at the      Figure 3.8: These are the other search engines
le of your Search Bar—Google by default) and choose the search engine of      you can use—by default—from the Firefox
your choice. Some search engines, such as Bing, Google and Yahoo, search       search bar.

the whole web; others, such as Amazon and Wikipedia, search only specific
sites.

Searching the web for words selected in a web page

Sometimes, you may want to search for a phrase that you see on a web
page. You can copy and paste the phrase into the Search Bar, but there is a
quicker way.

. Highlight the word or phrase in a web page using your le mouse but-
   ton.
. Right-click the highlighted text and select Sear [Sear Engine] for
   [your selected words].

   Firefox passes the highlighted text to the search engine, and opens a new
tab with the results.
   


Searching within a page


                                                                                    Figure 3.9: You can search within web pages
                                                                                    using the Find Toolbar.




   You may want to look for specific text within the web page you are
viewing. To find text within the current page in Firefox:
. Choose Edit ‣ Find or press Ctrl+F to open the Find Toolbar at the
   boom of Firefox.
. Enter your search query into the Find field in the Find Toolbar. e
   search automatically begins as soon as you type something into the field.
. Once some text has been matched on the web page, you can:
   ‣ Click on Next to find text in the page that is below the current cursor
     position.
   ‣ Click on Previous to find text that is above the current cursor posi-
     tion.
   ‣ Click on Highlight all to highlight all occurrences of your search
     words in the current page.
   ‣ Select the Mat case option to limit the search to text that has the
     same capitalization as your search words.
   To quickly find the same word or phrase again, press F3.
   You can skip opening the Find Toolbar altogether.
. Turn on the relevant Accessibility option with Edit ‣ Preferences ‣
   Advanced ‣ General ‣ Accessibility ‣ Sear for text when I start typ-
   ing ‣ Close.
. Now, provided your cursor is not within a text field, when you start
   typing, it will automatically start searching for text.

Viewing web pages full screen

To display more web content on the screen, you can use Full Screen mode.
Full Screen mode hides everything but the main content. To enable Full
Screen mode, choose View ‣ Full Screen or press F11. While in full-screen
mode, move your mouse to the top of the screen to reveal the  and
search bars.
   Press F11 to return to normal mode.

Copying and saving pages

With Firefox, you can copy part of a page so that you can paste it elsewhere,
or save the page or part of a page as a file on your computer.

Copying part of a page

To copy text, links or images from a page:
. Highlight the text and images with your mouse.
. Right-click the highlighted text and select Copy, or press Ctrl+C.
    To copy just a single image, it is not necessary to highlight it. Just right-
click the image and select Copy.
    You can paste the results into another application, such as LibreOffice.
     .


Copying a link

To copy a text or image link () from a page:

. Position the pointer over the text, link or image. Your mouse pointer
   changes to a pointing finger.
. Right-click the link or image to open a pop-up menu.
. Select Copy Link Location.

  You can paste the link into other applications or into Firefox’s Location
Bar.

Saving all or part of a page

To save an entire page in Firefox:

. Choose File ‣ Save Page As from the top bar, or press Ctrl+S. Firefox
   opens the “Save As” window.
. Choose a location for the saved page.
. Type a file name for the page.
. Press Save.

   To save an image from a page:

. Position the mouse pointer over the image.
. Right-click the image and select Save Image As. Firefox opens the “Save
   Image” window.
. Choose a location for the saved image.
. Enter a file name for the image.
. Press Save.

Changing your home page

Firefox shows the home page when it opens. By default, this is the Ubuntu
Start Page. You can change your default home page to a new one, or even to
several new ones.

                                                                              Figure 3.10: Change Firefox settings in this
                                                                              window.




   To change your home page:
   


. Navigate to the page that you would like to become your new home
   page. If you want Firefox to open more than one tab when it starts, open
   a new tab and navigate to the extra page as many times as you would
   like.                                                                             The home page can also be set by entering the
. Choose Edit ‣ Preferences ‣ General ‣ Startup ‣ Use Current Pages ‣               addresses that should be open in the Home
                                                                                     Page, with a pipe (“|”) separating pages to be
   Close.                                                                            opened in separate tabs.


Download settings

In Edit ‣ Preferences ‣ General ‣ Downloads, you can hide or show the                The Downloads window shows the progress
Downloads window, tell Firefox where to place downloaded files, and                   of currently downloading files, and lists files
                                                                                     downloaded in the past. It can be used to open
whether or not to ask where each time.                                               or re-download files.


Bookmarks

When browsing the web you may want to come back to certain web pages
again without having to remember the . To do this, you bookmark each
page. ese bookmarks are saved in the web browser, and you can use them
to re-open to those web pages.

Bookmarking a page

Aer navigating to a web page you can save its location by bookmarking it.
ere are two ways to bookmark a page:

‣ From the top bar, choose Bookmarks ‣ Bookmark is Page, or press
  Ctrl+D. A window opens, allowing you to provide a descriptive name for
  the bookmark and a location (within the browser’s bookmarks) to save it.
  Press Done to save.
‣ Press the star on the right-hand side in the Location Bar. It turns yellow.
  is saves the page in the Unsorted Bookmarks folder.

Navigating to a bookmarked page

To navigate to a bookmarked page, open the Bookmarks menu from the top
bar, and choose your bookmark. Firefox opens the bookmark in the current
tab.

     You can reveal the bookmarks, including the Unsorted Bookmarks, in a sidebar
     on the le of the browser window. Select View ‣ Sidebar ‣ Bookmarks, or press
     Ctrl+B. Repeat, or press the close button at its top, to hide the sidebar.




Deleting or editing a bookmark

To delete or edit a bookmark, do one of the following:

‣ If you are viewing the page already, the star in the Location Bar will be
  yellow. Press it. Firefox opens a small pop-up window, where you can
  either Remove Bookmark or edit the bookmark.
‣ Select Bookmarks ‣ Show All Bookmarks or press Shift+Ctrl+O. In
  the window that opens, you can navigate to bookmarks. Select the one
  you would like to change. To delete, right-click and choose Delete or
  press Delete on your keyboard. To edit, change the details shown at the
  boom of the window.
     .


History

Whenever you are browsing the web, Firefox saves your browsing history.
is allows you to come back to a web page that you have recently visited
without needing to remember or bookmark the page’s .
   To see your most recent history, open the History menu from the top
bar. e menu displays several of the most recent web pages that you have
viewed. Choose one of the pages to return to it.
   To view the complete history, either:

‣ Select View ‣ History or press Ctrl+H to view the history in a sidebar
  (this replaces the bookmarks sidebar if it is open). (Repeat, or press the
  close button at its top, to hide the sidebar.)
‣ Select History ‣ Show All History or press Shift+Ctrl+H to view the
  history in a pop-up window.

   Your browsing history is categorized as “Today,” “Yesterday,” “Last 
days,” “is month,” the previous five months by name, and finally “Older
than  months.” If history for a category does not exist, that category will
not be listed. Select one of the date categories in the sidebar to expand it
and reveal the pages that you visited during that time. Once you find the
page you want, select it to re-display it.
   You can also search for a page by its title or . Enter a few leers
from one or more words or, optionally, the  in the Sear field at the
top of the history sidebar. e sidebar displays a list of web pages matching
your search words. Select the page you want. (You can even do this in the
Location Bar, saving you from having to open the History sidebar or pop-up
window.)

Clearing private data

Firefox stores all its data only on your computer. Nevertheless, if you share
your computer, you may at times want to delete all private data.
   Select Tools ‣ Clear Recent History or press Shift+Ctrl+Delete. Choose
your Time range to clear, and under Details which items to clear, and press
Clear Now.

Preventing Firefox from recording private data

You can start “private browsing,” where Firefox will not record anything
permanently. is lasts until you turn it off or until you restart Firefox.
   Choose Tools ‣ Start Private Browsing or press Shift+Ctrl+P. Press the
buon Start Private Browsing to confirm. As long as you remain in this
mode, Firefox will not record browsing, download, form or search history,
or cookies, nor will it cache files. However, if you bookmark anything or
download files, these will be retained.
   Repeat Tools ‣ Start Private Browsing or Shift+Ctrl+P, or restart Fire-
fox, to end private browsing.

Using a different web browser

If you choose to install a different web browser on your computer, you
may want to use it as the default browser when you click links from
emails, instant messages, and other places. Canonical supports Firefox
and Chromium (Google’s Linux version of Chrome), but there are several
others that you can choose from.
   


                                                                                   Figure 3.11: The Default Applications where
                                                                                   you can change your preferred browser.




   To change your preferred web browser, open Session Indicator from the
top panel on the far right-hand side, and open System Settings ‣ Details ‣
Default Applications. Choose your preferred web browser from the drop-
down menu Web.

Reading and composing email

Introduction to Thunderbird

underbird is an email client developed by Mozilla and is easy to setup and
use. It is free, fast, and comes packed full of useful features. Even if you are
new to Ubuntu and underbird, you will be up and running in no time,
checking your email and staying in touch with friends and family.

Setting up Thunderbird

In the top right corner of the Ubuntu desktop you will see an envelope
icon in the notification area. is is the messaging menu. From here, you
can launch underbird by clicking set up mail. Alternatively, you can
click the Ubuntu buon in the top le corner of the screen at the top of the
Launcher to bring up the Dash and type thunderbird into the search box.
Once underbird opens, you will be greeted by a pop-up box prompting
you to setup your email account.

                                                                                   Figure 3.12: Setting up Thunderbird




   Enter your name in the first text box, your email address in the second
     .


text box (for example, username@domain.com), and your email password in
the third text box.
   Once completed, click the continue buon. underbird will automati-
cally set up your email account for you. When underbird finishes detect-
ing your email seings, click create account and underbird will do the
rest. You can also set underbird as your default news and  reader by
checking the boxes in the pop-up box that appear aer you click create your
account. If you don’t want to see this message box every time you start
underbird, simply deselect Always perform this e when starting
underbird. You are now ready to start using underbird.

Around the Thunderbird workspace

Now that you have your email account set up, lets get to know the un-
derbird workspace. underbird is designed to be very user-friendly and
easy to navigate. When you open the application, you will see the main
workspace with your email folders (all folders window) on the le. On the
right of the screen, you will see two windows. e top-right window dis-
plays a list of your received email, and the boom-right window displays
the current email you are viewing. e size of these windows can be easily
resized to suit your viewing environment. To resize the windows, simply
le-click and hold the dividing bar that separates the two windows and drag
the bar up or down to the desired position. e All Folders window is where
you can see your mail folders. is window can also include:

Inbox Where your email is stored and accessed
Email address folder You will see one of these folders for each of the ac-
   counts you have setup
Dras Where your dra emails are stored
Sent mail Where the emails you have sent are stored
Spam is is where suspected spam email is stored so you can check them
   to make sure you haven’t lost any important emails
Trash is is where messages you’ve deleted are stored so you can double
   check to make sure you haven’t accidentally deleted an important email
   (also one of the local folders)
Important is is where emails you have marked as important are stored
Starred is is where emails you have marked with a star are stored
Personal is is where emails you have marked as personal are stored
Receipts You can move important receipts to this folder.
Travel You can use this folder to store travel emails such as flight times and
   bookings
Work You can store work emails in this folder to keep them separate from
   your personal email
Outbox Where the emails you are in the process of sending are stored (also
   one of the local folders)

   Across the top of the underbird workspace, you will see four con-
trol buons, get mail, write, address book, and tag. ese are used to get
your mail, write your mail, access your address book, and tag your email
messages.
   At the top-right of the All Folders window, you will see a set of quick
filter buons, unread, starred, contact, tags, andattament. You can use
these buons to filter your email messages so that you only see your unread
mail, your favorite mail (starred), mail from people in your address book,
mail you have tagged, and mail that includes aachments.
   


   If you are accustomed to a more traditional desktop and you have un-
derbird maximized to full screen, you might be wondering where the menus
are located. ey are still there, and if you want to access them, move your
mouse to the top of the screen and you will see the familiar menus: file,
edit, view, go, message, tools, and help.
   At the top of the window that displays your email, you can see five
action buons, reply, forward, arive, junk, and delete. You will find
these very useful for quickly replying to email, forwarding your email to
another person, archiving (backing up) your email, marking an email as
junk mail, and quickly deleting an email. To the le of these quick action
buons, you will see information about the email you are viewing that
includes the sender’s name, the subject of the email, the reply address, and
the recipient of the email.

Using your address book

At the top of the main workspace, you will see the address book buon.
Click this buon to access your address book. Once the address book opens
you, will see the address book window. From here, you can easily organize
your contacts. At the top of the address book window, you will see five
buons, new contact, new list, properties, write, and delete. ey function
in the following ways:

New Contact is buon allows you to add a new contact and add as much
   detail as you wish to save, including name, nickname, address, email,
   additional email, screen name, work number, home number, fax, pager
   and mobile/cell number.
New List is buon allows you to add lists for your contacts such as
   family, friends, acquaintances, etc.
Properties is buon allows you to rename your address book name. e
   default name is personal address book, but you can change the name as
   you see fit.
Write is buon allows you to quickly send an email to a selected con-
   tacted without needing to go back to the main underbird workspace.
   Simply select a contact from your contacts list and click the write buon
   to send them an email.
Delete is buon allows you to quickly delete a contact from your address
   book. Just select the contact you want to delete and press delete to
   remove the contact from your address book.

Checking and reading messages

underbird will automatically check your email account for new mes-
sages every ten minutes, but if you need to manually check for new mes-
sages at any time, le-click the get mail button in the top le corner of the
workspace. underbird will then check your email account for new mes-
sages and download them. As they are downloaded, you will see the new
email appear in the message window on the right side of the workspace.
When you click on one of your emails, it will appear in the window below
your email list. If you want to view your email in a full window, double-
le-click your chosen email, and underbird will display the email in a
full window in its own tab. At the top of the open email, you will see infor-
mation about the email and the five quick action buons, reply, forward,
arive, junk and delete as previously discussed. If an email has remote
content, you will see a message asking if you want to display the email or
     .


not. You may want to filter your emails from time to time; this is easily           Remote content represent parts of an email
done with underbird. When you have an email selected and you want                 that may be hosted elsewhere. Remote content
                                                                                   might consist of video or audio, but most
to tag the email, simply click the tag buon and a drop down list will be          often is graphics or HTML content. For security
displayed. In this drop down list, you have the options to Remove All Tags         purposes, Thunderbird will as you if you wish to
or Mark as…, Important, Work, Personal, To Do, Later. You can also create          view this remote content.

a new tag more suited to your own personal requirements.

Composing and Replying to Messages

To compose a new email message, click the write buon in the top le of
the workspace. is will bring up a new window where you can compose
your new email. In the To: field, enter the email address of the destination
—the contact to whom you are sending this email. If there is more than one
contact to whom you are writing, separate multiple recipients with commas.
If a contact that you are addressing is in your address book, you can address
them by name. Start typing the name of the contact; underbird will dis-
play the list of mailing contacts below your text. Once you see the contact
you intend to address, click on their email address or use the down arrow
key and then press Enter to select the address. If you would like to carbon-
copy (Cc) some contacts, click the To: field and select Cc:. Contacts who are
listed on the To: and Cc: lines will receive the email, and will see the rest of
the contacts to whom an email was sent. If you would like to send an email
to some contacts without disclosing to whom your email was sent, you can
send a blind carbon-copy, or Bcc. To enable Bcc, select Bcc: by clicking the
To: field and selecting Bcc:. Any contacts entered in the Bcc: field will re-
ceive the message, but none of the recipients will see the names or emails of
contacts on the Bcc: line. Instead of typing the email addresses or names of
the contacts you are addressing in the message, you can select the contacts
from your address book. Start typing a few leers from your contact’s first
or last name in the To: field to filter the list to only show mailing contacts.
Once you identify the contact you would like to address, click on their name
in the list. If you’ve added the contact in error, delete their address and
enter the correct address. You may enter a subject for your email in the Sub-
ject field. Messages should have a subject to help the recipient identify the
general contents of the email while glancing at their message list. Enter the      If you do not include a subject in your email,
contents of your message in the big text field below the subject. ere is no        Thunderbird will warn you about this omission.

practical limit on the amount of text you can include in your message. By
default, underbird will auto-detect the correct format for your email but
you can change this by clicking Options then mouse over Format and select
your preferred option from the list. You have a choice of Auto-Detect, Plain
Text Only, Rich Text (HTML) Only, and Plain and Rich (HTML) Text. When
you have finished composing your email, click on the Send buon on the
window’s toolbar. Your message will be placed in the Outbox, and will be
sent to your desired recipient.

Attaching files

At times, you may want to send files to your contacts. To send files, you
will need to aach them to your email message. To aach a file to an email          You can attach quite a few different file types
you are composing, click on the Atta buon. When the new window                   to emails, but be careful about the size of the
                                                                                   attachments! If they are too big, some email
opens, select the file you want to send and click open. e file you selected         systems will reject the email you are sending,
will then be aached to the email when you click send.                             and your recipient will never receive it!
   


                  Replying to Messages

                  In addition to composing new messages, you may want to reply to messages
                  that you receive. ere are three types of email replies:

y or Reply to Sender sends your reply only to the sender of the message to whom you are
                     replying.
        Reply to All sends your reply to the sender of the message as well as any address in
                     To: or Cc: lines.
            Forward allows you to send the message, with any additional comments you may
                     add, to some other contacts.

                     To use any of these methods, click on the message to which you want
                  to reply and then click the Reply, Reply to All, or Forward buon on the
                  message toolbar. underbird will open the reply window. is window
                  should look much like the window for composing new messages, but the
                  To:, Cc:, Subject:, and main message content fields should be filled in from
                  the message to which you are replying. Edit the To:, Cc:, Bcc:, Subject: or
                  main body as you see fit. When your reply is finished, click on the Send
                  buon on the toolbar. Your message will be placed in the Outbox and will
                  be sent.

                  Using instant messaging

                  Instant messaging allows you to communicate with people in real time
                  online. Ubuntu includes the Empathy application that lets you use instant
                  messaging features to keep in touch with your contacts. To start Empathy,
                  open the Messaging Menu (the envelope icon on the menubar), then select
                  Chat.
                     Empathy lets you connect to many instant messaging networks. You
                  can connect to: Facebook Chat, Google Talk, Jabber, People Nearby, ,
                  Gadu-Gadu, Groupwise, , , , mxit, myspace, , sametime, silc,
                  , , Yahoo!, and Zephyr.

                  Running Empathy for the first time

                  When you open Empathy for the first time you will need to configure it
                  with the details of your instant messaging accounts.
                     When Empathy starts you will see the “Welcome to Empathy” window.
                  Choose the option corresponding to your situation.

                  You have a previous account

                  If you have an account that you have used previously with another instant
                  messaging program, then select the Yes, I’ll enter my account details now
                  option. en, click Forward to continue.
                      On the next screen, choose your account type from the drop-down list
                  below What kind of at account do you have?. en, enter your account
                  details in the field below.
                      Depending on the account type that you choose, Empathy may request
                  that you enter a username, or an  for your account, followed by a pass-
                  word.
                      If you do not remember your account information, you will need to visit
                  the website of the instant messaging service to retrieve that information. (It
                  is suggested that you visit the web sites where you have instant messenger
     .


                                                                                Figure 3.13: Creating a new instant messenger
                                                                                account in Empathy.




accounts, before you start Empathy, so you can gather all of the credentials
for each account.)
    If you have another account to add then select the Yes option, and click
Forward to repeat the above process. When you have entered all of your
accounts leave the No, that’s all for now option selected, and click Apply to
finish the setup process.
    Next, Empathy should display the “Please enter personal details” screen.
If you choose to fill in this information, you will be able to communicate
with people who are on your local network either at home or from the
office.
    Enter your first name in the First name field, and your last name in
the Last name field. Enter a nickname that you want to use on your lo-
cal network in the Niname field. When you have completed all of the
information, click Apply.
    If you don’t want to communicate with people on your local network,
select the I don’t want to enable this feature for now option, and click
Apply.

You do not have a previous account

If you don’t have an account that you can use, then you can create one by
selecting the No, I want a new account option. Click Forward to display
the next set of options.
    Choose the account type that you would like to create from the drop-
down list below What kind of at account do you want to create? You
can create either a Jabber or a Google Talk account.                            Note: If you wish to create a type of account
    Next, enter the account name that you would like in the text field, and in   other than one of these, then you will need
                                                                                to visit the relevant website and create the
the following text field enter a password of your choice. If you would like      account first. Then follow the instructions in
to set up another account then select the Yes option, and repeat the above      the “You have an account” section.
process.
    When you have entered all the accounts leave the No, that’s all for now
option selected, and click Forward.
    Empathy should display the “Please enter personal details” window.
Providing this information allows you to communicate with people who are
on your local network either at home or in the workplace.
    Enter your First name in the text field, and enter your Last name in the
next field. In the Niname field enter a nickname by which you would like
to be identified. When you have filled all of the text fields click Apply to
save your seings.
    If you don’t want to talk to people on your local network then select the
I don’t want to enable this feature for now option and click Apply.
   


You want to talk to people nearby

If you would only like to communicate with people on your local network
either at home or in the workplace, then you should select the No, I just
want to see people online nearby for now option.
    Click Forward to display the next set of options. en enter your First
name in the text field, and enter your Last name in the next field. In the
Niname field enter a nickname by which you would like to be identified.
When you have filled all of the text fields, click Forward.

                                                                               Figure 3.14: You can talk to people nearby by
                                                                               entering your information.




Changing account settings

If you need to add more accounts aer the first launch, open the Edit menu,
then select Accounts. Empathy will then display the “Accounts” window.

Adding an account

To add an account click on the + buon on the boom le of the “Accounts”
window. Empathy should display some options on the right-hand side
of the window. Choose your account type from the Protocol drop-down
list. Next, enter your account name in the first text field. en enter your
password in the Password text field. Finally click on the Log in buon to
save and verify your seings.

Editing an account

You might need to edit an account if you change the password or get the
password wrong. Fortunately, this is very easy to do. Select the account you
want to change on the le side of the “Accounts” window. Empathy should
show the current information for the account. Once you have made your
changes, click Save.

Removing an account

To remove an account select the account on the le hand side of the win-
dow and click on the - buon. Empathy should open the “Do you want to
remove” window. Click on the Remove buon to confirm that you want to
remove the account, or click Cancel to keep the account.
     .


Editing contacts

Adding a contact

To add a contact open the Chat menu, then select Add contact. Empathy
should open the “New Contact” window.
   In the Account drop-down list, choose the account that you want to add
the contact to. When creating a contact you must select the service that
matches the service your contact is using.
   For example if your contact’s address ends in “@googlemail.com” then
you will need to add it to an account that ends in “@googlemail.com.”
Likewise if the contact’s email ends in “@hotmail.com” then you will need
to add it to an account ending in “@hotmail.com.”
   Aer choosing the account you wish to add the contact to, enter their
login , their username, their screen name or their email address in the
Identifier text field. Next, in the Alias text field, enter the name you want to
see in your contact list. Click Add to add the contact to your list of contacts.

Removing a contact

Click on the contact that you want to remove, then on the Unity bar at the
top of the screen, open the Edit menu, select Contact, then Remove. is
will open the “Remove contact” window.
   Click on the Remove buon to confirm that you want to remove this
contact, or click Cancel to keep the contact.

Communicating with contacts

Text

To communicate with a contact, select the contact in Empathy’s main win-
dow and double-click their name. Empathy should open a new window
where you can type messages to your contact, and see a record of previ-
ously exchanged messages.
   To send a message to the contact, enter your message in the text field be-
low the conversation history. When you have typed your message press the
Enter key to send the message to your contact. If you are communicating
with more than one person then all of the conversations will be shown in
tabs in your Empathy window.

Audio

If your contact has audio capabilities then there will be a microphone icon
next to their name. Click on the microphone icon to open the popup menu.
Select the Audio call option from the menu. Empathy should then open the
“Call” window.
    is window shows your picture on the right and your contact’s picture
on the le. Ensure that your microphone and speakers are connected, and
proceed with the audio conversation. You can finish the conversation by
clicking on the Hang up buon.

Video

If your contact has video chat capabilities then there will be a webcam icon
next to their name. Click on the icon to open a popup menu. Select the
Video call option from the menu. Empathy should then open the “Call”
   


window. is window shows your webcam view in the top right and your
contact’s webcam will be in the middle. If you don’t have a webcam then
your picture will be shown instead. You can finish the call by clicking on
the Hang up buon.

Sending and receiving files

Sending a file

When you are in a conversation with a contact and you would like to send
them a file, open the Contact menu, then select Send file. Empathy should
open the “Select file” window. Find the file you wish to send, and click on
the Send buon. A “File Transfers” window will open showing the file and
its transfer progress. When the file transfer is complete, you can close the
“File Transfers” window.

Receiving a file

When a contact wants to send you a file, the status icon to the le of the
contact’s name will flash with an icon of a paper plane. To receive the file,
double-click the contact’s name. Empathy will open the “Select a destina-
tion” window. Choose the location where you would like Empathy to save
the file, and click Save. Empathy should open the “File Transfers” window.
e “File Transfers” window shows you the progress of current file transfer.
You can stop the file transfer by clicking on the Stop buon, open trans-
ferred files by clicking on the Open buon, and clear the list of completed
transfers by clicking on the Clear buon.

Changing your status

You can use your status to show your contacts how busy you are or what
you are doing. You can use the standard statuses, which are:
‣   Available
‣   Busy
‣   Away
‣   Invisible
‣   Off-line

   ese can be changed in one of two ways. e first method is in the
main Empathy window from the drop-down list at the top of the window.
   e same drop-down list lets you set a custom status by choosing “Cus-
tom Message…” next to the icon that matches your status. Enter what you
would like your status to say, and click on the green check mark.
   e second method is to click the Messaging Icon on the top Unity
Bar. >From this menu, you will see all of the same options that Empathy
presents, but accessible without having to open the application window.

Changing your picture

Your picture is what your contacts will see next to your name in their con-
tact list. e default picture is the outline of a person. You can change your
picture by opening the Edit menu, then choosing Personal Information.
Empathy should open the “Personal Information” window. From the Ac-
count drop-down list choose the account that you want to change, then
click on the picture on the right-hand side of the window. Empathy should
     .


open the “Select Your Avatar Image” window. Find the file containing your
picture, and click Open. If you would like to return it to the default avatar,
click on the No Image buon, instead.

Desktop Sharing

Desktop sharing is a very niy feature available with Ubuntu. It can be used
for a lot of purposes like troubleshooting, online meetings or just showing
off your cool desktop to your friend. It is very easy to get remote desktop
sharing working between two Ubuntu machines.

. Click on System ‣ Preferences ‣ Remote Desktop and select Allow re-
   mote desktop. It is strongly recommended you add a password, for
   security reasons.
. Open Empathy and login using your Google/Jabber client 
. Double click on the user with whom you want to share your desktop
. From the new window, click on Contact ‣ Share your desktop.

    It should be noted that the other user will obviously be able to see the
information displayed on your screen. Please be sure to keep this in mind
if you have documents or files that are of a private nature open on your
desktop.

Microblogging

Gwibber is the default microblogging application that lets you access
multiple social networking accounts, without having to open an Internet
browser. Gwibber can be used to access and post on Twier, Facebook,
Identi.ca, Ping.fm, Flickr, Digg, Status.net, Foursquare, Qaiku and Friend-
Feed.

Upgrades and add-ons

Before you begin using Gwibber, go to Ubuntu Soware Center and search
for Gwibber. Select Gwibber; press More Info; check each add-on that you
want (or just select all of them); and press Apply Changes. You need add-
ons for Ping.fm, Flickr, Digg, Status.net, Foursquare, Qaiku and FriendFeed.
Wait for the them to finish installing. You need to log out and in again to
activate the add-ons.

Working with social networking accounts on Gwibber

Pull down the Message menu from the top panel bar and select /menuBroad-
cast. is starts the app.
   If you have not previously entered an account, the Accounts Manager
will open automatically. Otherwise, select Edit ‣ Accounts to open it.
   To add a new account, select the + buon; select the account type (e.g.,
Facebook, Twier); select Add. Select account seings and Authorize; and
follow any instructions to authorize the account.
                                                                                 You can add more than one account from a
   Removing accounts from Gwibber is easy too. Go to the Accounts Man-           service provider.

ager window and select the account to be removed. Click the - buon to
remove the account.
   


                                                                              Figure 3.15: Use the Ubuntu Software Center to
                                                                              to get Gwibber add-ons.




                                                                              Figure 3.16: The Gwibber pull-down menu
                                                                              shows you a quick overview of your feeds.




                                                                              Figure 3.17: Add an account for use with
                                                                              Gwibber using the Accounts Manager.




Using Gwibber to follow streams

Gwibber displays feeds from each service provider as streams. You can
list them in either ascending or descending order by selecting View ‣ Sort.
You can separate the feeds as messages, replies, and private messages. In
addition the aachments from the feed are sorted as images, links and
     .


videos. Click the image, link or the video to take you to the website in a
new tab in your default browser; images can be previewed within Gwibber.

                                                                                        Figure 3.18: A stream in Gwibber. Clicking on
                                                                                        the image should open the Facebook page in a
                                                                                        browser.




Notifications

You can customize how feeds display in the notification bubble, and the fre-
quency with which Gwibber refreshes, in the preferences (Edit ‣ Preferences).

                                                                                        Figure 3.19: A notification from Gwibber.
                                                                                        Notifications can be customized from the
                                                                                        Gwibber Preferences menu.




Replying, Liking and Retweeting

Each tweet can be liked, retweeted or replied from within Gwibber’s win-
dow by clicking on the Twier icon at the top right of each post.

Updating your Status

To update your status using Gwibber, select Update Status from the mes-                 You can prevent an account from posting from
sage icon in the top panel; this opens a new window. Type your status                   Gwibber; Edit ‣ Accounts ‣ Account Settings.

message and post it to all your accounts with one click. Press Esc to cancel.

     You can customize each account in Gwibber to have its own color. You can also
     shorten URLs as you post from Gwibber using a list of URL shortening services.
     Play with Gwibber and discover other cool things it can do. Open http://gwibber.
     com/docs/user-guide/current/master_social_networking_with_gwibber.pdf for
     more information.
   


                                                                             Figure 3.20: You can similarly “like” or comment
                                                                             on updates from within Gwibber.




Viewing and editing photos

Shotwell Photo Manager is the default photo application in Ubuntu. is
application allows you to view, tag, edit, and share your photos. To start
Shotwell, click on the Ubuntu icon near the top-le of the screen, then
select the Shotwell icon labeled View Photos.

                                                                             Figure 3.21: Manage your photo collection,
                                                                             enhance your photos while keeping the original,
                                                                             and share your memories online using Shotwell
                                                                             Photo Manager.




Importing Photos

When you launch Shotwell for the first time, you will be greeted by the
“Import” window. Aer the first launch, you can import more photos by
dragging the photos into the Shotwell window. You can also import photos
by connecting your camera or external storage device to the computer.
     .


From a digital camera Connect your camera to the computer using the
data cable and power it on. If your camera is properly detected, you will
see a new window prompting you to launch an application. Select Shotwell
in the drop-down menu then click OK. Your camera will be listed in the
Shotwell sidebar. Select your camera in the sidebar. You will see a preview
of the camera’s contents. Select individual photos by pressing and holding
Ctrl and clicking on each photo you want to import, and then clicking
Import Selected on the boom bar of the window. Or, you can choose to
import all photos by clicking Import All.

From your computer You can import photos into Shotwell by dragging
photos from your file browser into the Shotwell window. Alternatively, you
can click File Import From Folder, ‣ select the folder containing the photos
you want to import.

From external hard drive,  flash drive, or / Importing photos from
external storage is similar to importing from your computer. Your external
storage device may also appear under the Camera label on the Shotwell
sidebar. Follow the instructions for importing from a camera or computer.

Choosing where Shotwell saves photos

e default location for the Shotwell Library is your Pictures folder. When
importing pictures in the “Import” window, you will be given the option to
copy the files to your Library, or keep the files in place.
   If you have your photos stored on your computer, the option Import
in Place will be suitable so photos aren’t duplicated. If you are importing
photos from an external source, such as a portable hard drive,  flash
drive, or /, you should select Copy into Library so the photos are
copied to your computer—otherwise they won’t appear when you remove
the external source.

Viewing photos

Choose Library or any collection in the sidebar to display photos from
your selection. Use the slider on the boom bar to adjust the size of the
thumbnails. To view a full-window image, double-click an individual photo.
In the full-window view, you can navigate through the collection using
the back and forward arrows, zoom on the image using the slider, pan by
clicking and dragging the image, and exit the full-window view by double-
clicking the image.
    To view the collection in full-screen mode, press F11 or go to View ‣
Fullscreen. You can navigate through the collection using the toolbar that
is available by moving your mouse to the boom of the screen. To view a
slideshow presentation of the collection, press F5 or go to View ‣ Slideshow.
Press the Esc key to exit the Fullscreen or Slideshow views.

Organizing photos

Shotwell makes finding photos of the same type easier by using tags. You
can apply as many tags to a photo as you like. To apply tags to photos,
first select the photos. en right-click on the photos and select Add Tags.
Enter the tags you want into the text field, separated by commas. If you are
   


adding new tags, these will appear in the side bar on the right under the
Tags label.

Editing images

You may want to edit some of the photos you import into Shotwell. For
example, you may want to remove something at the edge, adjust the color,
reduce the red-eye effect, or straighten the image. To edit a photo, double-
click on the photo that you want to edit and then click on one of the follow-
ing buons:

Rotate

Click Rotate to rotate the image ° clockwise. You can click the buon
more than once and it will rotate the image clockwise in ° intervals.

Crop

Click Crop to change the framing of the photo. e image will darken and a
selection will appear. Adjust the selection to your desired crop by dragging
a corner or side. If you want to choose a specific aspect ratio, use the drop-
down menu to select one of the preset ratios or enter your own custom
ratio. A pivot buon is provided to change your selection from landscape to
portrait and vice versa. Once you are happy with the selection, click OK to
apply the crop or Cancel to discard it.

Red-eye reduction

If you have taken a photo and the flash has caused the subject to have red
eyes, you can fix this problem in Shotwell.
    Click the Red-eye buon. A circle will appear.
    Drag this circle over one of the subjects eyes and then use the slider to
adjust the circle size.
    When the circle is over the eye, click Apply to fix the red eye. You will
need to repeat this for each individual eye. Use caution when adjusting
the size of the circle. A circle too large and covering the skin may cause
discoloration when applying the red-eye reduction.

Adjust

Clicking Adjust will bring up a window that lets you edit a few things:
Level Similar to contrast
Exposure How bright the image is
Saturation How colorful the image is
Tint e overall color
Temperature Whether the image is warm (more yellow) or cool (more blue)
Shadows How dark the shadows are
  To change these values, drag the sliders until you are satisfied with the
image. Click OK to apply the changes, Reset to undo the changes and start
over, or Cancel to discard the changes.

Auto-adjustment with Enhance

Click Enhance to let Shotwell automatically adjust the color, levels, expo-
sure, contrast and temperature to make a more pleasing image.
     .


Reverting an edited photo to the original

When you edit a photo in Shotwell, your original image remains untouched.
You can undo all of the changes and revert to the original version by right-
clicking on the photo, then selecting Revert to Original. is option is only
available for photos you have edited.

Sharing your photos

You can easily share your photos on the web using Shotwell’s Publish
feature. Select the photos you want to share, then click the Publish buon
located on the boom bar. Choose Facebook, Flickr, or Picasa Web Albums
in the drop-down menu and log-in with your credentials. Some services
may require you to authorize Shotwell before allowing the application to
publish photos. Follow the instructions on the window, select your desired
options, and click Publish to upload your images to the web.

Further information

We’ve only just touched on the features of Shotwell. To get more help,
select Help ‣ Contents. is will load the online manual, where you can get
more detailed instructions on how to use Shotwell effectively.

Watching videos and movies

To watch videos or s in Ubuntu, you can use the Movie Player appli-
cation. To start the Movie Player, click on Dash, then search for “Movie
Player” and select it. is will open the “Movie Player” window.

                                                                                       Figure 3.22: Movie player (Totem) plays music
                                                                                       and videos.




Codecs

Watching s may require Ubuntu to install a “codec,” which is a piece of
soware that allows your computer to understand the contents of the ,
and display the video.

     Legal Notice: Patent and copyright laws operate differently depending on which
     country you are in. Please obtain legal advice if you are unsure whether a par-
     ticular patent or restriction applies to a media format you wish to use in your
     country.
   


   So that you can play all videos and s, you will need to install some
codecs. ese are located within the Multiverse repository. is is now
enabled by default.
   To install the codecs, open the Ubuntu Soware Center, either through
Dash or the Launcher. When the “Ubuntu Soware Center” window opens,
use the search box in the top right and search for the following:

‣ ubuntu-restricted-extras
‣ libdvdread
‣ libdvdnav

   When you find each one, select it with a double-click and then click the
Install buon. is may open an “Authenticate” window. If so, enter your
password then click Authenticate to start the installation process.

Playing videos from file

Open the Movie menu, then select Open…. is will open the “Select
Movies or Playlists” window. Find the file or files that you want to play
and click on the Add buon. e video or videos will start playing.

Playing a DVD

When you insert a  in the computer, Ubuntu should open the “You have
just inserted a Video . Choose what application to launch” window.
Make sure that Open Movie Player is chosen in the drop-down list and
then click OK. e “Movie Player” window will open and the movie will
start.
   If the “Movie Player” window is already open, open Movie menu, then
select Play Disc… and the movie will start.

Listening to audio and music

Ubuntu comes with the Rhythmbox Music Player for listening to your mu-
sic, streaming Internet radio and managing playlists and podcasts. Rhythm-
box also comes bundled with multiple ways to find and purchase music, TV
shows, and movies, and even ways to subscribe to your favorite  feeds.

Starting Rhythmbox

ere are several ways to start Rhythmbox.
‣ Open the Dash, select Listen to Music, and choose any of the displayed
  music files (if you have any).
‣ Open the Dash, type Rhythmbox and click on the Rhythmbox Music
  Player icon.
‣ Ubuntu . comes with an indicator menu in the top bar for sound-
  related applications and devices. is menu includes a link to start
  Rhythmbox, and basic playback and volume controls.

If you close Rhythmbox by pressing Alt+F4 or clicking the red close buon
( ), it will disappear from view but continue to play in the background. You
can still control your music or reopen from the Sound indicator. To quit
Rhythmbox completely, press Ctrl+Q.
     .


                                                                              Figure 3.23: Rhythmbox Music Player




Playing music

To play music, you must first import music into your library. Choose Mu-
sic ‣ Import Folder… or press Ctrl+O on your keyboard to import a folder
of media, a single file, an Amazon  purchase or media from an iOS or
Android device. e Rhythmbox toolbar contains most of the controls that
you will use for browsing and playing your music. If you want to play
a song, double-click a track or click it and press the Play buon on the
toolbar (you can also choose Control ‣ Play from the menubar or press
Ctrl+Space). When a song is playing, the Play buon will become a Pause
buon. Clicking on it will pause the song. Next and Previous buons are
next to the Play/Pause buon. You can click on these buons to play the
next and previous songs in your library or playlist. Rhythmbox also has
options to toggle Repeat or Shuffle modes. Rhythmbox offers two dif-
ferent types of shuffling, both of which can be accessed by clicking on
the drop-down menu next to Next buon or by using the global menubar
(Control ‣ Shuffle). Repeat controls are located in boom right hand corner
and through the global menubar (/menuControl ‣ Repeat).

Playing Audio cds

To play your CD, insert it into your CD drive. It will automatically appear
within Rhythmbox in the Side Pane beneath your Music Library. You can
click the  (named Audio , or the name of the album) and double-click a
track in it to play the tracks on the .

Importing (Ripping) Audio cds

Begin by inserting a . Rhythmbox will automatically detect it and add
it to the side menu. If you have an active Internet connection, Rhythmbox
will try to find the album details via the web. Click the . Uncheck any
tracks you don’t want imported. Press the Extract buon, located near the
upper-le corner of Rhythmbox. Rhythmbox will begin importing the .
As it finishes each track, it will appear in your Music Library.
   


Listening to streaming audio

Rhythmbox is pre-configured to enable you to stream audio from various           Streaming audio stations are “radio stations”
sources. ese include Internet broadcast stations (Radio from the Side          that broadcast over the Internet. Some of these
                                                                                are real radio stations that also stream over the
Pane), Last.fm and Libre.fm. To listen to an Internet radio station, click in   Internet, and others broadcast only over the
the Radio icon in the Side Pane for a list of pre-configured stations. You can   Internet.
filter by genre in the middle pane. To add a new radio station, select Add
and enter the radio station .                                                You can browse a selected list of radio stations
                                                                                at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_
                                                                                Internet_stations or you can use your browser
Connect digital audio players                                                   to search for “Internet radio stations.”

Rhythmbox can connect with many popular digital media players. Con-
nected players will appear in the Devices list. Features will vary depending
on the player (and oen the player’s popularity), but common tasks like
transferring songs and playlists should be supported.

                                                                                Figure 3.24: Rhythmbox connected to an
                                                                                Android device




Listen to shared music

If you are on the same network as other Rhythmbox users (or most other          DAAP stands for “Digital Audio Access Proto-
music player soware), you can share your music and listen to their shared      col,” and is a method designed by Apple Inc. to
                                                                                let software share media across a network.
music. To do this, click Music ‣ Connect to DAAP Share… en enter the IP
address and the port number. en click OK. Clicking a shared library will
enable you to browse and play songs from other computers.

Manage podcasts

Rhythmbox can manage all of your favorite podcasts. Select Podcasts from
the Side Pane to view all added podcasts. e toolbar will display additional
options to Browse, Show All, Add and Update. Choose Add on the toolbar
and enter the URL of the podcasts to save it to Rhythmbox. Podcasts will be
automatically downloaded at regular intervals or you can manually update
feeds. Select an episode and click Play. You can also delete episodes.
     .


View

Rhythmbox comes with the option of a party mode. To enter party mode
press F11 on your keyboard or use the global menubar (View ‣ Party Mode);
to exit from party mode press F11 again. Rhythmbox also has a browser
bar that is enabled by default (this area is the top-right half of the program
window). It gives you the option to search your music by artist (upper-
right) or album.

Rhythmbox preferences

e default configuration of Rhythmbox may not be exactly what you want.
Choose Edit ‣ Preferences to alter the application seings. e Preferences
tool is broken into four main areas: General, Playback Music and Podcasts.
General includes how you want Rhythmbox to display artist and track
   information. You can also adjust the columns visible in your library and
   how the toolbar icons are displayed.
Playback options allow you to enable crossfading and the duration of the
   fade between tracks.
Music includes where you would like to place your music files and the
   library structure for new tracks added to Rhythmbox. You can also set
   your preferred audio format.
Podcasts designates where podcasts are stored on your computer along
   with the ability to change how oen podcast information is updated.

Plugins

Rhythmbox supports a wide array of plugins, which add functionality to
Rhythmbox. Many of the plugins provide basic audio playback, and you
may check a few more boxes, for example, to access the Magnatune Store.
To view or change the activated plugins, use the global menubar (Edit ‣
Plugins).

Managing your music

Rhythmbox supports creating playlists. Playlists either are static lists of
songs to be played in order, or can be smart playlists based on filter criteria.
Playlists contain references to songs in your library. ey do not contain
the actual songs, but only reference them. So, if you remove a song from
a playlist (right-cli on the song ‣ Remove from Playlist), the song will
remain in your library and on your hard drive.
    To create a playlist, choose Music ‣ Playlist ‣ New Playlist, press Ctrl+N,
or right-click in the lower blank area of the side bar and select New Playlist.
It appears in the sidebar as “New Playlist.” Right-click and select Rename
to give the new playlist a name of your choosing. Drag songs from your
library to the new playlist in the side pane or right-click on songs and select
Add to Playlist and pick the playlist.
    Smart Playlists are created in a similar way. Choose Music ‣ Playlist ‣
New Automatic Playlist or right-click in the lower blank area of the side
bar and select New Automatic Playlist. Define the filter criteria. You
can add multiple filter rules and select a name. Save. You can update any
playlist (including the predefined ones) by right-clicking on the name and
choosing Edit.
    Rhythmbox supports song ratings. Right-cli a song in your library ‣
Properties ‣ Details and click on the number of stars. To remove a rating,
   


select zero stars. Other song information such as Title, Artist and Album
can be changed. Right-cli a song in your library ‣ Properties ‣ Basic.
   To remove a song, right-cli ‣ Remove. To delete a song from your hard
drive entirely, right-cli ‣ Move to the Rubbish Bin. If you ever want to
move a song, highlight the song (or group of songs) from your library and
drag it to a folder or to your desktop. is will make a copy of the audio file
in the new location.

Music stores

Rhythmbox has an integrated store that gives you access to a huge catalog
of music with a variety of licensing options. e Ubuntu One Music Store
(see figure below) sells music from global major and minor music labels.
e store offers -free (no copy protection) songs encoded in high-quality
 format. You can browse the catalog, play previews, and buy songs with
the Ubuntu One Music Store. As the name suggests, the Ubuntu One Music
Store integrates with the Ubuntu One service. All purchases are transferred
to your personal cloud storage and are automatically copied to all of your
computers. For that reason, an Ubuntu One account is required (it is free of
charge and quick to register). e catalog of music available for purchase
will vary depending on where you live in the world. More information
about the Ubuntu One Music Store can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/
music/.

                                                                                  Figure 3.25: Ubuntu One Music Store




Audio codecs

Different audio files (, , , , etc.) require unique tools to de-
code them and play the contents. ese tools are called codecs. Rhythmbox
aempts to detect any missing codecs on your system so you can play all of
your audio files. If a codec is missing, it automatically tries to find the codec
online and guides you through its installation.
     .


Rhythmbox support

Rhythmbox is used by many users throughout the world. ere are a vari-
ety of support resources available in many languages.

‣   Help ‣ Contents or F1 for the main help.
‣   Help ‣ Get Help Online to report bugs.
‣   e Rhythmbox website http://www.rhythmbox.org/.
‣   e Multimedia & Video category of Ubuntu Forums: http://ubuntuforums.
    org/forumdisplay.php?f=


Burning CDs and DVDs

To create a  or  open the Dash and search for Brasero Disc Burner,
then open Brasero. is opens Brasero, which gives you five burning op-
tions. Each one of these is explained below.

                                                                              Figure 3.26: Brasero burns music, video, and
                                                                              data DVDs and CDs.




Getting Started

Before you can use Brasero, you need to Create a new project. ere are
three types of projects available: Audio Project, Data Project, and Video
Project. Make your selection based on your requirements.                      At this current time, Brasero does not support
   e following options apply for all projects except Disc copy and Burn      Blu-Ray.

Image.

Adding files to a project

To add files to the list, click the Green + buon, which opens the “Select
Files” window. en navigate your way to the file you want to add, click the
desired file, and then click the Add buon. Repeat this process for each file
until all desired files have been added.

Removing files

If you want to remove a file from the project, click the file in the list and   Icons of a broom are often used in Ubuntu to
click on the Red - buon. To remove all the files in the list click on the     represent clearing a text field or returning
                                                                              something to its default state.
Broom shaped buon.
   


Saving a project

To save an unfinished project, choose Project ‣ Save. e “Save Current
Project” window will be opened. Choose where you would like to save the
project. en in the Name: text field, enter a name for the project. Now
click the Save buon.

Burning the disc

When you click the Burn… buon, you will see the “Properties of …” win-
dow.
   You can specify the burning speed in the Burning speed drop down. It is
best to choose the highest speed.
   To burn your project directly to the disc, select the Burn the image
directly without saving it to disc option. With this option selected, no
image file is created and no files are saved to the hard disk. All data is saved
to the blank CD or DVD.
   e Simulate before burning option is useful if you encounter problems          Temporary files are saved in the /tmp folder
burning discs. Selecting this option allows you to simulate the disc burning      by default. Should you wish to save these files
                                                                                  in another location, you will need to change
process without actually writing data to a disc—a wasteful process if your        the setting in the Temporary files drop down
computer isn’t writing data correctly. If the simulation is successful, Brasero   menu. Under normal conditions, you should not
will burn the disc aer a ten second pause. During those ten seconds, you         need to change this setting.

have the option to cancel the burning process.

Blanking a disk

If you are using a disc that has  wrien on it and you have used it before,     RW stands for Re-Writable which means the disc
then you can erase it so that it can be reused. is will erase all of the data    can be used more than once.

currently on the disc. To erase a disc, open the Tools menu, then select
Blank. e “Disc Blanking” window will be open. In the Select a disc drop
down choose the disc that you would like to erase.
    You can enable the Fast blank option if you would like to shorten the
amount of time to perform the blanking process. However, selecting this
option will not fully remove the files; if you have any sensitive data on your
disc, it would be best not to enable the Fast blank option.
    Once the disc is erased (blank), you will see e disc was successfully
blanked. Click the Close buon to finish.

Audio project

If you record your own music, then you may want to transfer this music
onto an audio  so your friends and family can listen. You can start an
audio project by clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ New Audio Project.
    When burning a music CD, it is important to remember that commercial
music CDs usually have two-second gap between song. To ensure your
music has this same gap between songs, click the file and then clicking the
pause buon.
    You can slice files into parts by clicking the Knife buon. is opens a
“Split Track” window. e Method drop down gives you four options each
one of these lets you split the track in a different way. Once you have split
the track, click OK.
    In the drop down window at the boom of the main “Brasero” window,
make sure that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files.
en click the Burn buon.
     .


Data project

If you want to make a back up of your documents or photos, it would
be best to make a data project. You can start a data project by clicking
Project ‣ New Project ‣ New Data Project.
    If you want to add a folder you can click the Folder picture, then enter
the name of the folder.
    In the drop down at the boom of the main “Brasero” window, make sure
that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files. en click
the Burn buon.

Video project

If you want to make a  of your family videos, it would be best to make
a video project. You can start a video project by clicking Project ‣ New
Project ‣ New Video Project.
    In the drop down window at the boom of the main “Brasero” window,
make sure that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files.
en click the Burn buon.

Disc copy

You can copy a disc clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ Disc copy. is opens
the “Copy /” window.
   If you have two / drives you can copy a disc from one to the other,
the disc that you want to copy to must be in the / drive. If
you have only one drive you will need to make an image and then burn it to
a disc. In the Select disc to copy drop-down choose the disc to copy. In the
Select a disc to write to drop-down either choose image file or the disc that
you want to copy to.

Image file

You can change where the image file is saved by clicking Properties. is
shows the “Location for Image File”. You can edit the name of the file in the
Name: text field.
    e default save location is your home folder, you can change this by
clicking the + buon next to Browse for other folders. Once you have
chosen where you want to save the photo or image, click Close.
    Back in the “Copy /” window click Create Image. Brasero will
open the “Creating Image” and will display the job progress. When the
process is complete, click Close.

Burn image

To burn an image, open the Project ‣ New Project ‣ Burn Image. Brasero
will open the “Image Burning Setup” window. Click on the Cli here to
select a disc image drop-down and the “Select Disc Image” window will
appear. Navigate your way to the image you wish to burn, click on it, and
then click Open.
   In the Select a disc to write to drop-down menu, click on the disc to
which you’d like to write, then click Create Image.
   


Working with documents, spreadsheets, and presentations

LibreOffice suite is the default office suite when working with: word docu-
ments, spreadsheets, and slide presentations.

Working with documents

If you need to work with documents, you can use the LibreOffice Word Pro-        The LibreOffice Word Processor is also known
cessor. To start the word processor, open the Dash home of the Launcher,       as the LibreOffice Writer. Spreadsheet is also
                                                                               known as Calc, and Presentation is known as
search for LibreOffice Writer and select it. Ubuntu should then open the       Impress.
main window for the word processor.

Working with spreadsheets

If you need to work with spreadsheets, you can use the LibreOffice Spread-
sheet. To start the spreadsheet application, click on the Dash home, type
LibreOffice Calc and select LibreOffice Calc.


Working with presentations

If you need to work with slides for a presentation, you can use the Libre-
Office Impress. To start the presentation application, open the Dash home
menu, type LibreOffice Impress, and then click on it.

Getting more help

Each of these applications comes with a comprehensive set of help screens.
If you are looking for more assistance with these applications, press the F1
key aer starting the application.

Ubuntu One

What is Ubuntu One?

Ubuntu One is a service for storing your files online—in your Ubuntu One
Personal Cloud. Your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud is your personal online
storage space; it can be accessed in any web browser or using an Ubuntu
One application, such as those for Ubuntu, Windows, iPhone, or Android.
Because Ubuntu One stores your files online, it’s the perfect way to backup
your files to prevent data loss. You can also use Ubuntu One to share files
with other people—this makes Ubuntu One a great tool for friends, families,
and collaborative teams. Ubuntu One also provides services for backing
up your contacts and streaming music to mobile devices. e Ubuntu One
service is provided by Canonical.

How safe is Ubuntu One?

Before using Ubuntu One, you should bear the following points in mind:

‣ Uploading, downloading and synchronizing your information with
  Ubuntu One is done over an encrypted connection, which prevents
  anybody eavesdropping on your information as it is being transferred.
‣ Files are not stored by Canonical in encrypted form. It is important to
  keep this in mind when deciding what to upload to Ubuntu One. You can
  use other means to encrypt you data, such as an encrypted zip file.
     .


‣ Information uploaded to Ubuntu One can potentially be accessed by
  Canonical. As with similar online services and websites, you are implic-
  itly trusting them to respect your privacy, so if you feel you cannot trust
  them with certain information, don’t upload it to Ubuntu One.
‣ If you violate the Ubuntu One terms and conditions and store illegal
  material, Canonical may be required to hand the information over to law
  enforcement agencies without your consent.
‣ Your online information can be accessed by anybody who knows (or can
  guess) your account name and password. For this reason, you should
  choose a good password and keep it secure.

Getting started with Ubuntu One

To use Ubuntu One, you will need to create a free Ubuntu One account             5GB is enough to store about 1,500 music files
using an email address. is free account gives you access to GB of online       or 5,000 photographs (depending on size).

storage and the contact syncing service; access to more data storage or the
music streaming service requires a paid subscription.
    ere are two ways to create an Ubuntu One account. You can either
sign up using the Ubuntu One Control Panel (pre-installed in Ubuntu), or
you can sign up on the Ubuntu One website https://one.ubuntu.com by
clicking the Sign Up link.
                                                                                 Figure 3.27: This Launcher icon opens the
Creating an Ubuntu One account using the Ubuntu One Control Panel                Ubuntu One Control Panel.


In the Launcher, click the Ubuntu One icon, as shown in Figure .. is
should open the dialog shown in Figure ..

                                                                                 Figure 3.28: The Ubuntu One Control Panel
                                                                                 Welcome Page.




   Click the I don’t have an account yet – sign me up buon.
   Fill in the details requested. Make sure you use a valid email address that   If you do not have an email address, you can get
only you have access to.                                                         one for free at gmail.com.

   You should review the Terms of Service and Privacy Policy before              The captcha acts as a check that it really is a
signing up. When you’re satisfied, click Set Up Account.                          person filling in the form and not a computer
                                                                                 (because a computer won’t be able to read the
   Within a few minutes, you will receive an email containing the verifica-       captcha text).
tion code. Enter the verification code into the box as shown in Figure .
and click Next.
   If all goes well, you will see a window saying: “You are now logged into
Ubuntu One.”; in this window click the Finish buon. You will also get
another email welcoming you to Ubuntu One. Now that you are logged into
   


                                                                                   Figure 3.29: Fill in all fields with your informa-
                                                                                   tion to sign up for an Ubuntu One account.




                                                                                   Figure 3.30: Enter the verification code into the
                                                                                   field.




Ubuntu One, you can configure your Ubuntu machine for Ubuntu One file
syncing.

Configure your Ubuntu machine for file syncing

e Ubuntu One desktop application syncs your Ubuntu One Personal                   Sync is short for Synchronize; implying that
Cloud with files on your local file system. Aer logging into the Ubuntu             the contents of your Ubuntu One local file
                                                                                   system and your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud
One desktop application the following dialog (Figure .) should appear,          will always be identical.
allowing you to select which files to sync with your Ubuntu One Personal
Cloud.
   If you have already used your Ubuntu One account, you may have more
folders in this view (Figure .). You can choose which Ubuntu One cloud
folders you would like synced with your local file system. If this is the first
time you are using Ubuntu One, just click the Next buon.

     You can also change your Ubuntu One sync connection seings at this time by
     clicking on the Che Settings buon; you can change things like the maximum
     upload and download rate, or if notifications should be allowed.

   In this dialog (Figure .), you can choose which of your local file sys-
tem folders you would like synced with your Ubuntu One cloud storage.
     .


                                                                               Figure 3.31: This setup dialog lets you select
                                                                               which existing Ubuntu One folders you would
                                                                               like synced with your machine.




                                                                               Figure 3.32: This setup dialog lets you select
                                                                               which folders of your local file system you
                                                                               would like synced with your Ubuntu One cloud
                                                                               storage.




e folder Ubuntu One is implicitly synced, but you can select additional
folders you may like synced—your pictures, for instance. Once you’re
finished selecting folders, click the Finish buon to complete the setup
process. You are now ready to begin using Ubuntu One!

Using Ubuntu One with the Nautilus file manager

Ubuntu One integrates with Nautilus, the program you use to view your file
system. You can add, sync, and share files directly from Nautilus.              Figure 3.33: These symbols indicate the sync
                                                                               status of a file or folder. The Checkmark
                                                                               indicates that the file or folder has been
Adding and Modifying Files                                                     synced, and the circular arrows indicate that the
                                                                               file or folder is in the process of syncing.
You can add files to your Ubuntu One folder (or any other folder that you
have selected for sync) just as you normally would, and Ubuntu One will
automatically sync them to your personal cloud. For example, if you add
your vacation photos, you should see a screen similar to Figure ..
   Aer moving the files into the Ubuntu One synced folder, you should re-
ceive a notification informing you that syncing has begun. You can also see
that each file shows the circular arrow icon, indicating that it is currently
syncing with your personal cloud. When syncing completes, the circular
arrows will be replaced with check marks.
   


                                                                               Figure 3.34: When you add files to an Ubuntu
                                                                               One synced folder, they automatically sync to
                                                                               your personal cloud.




   Whenever you add or modify files that are in folders synced with Ubuntu
One, they will automatically sync to your personal cloud. Aer syncing is
complete, you can view the files on the Ubuntu One Web UI, and they will
also be synced to any other computers or mobile devices that you are using
Ubuntu One on.

Adding Folders to Sync

You can add other folders to be synced with your Ubuntu One Personal
Cloud, not just your Ubuntu One folder. You can add folders to be synced
through Nautilus by right-clicking the folder you would like to sync. In
the right-click menu, choose Ubuntu One ‣ Synronize is Folder, as
shown in Figure .. You can also stop syncing a folder through the same
right-click menu.
   To view which files on your system are are currently syncing with
Ubuntu One, open the Ubuntu One Control Panel by clicking the Ubuntu
One Launcher icon, as shown in Figure .; a dialog similar to that in Fig-
ure . should appear.
   In the Ubuntu One Control Panel you can see which of your folders are
synced with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. You can also add files from
here, by clicking the Add a folder from this computer buon.

Using Ubuntu One with the Ubuntu One Web UI

You can access your files from any computer using the Ubuntu One Web            A Web UI (User Interface) is a web site that you
UI at https://one.ubuntu.com. When you first reach the web page, you will       can go to and do the same things that you do
                                                                               on your computer. Emails, for instance, are
need to log in by clicking Log in or Sign up in the upper right-hand corner    commonly accessed through a Web UI.
of the page. On the following page, fill in your email address and Ubuntu
One password, then click the Continue buon.
   Once logged in, you should be taken to your Dashboard. e Dashboard
shows you a summary of your data usage, and keeps you informed of new
features in Ubuntu One.
     .


                                                                                 Figure 3.35: Use a folder’s right-click menu to
                                                                                 sync or un-sync the folder from your Ubuntu
                                                                                 One Personal Cloud.




                                                                                 Figure 3.36: The Ubuntu One Control Panel
                                                                                 shows you which folders in your file system are
                                                                                 synced with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud.




  To view your files, click the Files link in the navigation bar in the upper
portion of the page.

Downloading and Uploading Files

To access your files from the Ubuntu One Web UI, you can simply down-
load them from your personal cloud. To download a file, click More shown
to the right of the file, as shown in the browser, then click on Download
file, as shown in Figure .. Clicking Download file will initiate a file
download through your browser.
   If you make changes to the file or want to add a new file to your personal
cloud, simply click the Upload file buon in the upper portion of the page.
is will upload the file into the current folder and overwrite any old ver-
sions of the file. Once you have uploaded the file, it will be available in your
personal cloud, and will sync to your Ubuntu machine’s local file system.
   


                                                                                 Figure 3.37: A file’s More button in the Web UI
                                                                                 gives you many options.




Making Files Public

You can make a file public on the web by clicking More and choosing the
Publish file buon—this is also shown in Figure .. Aer clicking the
Publish file buon, the Web UI will generate a Public URL; you can share
this URL with anyone. By directing a browser to the Public URL of the
file, the browser should begin to download the file or it may display it,
depending on what type of file it is.
   You can make the file private again at any time by clicking the Stop
publishing buon located to the le of the Public URL. Aer you click the
Stop publishing buon the Public URL field will go away, and the URL
will stop working. If someone tries to use a Public URL for a file that has
been made private they will receive an error message and the file will not
download or displayed.

Sharing Files

Ubuntu One lets you share files with other Ubuntu One users, leing you
collaborate on files with ease. When one user makes a change to a shared
file the changes automatically sync to the other users’ personal clouds
and their local file system, so all users automatically have the most recent
version of the file.
   To share files in Ubuntu One, you must share an entire folder. Before you
begin to share files, you should make sure only the files you want to share
are in this folder. en to share this folder, navigate to it in the Ubuntu One
Web UI, and click the More buon to the le of the folder name. In the
More menu, click on Share folder. A dialog box similar to that shown in
figure . should appear. Complete the fields in the dialog box, and click
the Share this folder buon when you are finished.
   Once you share the folder, the user you are trying to share the folder
with should receive an email informing them that you would like to share
the file. ey will then have to accept the share request. If the email address
     .


                                                                                Figure 3.38: Sharing folders with other users
                                                                                makes collaborating on files simple.




you provide does not yet have an Ubuntu One account, they must first sign
up for an Ubuntu One account before they can access the shared folder.
   To stop sharing a folder, navigate to it, click the More buon, and click
Stop sharing.
   If another user shares a folder with you, you will receive an email in-
forming you of the share, and a link to click on to accept the share request.
Folders that are shared with you by other users will appear in the Shared
With Me folder inside your Ubuntu One folder (~/Ubuntu One/Shared With
Me/).
   To stop syncing files that are shared with you, navigate to the folder in
the Ubuntu One Web UI, click the More buon, then click the Delete this
share buon.

Exceeding your Ubuntu One Storage Limit

If you exceed the storage limit of your Ubuntu One account—GB is the
free limit—Ubuntu One will stop syncing your files to your Ubuntu One
Personal Cloud.

Remedying an Exceeded Storage Limit

You can do several things to remedy an exceeded storage limit. Among
them are:
‣ Delete any files you no longer need—it’s good to clean out old files.
‣ Move any files you no longer need synced—to another location that is
  not synced with Ubuntu One.
‣ Purchase additional storage space—you can purchase additional storage
  in GB blocks.

Purchasing Additional Storage Space

You can purchase additional storage space by clicking the Get more storage
buon in the Ubuntu One Control Panel, or at https://one.ubuntu.com/
   


services/. Additional storage is available in GB blocks and is priced at
$./month, or $./year.

                                                                             Figure 3.39: You can purchase additional
                                                                             storage space on the Ubuntu One website.




                                                                             Figure 3.40: Ubuntu One accepts credit cards,
                                                                             and PayPal for purchasing additional storage.




Getting Ubuntu One Mobile Apps

Ubuntu One has mobile applications for Android and iPhone mobile de-
vices. ese applications allow you to access your personal cloud files
on-the-go. You can get more information about the Android and iPhone         Figure 3.41: This is the icon for the Ubuntu One
applications at https://one.ubuntu.com/downloads/android/ and https://one.   Android and iPhone apps.

ubuntu.com/downloads/iphone/, respectively.
     .


Getting Ubuntu One for Windows

Ubuntu One also has a Windows application, which can sync your Ubuntu
One Personal Cloud files to the file system of a Windows operating system.
More information can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/downloads/
windows/.

Additional Services of Ubuntu One

In addition to file syncing, Ubuntu One offers Contact Syncing and Music
Streaming services. ese services are not discussed in this book, but ad-
ditional information can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/help/tutorial/
contact-sync-for-ubuntu--lts/ and https://one.ubuntu.com/services/
music/ respectively. e Music Streaming service requires a paid subscrip-
tion of $./month, and has a  day free trial period.
4      Hardware
Using your devices

Ubuntu supports a wide range of hardware, and support for new hardware
improves with every release.

Hardware identification

ere are various ways to identify your hardware in Ubuntu. e easiest
would be to install an application from the Ubuntu Soware Center, called
Sysinfo.
   Firstly, open the “Ubuntu Soware Center”, then use the search box in
the top right corner to search for sysinfo. Select the Application, click
Install. Enter your password when prompted, to install the application.
   To run the application, search for Sysinfo at the Dash search bar. Click
on the program once you find it. e Sysinfo program will open a window
that displays information about the hardware in your system.

Displays

Hardware drivers

A driver is a piece of soware which tells your computer how to communi-
cate with a piece of hardware. Every component in a computer requires a
driver to function, whether it’s the printer,  player, hard disk, or graph-
ics card.
    e majority of graphics cards are manufactured by three well-known           Your graphics card is the component in your
companies: Intel, /, and  Corp. You can find your video card          computer which outputs to the display.
                                                                                 Whether you are watching videos on YouTube,
manufacturer by referring to your computer’s manual, by looking for the          viewing DVDs, or simply enjoying the smooth
specifications of your computer’s model on the Internet, or by using the          transition effects when you maximize/minimize
command lspci in a terminal. e Ubuntu Soware Center houses a num-              your windows, your graphics device is doing the
                                                                                 hard work behind the scenes.
ber of applications that can tell you detailed system information. SysInfo is
one such program that you can use to find relevant information about your
System devices. Ubuntu comes with support for graphics devices manufac-
tured by the above companies, and many others, out of the box. at means
you don’t have to find and install any drivers yourself, Ubuntu takes care of
it all.
    Keeping in line with Ubuntu’s philosophy, the drivers that are used by
default for powering graphics devices are open source. is means that
the drivers can be modified by the Ubuntu developers and problems with
them can be fixed. However, in some cases a proprietary driver (restricted
driver) provided by the company may provide beer performance or fea-
tures that are not present in the open source driver. In other cases, your
particular device may not be supported by any open source drivers yet. In
those scenarios, you may want to install the restricted driver provided by
the manufacturer.
    For both philosophical and practical reasons, Ubuntu does not install
restricted drivers by default but allows the user to make an informed choice.
Remember that restricted drivers, unlike the open source drivers for your
device, are not maintained by Ubuntu. Problems caused by those drivers
     .


will be resolved only when the manufacturer wishes to address them.
To see if restricted drivers are available for your system, press the Su-
per/Windows key on your keyboard to show the Dash or click the Ubuntu
icon on the Unity Launcher, and search for Additional Drivers. If a driver
is provided by the company for your particular device, it will be listed there.
You can simply click Activate to enable the driver. is process requires an
active Internet connection and it will ask for your password. Once installa-
tion is complete you may have to reboot your computer to finish activating
the driver.
    e Ubuntu developers prefer open source drivers because they allow
any problem to be identified and fixed by anyone with knowledge within              Another useful resource is the official online
the community. Ubuntu development is extremely fast and it is likely that         documentation (http://help.ubuntu.com), which
                                                                                  contains detailed information about various
your device will be supported by open source drivers. You can use the             graphics drivers and known problems. This
Ubuntu Live  to check your device’s compatibility with Ubuntu before            same documentation can be found by searching
installing, or go online to the Ubuntu forums or to http://www.askubuntu.         for Yelp in the Dash search bar or by pressing
                                                                                  F1 on your keyboard.
com to ask about your particular device.

Setting up your screen resolution

One of the most common display related tasks is seing the correct screen
resolution for your desktop monitor or laptop.
   Ubuntu correctly identifies your native screen resolution by itself and         Displays are made up of thousands of tiny
sets it for you. However, due to a wide variety of devices available, some-       pixels. Each pixel displays a different color,
                                                                                  and when combined they all display the image
times it can’t properly identify your resolution.                                 that you see. The native screen resolution is a
   To set or check your screen resolution, go to System Settings ‣ Displays.      measure of the amount of actual pixels on your
e “Displays” window detects automatically the type of display and shows          display.

your display’s name, size. e screen resolution and refresh rate is set to
the recommended value by Ubuntu. If the recommended seings are not to
your liking, you can change the same from the Resolution drop-down to the
resolution of your choice.

Adding an extra display

Sometimes, you may want to add more than one display device to your
desktop, or may want to add an external monitor to your laptop. Doing
this is quite simple. Whether it’s an extra monitor, LCD TV, or a projector,
Ubuntu can handle it all. Ubuntu supports the addition of multiple displays
by default, which is as easy as plug and play. Ubuntu recognizes almost
all the latest monitors, TVs and projectors by default. Sometimes it may
happen that your additional display is not detected when you connect it to
the machine. To resolve this, go to System Settings ‣ Displays and click on
Detect Displays. is will detect the monitors connected to the machine.
is menu can also be found from the Power Off menu on the top panel.
You can also search for Displays at the Dash search bar. Now, there are two
modes which you can enable for your displays. One option is to spread your
desktop across two or more monitors. is is particularly useful if you are
working on multiple projects and need to keep an eye on each of them at
the same time. e second option is to mirror the desktop onto each of the
displays. is is particularly useful when you are using a laptop to display
something on a larger screen or a projector. To enable this option just
check the box beside Mirror displays and click Apply to save the seings.
You will get a pop-up notification asking if you want to keep the current
seing or revert to the previous seing. Click to keep the current seing.
 


Starting from Ubuntu ., you can also select whether you want the Unity
Launcher in both the displays or only in the primary display.

Connecting and using your printer

Ubuntu supports most new printers. You can add, remove, and change
printer properties by navigating to System Settings ‣ Printing. You can also
search for Printing from the Dash search bar. Opening Printing will display
the “Printing-localhost” window.
   When you want to add a printer, you will need to make sure that it is
switched on, and plugged into your computer with a  cable or connected
to your network.

Adding a local printer

If you have a printer that is connected to your computer with a  cable
then this is termed a local printer. You can add a printer by clicking on the
Add Printer buon.
    In the le hand pane of the “New Printer” window any printers that you
can install will be listed. Select the printer that you would like to install and
click Forward.
    You can now specify the printer name, description and location. Each of         If your printer can automatically do double
these should remind you of that particular printer so that you can choose           sided printing, it will probably have a duplexer.
                                                                                    Please refer to the instructions that came with
the right one to use when printing. Finally, click Apply.                           the printer if you are unsure. If you do have a
                                                                                    duplexer, make sure the Duplexer Installed
                                                                                    option is checked and then click the Forward
Adding a network printer                                                            button.

Make sure that your printer is connected to your network either with an
Ethernet cable or via wireless and is turned on. You can add a printer by
clicking Add Printer. e “New Printer” window will open. Click the “+”
sign next to Network Printer.
    If your printer is found automatically it will appear under Network
Printer. Click the printer name and then click Forward. In the text fields
you can now specify the printer name, description and location. Each of
these should remind you of that particular printer so that you can choose
the right one to use when printing. Finally click Apply.
    You can also add your network printer by entering the  address of the
printer. Select “Find Network Printer,” enter the  address of the printer
in the box that reads Host: and press the Find buon. Ubuntu will find the           The default printer is the one that is automat-
printer and add it. Most printers are detected by Ubuntu automatically. If          ically selected when you print a file. To set a
                                                                                    printer as default, right-click the printer that
Ubuntu cannot detect the printer automatically, it will ask you to enter the        you want to set as default and then click Set As
make and model number of the printer.                                               Default.



Changing printer options

Printer options allow you to change the printing quality, paper size and
media type. ey can be changed by right-clicking a printer and choosing
Properties. e “Printer Properties” window will show; in the le pane,
select Printer Options.
   You can now specify seings by changing the drop-down entries. Some
of the options that you might see are explained.

Media size

is is the size of the paper that you put into your printer tray.
     .


Media source

is is the tray that the paper comes from.

Color Model

is is very useful if you want to print in Grayscale to save on ink, or to
print in Color, or Inverted Grayscale.

Media type

Depending on the printer you can change between:

‣   Plain Paper
‣   Automatic
‣   Photo Paper
‣   Transparency Film
‣    or  Media

Print quality

is specifies how much ink is used when printing, Fast Dra using the
least ink and High-Resolution Photo using the most ink.

Sound

Ubuntu usually detects the audio hardware of the system automatically
during installation. e audio in Ubuntu is provided by a sound server
named PulseAudio. e audio preferences are easily configurable with the
help of a very easy to use  which comes preinstalled with Ubuntu.

Volume icon and Sound Preferences

A volume icon, siing on the top right corner of the screen, provides quick
access to a number of audio related functions. When you le-click on the
volume icon you are greeted with four options: A mute option at the very
top, a slider buon which you can move horizontally to increase/decrease
volume, a shortcut to the default music player, Rhythmbox, and an option
for accessing the Sound Seings. Selecting Sound Seings opens up another
window, which provides access to options for changing input and output
hardware preferences for speakers, microphones and headphones.It also
provides options for seing the volume level for each application. Sound
Seings can also be found from System Settings. It is known as Sound.

Output e Output tab will have a list of all the sound cards available          A microphone is used for making audio/video
in your system. Usually there is only one listed; however, if you have a        calls which are supported by applications like
                                                                                Skype or Empathy. It can also be used for sound
graphics card which supports  audio, it will also show up in the list.      recording.
e Output tab is used for configuring the output of audio. You can in-           If you change your sound output device, it will
crease/decrease and mute/unmute output volume and select your preferred         remain as default.
output device. If you have more than one output device, it will be listed in
the section which reads “Choose a device for sound output.” e default
output hardware, which is automatically detected by Ubuntu during instal-
lation will be selected. is section also allows you to change the balance of
sound on the le and right speakers of your desktop/laptop.
 


Input e second tab is for configuring audio Input.You will be able to             You should note that by default in any Ubuntu
use this section when you have an in-built microphone in your system or           installation, the input sound is muted. You
                                                                                  will have to manually unmute to enable your
if you’ve plugged in an external microphone. You can also add a Bluetooth         microphone to record sound or use it during
headset to your input devices which can serve as a microphone. You can            audio/video calls.
increase/decrease and mute/unmute input volume from this tab. If there is         By default, the volume in Ubuntu is set to
more than one input device, you will see them listed in the white box which       maximum during installation.

reads Choose a device for sound input.

Sound Effects e third tab is Sound Effects. You can enable, disable, or            You can add new sound themes by installing
change the existing sound theme from this section. You can also change the        them from Software Center (e.g., Ubuntu
                                                                                  Studio’s GNOME audio theme.) You will get the
alert sounds for different events.                                                 installed sound themes from the drop down
                                                                                  menu. You can also enable window and button
                                                                                  sounds.
Applications e Applications tab is for changing the volume for running
                                                                                  The Ubuntu Design Team have made a few
applications. is comes in handy if you have multiple audio applications          changes to the volume icon post Ubuntu 11.10.
running, for example, if you have Rhythmbox, Totem Movie Player and a
web-based video playing at the same time. In this situation, you will be able
to increase/decrease, mute/unmute volume for each application from this
tab.

More functionality

e icon can control various aspects of the system, application volume
and music players like Rhythmbox, Banshee, Clementine and Spotify. e
volume indicator icon can now be easily referred to as the sound menu,
given the diverse functionality of the icon. Media controls available include     You can start and control the default music
play/pause, previous track, and next track. You can also switch between           player, Rhythmbox, by simply left clicking on
                                                                                  the sound menu and selecting Rhythmbox from
different playlists from the Choose Playlist option. ere is also a seek bar       the list. Clicking the play button also starts the
which you can manually drag to skip some portions of any song. If the             player.
current playing song has album art, it will show up beside the name of the
current track, otherwise you will see only the details of the song. It displays
the track name, the artist name and the album name of the current track.

Using a webcam

Webcams oen come built into laptops and netbooks. Some desktops, such
as Apple iMacs, have webcams built into their displays. If you purchase a
webcam because your computer doesn’t have its own, it will most likely
have a  connection. To use a  webcam, plug it into any empty 
port of your desktop.
   Almost all new webcams are detected by Ubuntu automatically. You can           There are several applications which are useful
configure webcams for individual applications such as Skype and Empathy            if you have a webcam. Cheese can capture
                                                                                  pictures with your webcam and VLC media
from the application’s setup menu. For webcams which do not work right            player can capture video from your webcam.
away with Ubuntu, visit https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Webcam for help.                  You can install these from the Ubuntu Software
                                                                                  Center.


Scanning text and images

Scanning a document or an image is very simple in Ubuntu. Scanning is
handled by the application Simple Scan. Most of the time, Ubuntu will
simply detect your scanner and you should just be able to use it. To scan a
document, follow these steps:

. Place what you want to scan on the scanner.
. Click to open the Dash and enter scan.
     .


.   Click on Simple Scan.
.   Click to choose between Text or Photo from Document ‣ Scan ‣ Text.
.   Click Scan.
.   Click the Paper Icon to add another page.
.   Click Save to save.

   You can save the scanned documents and pictures in . You can also
save in  format to enable opening in Acrobat Reader. To do that, add the
extension .pdf at the end of the filename.

Troubleshooting your scanner

If your scanner is not detected, Ubuntu may give you a “No devices avail-
able” message when trying to scan. ere may be a reason why Ubuntu
cannot find your scanner.

‣ Simply unplug the scanner and plug it back in. If it is a newer  scan-
  ner, it is likely that it will just work.
‣ e driver for your scanner is not being automatically loaded. Restart
  your system. It might help!
‣ Your scanner is not supported in Ubuntu. e most common type
  of scanner not supported is old parallel port or Lexmark All-in-One
  printer/scanner/faxes.
‣  project listing of supported scanners. e  (Scanner Access
  Now Easy) project provides most of the back-ends to the scanning so-
  ware on Ubuntu.
‣ Check https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HardwareSupportComponentsScanners
  to find out which scanners work with Ubuntu.

Other devices

USB

USB ports are available as standard on almost all computers available now.
ey are used to connect a multitude of devices to your computer. ese
could include portable hard drives, flash drives, removable //Blu-ray
drives, printers, scanners and mobile phones. When connected, flash drives
and portable hard drives are automatically detected—the file manager will
open and display the contents of the drive. You can then use the drives
for copying data to and from the computer. All new cameras, camcorders
and mobile phone  cards are automatically detected by Ubuntu. ese
SD cards have different types of data, so a window will appear with a drop
down menu to choose between video, audio import and the file manager
—you can choose your desired action from this menu.

Firewire

Firewire is a connection on some computers that allows you to transfer data   Firewire is officially known as IEEE 1394. It
from devices. is port is generally used by camcorders and digital cameras.   is also known as the Sony i.LINK and Texas
                                                                              Instruments Lynx.
   If you want to import video from your camcorder you can do so by
connecting your camcorder to the Firewire port. You will need to install a
program called Kino which is available in the Ubuntu Soware Center.          To find out more about Kino, visit http://www.
                                                                              kinodv.org/.
 


Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a wireless technology that is widely used by different types of
devices to connect to each other. It is common to see a mouse or a keyboard
that supports Bluetooth. You can also find  devices, mobile phones,
headsets, music players and many other devices that can connect to your
desktops or laptop and let you transfer data, listen to music, or play games
as an example.
   If your computer has Bluetooth support then you should see a Bluetooth
icon in the top panel, usually near the volume icon. Click on the Bluetooth
icon to open a popup menu with several choices, such as an option to Turn
off Bluetooth.
   e Bluetooth preferences can also be accessed from System Settings ‣
Bluetooth. If you want to connect a new device—for example, to have a
mobile phone send pictures or videos to your computer—select Setup new
device….                                                                        Figure 4.1: The Bluetooth applet menu.

   Ubuntu will open a window for new device setup. When you click For-
ward, Ubuntu will show you how many Bluetooth devices are present near
your computer. e list of available devices might take a minute or so to
appear on the screen as your system scans for these devices. Each device
will be displayed as soon as it is found by Ubuntu. Once a device you’d like
to connect with appears in the list, click on it. en, choose a  number
by selecting PIN options.
   ree predefined  numbers are available, but you can also create a          When you pair two Bluetooth devices, you are
custom . You will need to enter this  on the device you will be pairing   letting each device trust the other one. After
                                                                                you pair two devices, they will automatically
with Ubuntu.                                                                    connect to each other in the future without
   Once the device has been paired, Ubuntu will open the “Setup com-            requiring a PIN.
pleted” window. In Ubuntu, your computer is hidden by default for security
reasons. is means that your Ubuntu system can search other Bluetooth
devices, but others cannot find your Ubuntu system when they perform a
search on their own computer. If you would like to let another device find
your computer, you will have to explicitly allow your computer to be found.
To allow your computer to be found, select “Make computer discoverable”
in Bluetooth preferences. You can also click on the Bluetooth icon and
select Visible to make your computer discoverable.
   You can also add a fancy name for your Bluetooth-enabled Ubuntu sys-
tem by changing the text under Friendly Name.
   Another feature present in the Bluetooth icon menu is “Send files to
device.” Use this option to send a file to a mobile phone without pairing
with the computer.                                                              Android devices need to be paired at all times,
                                                                                even while transferring files.
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
5      Software Management
Software management in Ubuntu

As discussed in Chapter : Working with Ubuntu, Ubuntu offers you a
wide range of applications for your daily work. Ubuntu comes with a basic
set of applications for common tasks like surfing the Internet, checking
your email, listening to music, and organizing your photos and videos.
Sometimes you may need an extra level of specialization: for example you
may want to retouch your photos, run some soware for your business,
or play some new games. In each of these cases you can search for an
application, install it and use it—usually, with no extra cost.
   Soware in Ubuntu is delivered as packages, simplifying the installa-
tion to one click. A package is a compressed file archive containing every-        Figure 5.1: Software Center icon
thing needed to run the application. Packages can also contain information        We recommend Ubuntu Software Center for
describing which other applications, called dependencies or libraries, are        searching, installing and removing applications,
needed. Linux is designed in a way that any library can be updated without        although you still have the possibility to use the
                                                                                  command-line application apt-get, or install
having to reinstall the complete application, minimizing hard drive usage by      and use the advanced application Synaptic
leing other applications use the same library.                                   Package Manager.
   Most other operating systems require a user to purchase commercial
soware (online or through a physical store), or search the Internet for a
free alternative (if one is available). e correct installation file must then
be verified for integrity, downloaded and located on the computer, followed
by the user proceeding through a number of installation prompts and op-
tions. By default Ubuntu gives you a centralized point with two different
ways to browse the repositories for searching, installing and removing so-
ware.
‣ Ubuntu Soware Center
‣ Command line apt-get
Searching, installing and/or removing applications with Ubuntu Soware
Center is the easiest and most comfortable way. It is recommended for all
kinds of users, starting from beginners to the most experienced.

Using the Ubuntu Software Center

ere are numerous ways to install soware on an operating system. In
Ubuntu, the quickest and easiest way to find and install new applications is
through the Ubuntu Soware Center.
   To start the application, click on the Ubuntu Soware Center icon in the
Launcher, or click on the Dash and search for Ubuntu Soware Center.
   e Ubuntu Soware Center can be used to install applications that are
available in the official Ubuntu repositories. e Soware Center window
has four parts—a list of categories on the le, a banner at the top, a Recom-
mended For You panel at the boom and two featured areas on the right.
Clicking on a category will take you to a list of related applications. For
example, the Internet category contains Firefox Web Browser. e featured
areas highlight What’s New and Top Rated soware. Each area shows dif-
ferent application icons. Just click an icon to get more information on the
application or to install it. To see all soware the area contains, click More.
     .


                                                                                      Figure 5.2: You can install and remove applica-
                                                                                      tions from your computer using the Software
                                                                                      Center.




                                                                                      Figure 5.3: Ubuntu Software Center icon in the
                                                                                      Launcher.




   ree sections at the top represent your current view of the Soware
Center’s catalog. Click the All Soware buon to see soware that is avail-
able to install, click Installed to see a list of soware that is already installed
on your computer, or click History to see previous installations and dele-
tions organized by date.

Find your application

Ubuntu Soware Center displays different sources in the “Get Soware”
section. Clicking the arrow next to “All Soware” will show a list of in-
dividual sections. Selecting “Provided by Ubuntu” will show free official
soware, “For Purchase” will show soware for purchasing, and “Canonical
Partners” will show soware from partners of Canonical, such as Adobe.
   If you are looking for an application, you may already know a specific
name (for example, VLC Media Player), or you may just have a general
category in mind (for example, the Sound and Video category includes a
number of different soware applications such as video converters, audio
editors, and music players).
   To help you find the right application, you can browse the Soware
Center catalog by clicking on the category that reflects the type of soware
you are looking for, or use the Search field at the top right of the window to
look for specific names or keywords.
   When you select a category, you will be shown a list of applications.
Some categories have sub-categories—for example, the Games category has
subcategories for Simulation and Card Games. To move through categories
you can use the back and forward buons at the top of the window. is
  


version of Ubuntu has a new category “Books & Magazines” which contains
interesting books and magazines.

Installing software

Once you have found an application you would like to try, installing it is
just one click away.
   To install soware:
. Click the Install buon to the right of the selected package to install it. If
   you would like to read more about the soware package before installing
   it, first click on “More Info.” is will take you to a short description of
   the application, as well as a screenshot and a Web link when available.
   Related add-ons will be listed below the application’s description. You
   can click Install from this screen as well. In addition, if you use the          You must have administrative privileges, and
   Gwibber micro-blogging application, you can hit the “Share…” link below          you will need to be connected to the Internet
                                                                                    for the Software Center to work. To learn how
   the description of an application to tell your friends about it.                 to set up your Internet connection, see Getting
. Aer clicking Install, enter your password into the authentication win-          online.
   dow that appears. is is the same password you use to log in to your
   account. You are required to enter it whenever installing or removing
   soware in order to prevent someone without administrator access
   from making unauthorized changes to your computer. If you receive an
   Authentication Failure message aer typing in your password, check
   that you typed it correctly by trying again. If the error continues, this
   may mean that your account is not authorized to install soware on the
   computer.
. Wait until the package is finished installing. During the installation
   (or removal) of programs, you will see an animated icon of rotating
   arrows to the le of the In Progress buon in the sidebar. If you like, you
   can now go back to the main browsing window and choose additional
   soware packages to be installed by following the steps above. At any
   time, clicking the Progress buon on the top will take you to a summary
   of all operations that are currently processing. Here you can also click
   the X icon to cancel any operation.
Once the Soware Center has finished installing an application, it is ready
to be used. You can start the newly installed application by going to the
Dash and typing the name of the application in the search bar. By default
application is added to the Launcher. You can change this behavior by
deselecting View ‣ New Applications in Launer.

Removing software

Removing applications is very similar to installing them. First find the in-
stalled soware in Ubuntu Soware Center. You can click on the Installed
buon which will show all the installed soware listed in different cate-
gories. Scroll down to the application you wish to remove. If you click on
the arrow next to Installed buon, you will find a list of soware providers,
which can help you to narrow your search. You also can enter keywords in
the Search field to quickly find installed soware, or you can search by date
in the History tab (more on History below).
   To remove soware:
. Click the Remove buon to the right of the selected application.
. Enter your password into the authentication window that appears. Re-
   moving Soware also requires that you enter your password to help
     .


                                                                                Figure 5.4: Installing Software via the Ubuntu
                                                                                Software Center.




  protect your computer against unauthorized changes. e package will
  then be queued for removal, and will appear under the progress section
  in the top.

  Removing a package will also update your menus accordingly.

Software history

e Ubuntu Soware Center keeps track of past soware management
in the History section. is is useful if you wish to revert installations or
removals and do not remember the application’s name.
   ere are four buons in the history section—All Changes, Installations,
Updates and Removals. Clicking one will show a list of days that action
occurred. If you click the arrow next to a day, a list of individual packages
will be shown, along with what was done with them and at what time. e
History section shows all soware installation history, not just changes
made within the Soware Center. For example, packages updated through
the Update Manager will also be listed.

Software Recommendations

e Ubuntu Soware Center offers two types of recommendations—per
user based and per application based. Click the Turn On Recommendations
buon at the boom of the Ubuntu Soware Center to enable per—user
based recommendations. You will have to log in with your Ubuntu So-
ware Center account. is is the same as your Ubuntu One or Launchpad
account. When you enable recommendations, your list of installed soware
will be periodically sent to servers of Canonical. Recommendations will
appear in the boom panel. If you want to disable these recommendations
then go to View ‣ Turn Off Recommendations.
   Per—application based recommendations do not require log in. ey
are labeled as “People Also Installed.” ese are the applications installed
by users who also installed the application which you are about to install.
  


                                                                                   Figure 5.5: You can turn on Software Rec-
                                                                                   ommendations via clicking on the Turn On
                                                                                   Recommendations button.




ese recommendations are shown in the detailed page of particular appli-
cation.

                                                                                   Figure 5.6: The “People Also Installed” section
                                                                                   shows applications installed by users who also
                                                                                   installed the application which you are about to
                                                                                   install.




Managing additional software

Although the Ubuntu Soware Center provides a large library of appli-
cations to choose from, initially only those packages available within the
official Ubuntu repositories are listed. At times, you may be interested in a
particular application that is not available in these repositories. If this hap-
pens, it is important to understand some alternative methods for accessing
and installing soware in Ubuntu, such as downloading an installation file
manually from the Internet, or adding extra repositories. First, we will look
at how to manage your repositories through Soware Sources.

Software Sources

e Ubuntu Soware Center lists only those applications that are available
in your enabled repositories. Repositories can be added or removed through
the Soware Sources application. You can open Soware Sources from the
Ubuntu Soware Center. Simply go to Edit ‣ Soware Sources or open the
 (Alt key) and search for “sources.”

Managing the official repositories

When you open Soware Sources, it shows you the Ubuntu Soware tab
where the first four options are enabled by default.                                The Ubuntu Software tab lists the official
                                                                                   Ubuntu repositories, each containing different
                                                                                   types of packages.
Canonical-supported open source soware (main) is repository contains
   all the open-source packages that are maintained by Canonical.
Community-maintained open source soware (universe) is repository
   contains all the open-source packages that are developed and maintained
   by the Ubuntu community.
Proprietary drivers for devices (restricted) is repository contains propri-       Closed-source packages are sometimes
   etary drivers, which may be required to utilize the full capabilities of        referred to as non-free. This is a reference to
                                                                                   freedom of speech, rather than monetary cost.
   some of your devices or hardware.                                               Payment is not required to use these packages.
Soware restricted by copyright or legal issues (multiverse) is repository
   contains soware that may be protected from use in some states or
   countries by copyright or licensing laws. By using this repository you
   assume responsibility for the usage of any packages that you install.
Source code is repository contains the source code that is used to build
   the soware packages from some of the other repositories. e Source
     .


                                                                                 Figure 5.7: Drivers can be installed or removed
                                                                                 via the Additional Drivers application.




   code option should not be selected unless you have experience with
   building applications from source.                                            Building applications from source is an ad-
                                                                                 vanced process for creating packages, and
                                                                                 usually only concerns developers. You may
Selecting the best software server                                               also require source files when using a custom
                                                                                 kernel, or if trying to use the latest version of
Ubuntu provides and allows many servers around the world to mirror the           an application before it is released for Ubuntu.
packages from the sources listed under “Managing the official repositories.”       As this is a more advanced area, it will not be
                                                                                 covered in this manual.
   When selecting a server, you may want to consider the following:
                                                                                 Ubuntu grants permission to many servers all
                                                                                 across the world to act as mirrors. That is, they
Distance to server. is will affect the speed you can achieve with the file        host an exact copy of all the files contained in
   server.                                                                       the official Ubuntu repositories.

Internet Service Provider. Some Internet service providers offer cheaper, or
   even unlimited free downloads from their own servers.
ality of server. Some servers may only offer downloads at a capped
   speed, limiting the rate at which you can install and update soware on
   your computer.

   Ubuntu will automatically choose an appropriate server while installing,
and as such these seings should not be changed unless your physical
location changes drastically or if you feel a higher speed should be achieved
by your Internet connection. e guide below will help in choosing an
optimal server.
   Ubuntu provides a tool for selecting the server that provides the fastest
connection with your computer.

. Click the dropdown box next to “Download from:” in the Soware
   Sources window.
. Select “Other…” from the list.
. In the “Server Selection” window that appears. Click the Select Best
   Server buon in the upper right. Your computer will now aempt a
   connection with all the available servers, then select the one with the
   fastest speed.

   If you are happy with the automatic selection, click Choose Server to
return to the Soware Sources window.
   If you are not happy with the automatic selection or prefer not to use
the tool, the fastest server is oen the closest server to you geographically.
  


In this case simply choose “Other” then find the nearest location to your
computer. When you are happy with the seings chosen click Choose
Server to return to the Soware Sources window.
   If you do not have a working Internet connection, updates and programs
can be installed from the installation media itself by inserting your media
and clicking the box under “Installable from /.” Once this box is
checked the media within the/ drive will function as an online
repository and as such the soware on the media will be installable from
the Ubuntu Soware Center.

Adding more software repositories

Ubuntu makes it easy to add additional, third-party repositories to your        A PPA is a Personal Package Archive. These
list of soware sources. e most common repositories added to Ubuntu            are online repositories used to host the latest
                                                                                versions of software packages, digital projects,
are called s. ese allow you to install soware packages that are not        and other applications.
available in the official repositories, and automatically be notified whenever
updates for these packages are available.
    If you know the web address of a ’s Launchpad site, adding it to your
list of soware sources is relatively simple. To do so, you will need to use
the Other Soware tab in the “Soware Sources” window.
    On the Launchpad site for a , you will see a heading to the le called
“Adding this PPA to your system.” Underneath will be a short paragraph
containing a unique  in the form of ppa:test-ppa/example. Highlight this
 by selecting it with your mouse, then right-click and select Copy.

                                                                                Figure 5.8: This is an example of the Launchpad
                                                                                page for the Lifesaver PPA. Lifesaver is an
                                                                                application that is not available in the official
                                                                                Ubuntu repositories. However, by adding
                                                                                this PPA to your list of software sources, it
                                                                                would then be easy to install and update this
                                                                                application through the Software Center.




    Return to the “Soware Sources” window, and in the Other Soware tab
click Add… at the boom. A new window will appear, and you will see the
words “Apt line:” followed by a text field. Right-click on the empty space in
this text field and select Paste, and you should see the  appear that you
copied from the s Launchpad site earlier. Click Add Source to return to
the “Soware Sources” window. You will see a new entry has been added
to the list of sources in this window, with a selected check box in front
meaning it is enabled.
     .


    If you click Close in the boom right corner of this window, a message
will appear informing you that “e information about available soware
is out-of-date.” is is because you have just added a new repository to
Ubuntu, and it now needs to connect to that repository and download a
list of the packages that it provides. Click Reload, and wait while Ubuntu
refreshes all of your enabled repositories (including this new one you just
added). When it has finished, the window will close automatically.
    Congratulations, you have just added a  to your list of soware
sources. You can now open the Soware Center and install applications
from this , in the same way you previously installed applications from
the default Ubuntu repositories.

Manual software installation

Although Ubuntu has extensive soware available, on some occasions you
may want to manually install soware packages that are not available in the
repositories. If there is not a  for the soware, you will need to install it
manually. Before you choose to do so, make sure you trust the package and
its maintainer.
    Packages in Ubuntu have a .deb extension. Double-clicking a package
will open an overview page in the Soware Center, which will give you
more information about that package.
    e overview gives some technical information about that package, a
website link (if applicable) and the option to install. Clicking Install will
install the package just like any other installation in the Soware Center.

                                                                                   Figure 5.9: Installing .deb files manually using
                                                                                   software center.




Updates and upgrades

Ubuntu also allows you to decide how to manage package updates through
the Updates tab in the Soware Sources window.
  


Ubuntu updates

In this section, you are able to specify the kinds of updates you wish to
install on your system, and usually depends on your preferences around
stability, versus having access to the latest developments.

                                                                                  Figure 5.10: You can update installed software
                                                                                  by using the Update Manager application in
                                                                                  Ubuntu.




Important security updates ese updates are highly recommended to
   ensure your system remains as secure as possible. ese are enabled by
   default.
Recommended updates ese updates are not as important for keeping your
   system secure, but will mean your packages always have the most recent
   bug fixes or minor updates that have been tested and approved. is
   option is also enabled by default.
Pre-released updates is option is for those who would rather remain
   up-to-date with the very latest releases of applications, at the risk of in-
   stalling an update that has unresolved bugs or conflicts. Note that it is
   possible that you will encounter problems with these updated applica-
   tions, therefore this option is not enabled by default.
Unsupported updates ese are updates that have not yet been fully tested
   and reviewed by Canonical. Some bugs may occur when using these
   updates, and so this option is also not enabled by default.


Automatic updates

e middle section of this window allows you to customize how your sys-
tem manages updates, such as the frequency with which it checks for new
packages, as well as whether it should install important updates right away
(without asking for your permission), download them only, or just notify
you about them.

Release upgrade

Here you can decide which system upgrades you would like to be notified            Every six months, Canonical will release a new
about.                                                                            version of the Ubuntu operating system. These
                                                                                  are called normal releases. Every four normal
                                                                                  releases—or 24 months—Canonical releases
Never Choose this if you would rather not be notified about any new                a long-term support (LTS) release. Long-term
  Ubuntu releases.                                                                support releases are intended to be the most
                                                                                  stable releases available, and are supported for
                                                                                  a longer period of time.
     .


For any new version Choose this if you always want to have the latest
   Ubuntu release, regardless of whether it is a long-term support release or
   not. is option is recommended for normal home users.
For long-term support versions Choose this option if you need a release
   that will be more stable and have support for a longer time. If you use
   Ubuntu for business purposes, you may want to consider selecting this
   option.
  


Ubuntu for advanced users

We hope you understand how using Ubuntu can make your computing
experience easier, safer, and more efficient. To this point, we’ve provided
detailed instructions on geing the most from Ubuntu’s basic features. In
this chapter, we’ll detail some of Ubuntu’s more advanced features—like the
terminal, a powerful utility that can help you accomplish tasks without the
need for a graphical user interface (). We’ll also discuss some advanced
security measures you can implement to make your computer even safer.
We’ve wrien this chapter with advanced users in mind. If you’re new to
Ubuntu, don’t feel as though you’ll need to master these topics to get the
most out of your new soware (you can quite easily skip to the next chapter
without any adverse impact to your experience with Ubuntu). However, if
you’re looking to expand your knowledge of Ubuntu, we encourage you to
keep reading.

Introduction to the terminal

roughout this manual, we have focused primarily on the graphical desk-
top user interface. In order to fully realize the power of Ubuntu, you may
want to learn how to use the terminal.

What is the terminal?

Most operating systems, including Ubuntu, have two types of user in-
terfaces. e first is a graphical user interface (). is is the desktop,
windows, menus, and toolbars that you click to get things done. e second,
and much older, type of interface is the command-line interface ().
   e terminal is Ubuntu’s command-line interface. It is a method of
controlling some aspects of Ubuntu using only commands that you type on
the keyboard.

Why would I want to use the terminal?

You can perform most day-to-day activities without ever needing to open
the terminal. However, the terminal is a powerful and invaluable tool that
can be used to perform many useful tasks you might not be able to accom-
plish with a . For example:

‣ Troubleshooting any difficulties that may arise when using Ubuntu
  sometimes requires you to use the terminal.
‣ A command-line interface is sometimes a faster way to accomplish a
  task. For example, it is oen easier to perform operations on many files
  concurrently using the terminal.
‣ Learning the command-line interface is the first step towards more
  advanced troubleshooting, system administration, and soware develop-
  ment skills. If you are interested in becoming a developer or an advanced
  Ubuntu user, knowledge of the command-line will be essential.

Opening the Terminal

You can open the terminal by clicking Dash ‣ Applications ‣ Terminal.         The terminal gives you access to what is called a
   When the terminal window opens, it will be largely blank apart from        shell. When you type a command in the terminal
                                                                              the shell interprets this command, resulting
some text at the top le of the screen, followed by a blinking block. is     in the desired action. Different types of shells
text is your prompt—it displays, by default, your login name and your         accept slightly different commands. The most
                                                                              popular is called “bash,” and is the default shell
                                                                              in Ubuntu.
     .


computer’s name, followed by the current directory. e tilde (~) means that      In GUI environments the term “folder” is
the current directory is your home directory. Finally, the blinking block is     commonly used to describe a place where
                                                                                 files are stored. In CLI environments the term
the cursor—this marks where text will be entered as you type.                    “directory” is used to describe the same thing.
   To test a terminal command, type pwd and press Enter. e terminal             This metaphor is exposed in many commands
should display /home/yourusername. is text is called the “output.” You          (i.e., cd or pwd) throughout this chapter.

have just used the pwd (print working directory) command, which outputs
(displays) the current directory.

                                                                                 Figure 5.11: The default terminal window al-
                                                                                 lows you to run hundreds of useful commands.




   All commands in the terminal follow the same approach: Type a com-
mand, possibly followed by some parameters, and press Enter to perform
the specified action. Oen some output will be displayed that confirms the         Parameters are extra segments of text,
action was completed successfully, although this can depend on the com-          usually added at the end of a command, that
                                                                                 change how the command itself is interpreted.
mand being executed. For example, using the cd command to change your            These usually take the form of -h or --
current directory (see below) will change the prompt, but will not display       help, for example. In fact, --help can be
any output.                                                                      added to most commands to display a short
                                                                                 description of the command, as well as a list
   e rest of this chapter covers some very common uses of the terminal.         of any other parameters that can be used with
However, it cannot address the nearly infinite possibilities available to         that command.
you when using the command-line interface in Ubuntu. roughout the
second part of this manual, we will continue to refer to the command line,
particularly when discussing steps involved in troubleshooting and the
more advanced management of your computer.

Ubuntu file system structure

Ubuntu uses the Linux file system, which is based on a series of folders in
the root directory. Each of these folders contains important system files that
cannot be modified unless you are running as the root user or use sudo. is
restriction exists for both security and safety reasons: computer viruses will
not be able to change the core system files, and ordinary users should not be
able to accidentally damage anything vital.
   Below are some of the most important directories.
   e root directory—denoted by /—contains all other directories and files.
Here are the contents of some essential system directories:

/bin & /sbin Many essential system applications (equivalent to C:Windows)
/etc  System-wide configuration files
/home Each user will have a subdirectory to store personal files (for exam-
   ple /home/your-username, equivalent to C:Users or C:Documents and
   Settings)
/lib Library files, similar to .dll files on Windows
  


                                                                               Figure 5.12: Some of the most important
                                                                               directories in the root file system.




/media   Removable media ( and  drives) will be mounted in this
   directory
/root is contains the root user’s files (not to be confused with the root
   directory)
/usr Pronounced “user,” it contains most program files (not to be confused
   with each user’s home directory, equivalent to C:Program Files)
/var/log Contains log files wrien by many applications

   Every directory has a path. e path is a directory’s full name—it de-
scribes a way to navigate the directory from anywhere in the system.
   For example, the directory /home/your-username/Desktop contains all
the files that are on your Ubuntu desktop. e path /home/your-username/Desktop
can be broken down into a handful of key pieces:

. /—indicates that the path starts at the root directory
. home/—from the root directory, the path goes into the home directory
. your-username/—from the home directory, the path goes into the your-
   username directory
. Desktop—from the your-username directory, the path ends up in the
   Desktop directory

   Every directory in Ubuntu has a complete path that starts with the / (the
root directory) and ends in the directory’s own name.
   Directories and files that begin with a period are hidden directories.       If you are creating a file or directory from
ese are usually only visible with a special command or by selecting a         the command line and ultimately want it
                                                                               hidden, then simply start the filename or
specific option. In the Nautilus you can show hidden files and directories       directory name with a dot (.)—this signals to
by selecting View ‣ Show Hidden Files, or by pressing Ctrl+H. If you are       the filesystem that the file/directory should
using the terminal, then you would type ls -a and press Enter to see the       be hidden unless expressly viewed through
                                                                               showing hidden files and folders through the
hidden files and directories. ere are many hidden directories in your          GUI or through the appropriate command line
home folder used to store program preferences. For example, /home/your-        switch.
username/.evolution stores preferences used by the Evolution mail appli-
cation.
     .


Mounting and unmounting removable devices

Any time you add storage media to your computer—an internal or external
hard drive, a  flash drive, a —it needs to be mounted before it is
accessible. Mounting a device means associating a directory name with the
device, allowing you to navigate to the directory to access the device’s files.
   When a device, such as a  flash drive or a media player, is mounted in
Ubuntu, a folder is automatically created for it in the media directory, and
you are given the appropriate permissions to be able to read and write to
the device.
   Most file managers will automatically add a shortcut to the mounted
device in the side bar of your home folder so the device is easy to access.
You shouldn’t have to physically navigate to the media directory in Ubuntu,
unless you choose to do so from the command line.
   When you’ve finished using a device, you can unmount it. Unmounting a
device disassociates the device from its directory, allowing you to eject it.

Securing Ubuntu

Now that you know a bit more about using the command line, we can use it
to make your computer more secure. e following sections discuss various
security concepts, along with procedures for keeping your Ubuntu running
smoothly, safely, and securely.

Why Ubuntu is safe

Ubuntu is secure by default for a number of reasons:                             Just because Ubuntu implements strong
                                                                                 security by default doesn’t mean the user
‣ Ubuntu clearly distinguishes between normal users and administrative           can ”throw caution to the wind.” Care should
                                                                                 be taken when downloading files, opening
  users.                                                                         email, and browsing the Internet. Using a good
‣ Soware for Ubuntu is kept in a secure online repository, which contains       antivirus program is warranted.
  no false or malicious soware.
‣ Open-source soware like Ubuntu allows security flaws to be easily
  detected.
‣ Security patches for open-source soware like Ubuntu are oen released
  quickly.
‣ Many viruses designed to primarily target Windows-based systems do
  not affect Ubuntu systems.


Basic security concepts

e following sections discuss basic security concepts—like file permissions,
passwords, and user accounts. Understanding these concepts will help you
follow the remaining procedures for securing your computer.

Permissions

In Ubuntu, files and folders can be set up so that only specific users can
view, modify, or run them. For instance, you might wish to share an impor-
tant file with other users, but do not want those users to be able to edit the
file. Ubuntu controls access to files on your computer through a system of
“permissions.” Permissions are seings configured to control exactly how
files on your computer are accessed and used.
  


  To learn more about modifying permissions, visit https://help.ubuntu.
com/community/FilePermissions.

Passwords

You should use a strong password to increase the security of your com-
puter. Your password should not contain names, common words, or com-
mon phrases. By default, the minimum length of a password in Ubuntu is
four characters. We recommend a password with more than the minimum
number of characters. A password with a minimum of eight characters
which includes both upper and lower case leers, numbers, and symbols is
considered strong.

Locking the screen

When you leave your computer unaended, you may want to lock the
screen. Locking your screen prevents anyone from using your computer
until your password is entered. To lock the screen:

‣ Click the session menu icon in the right corner of the top panel, then
  select Lo Screen, or
‣ press Ctrl+Alt+L to lock the screen. is keyboard shortcut can be
  changed in Dash ‣ Applications ‣ Keyboard Shortcuts

User accounts

Users and groups

When Ubuntu is installed, it is automatically configured for a single person
to use. If more than one person will use the computer, each person should
have his or her own user account. is way, each user can have separate
seings, documents, and other files. If necessary, you can also protect files
from being viewed or modified by users without administrative privileges.
   Like most operating systems, Ubuntu allows you to create separate user
accounts for each person. Ubuntu also supports user groups, which allow
you to administer permissions for multiple users at the same time.
   Every user in Ubuntu is a member of at least one group—at a bare min-
imum, the user of the computer has permissions in a group with the same
name as the user. A user can also be a member of additional groups. You
can configure some files and folders to be accessible only by a user and a
group. By default, a user’s files are only accessible by that user; system files
are only accessible by the root user.

Managing users

You can manage users and groups using the Users and Groups administra-
tion application. To find this application, click Session Indicator ‣ Systems
and Settings ‣ User Accounts.
   To adjust the user seings, first click the Unlo buon and enter your
password to unlock the user seings. Next, select the user that you want to
modify from the list. en click on the element that you want to change.

Adding a user Click the + buon which appears underneath the list of the
current user accounts that have already been created. A window will ap-
pear that has two fields. e Name field is for a friendly display name. e
     .


                                                                                 Figure 5.13: Add, remove and change the user
                                                                                 accounts.




Username field is for the actual username. Fill in the requested information,
then click OK. A new dialog box will appear asking you to enter a password
for the user you have just created. Fill out the fields, then click OK. You can
also click the gears buon to generate a password. Privileges you grant to
the new user can be altered in “Users Seings”.

Modifying a user Click on the name of a user in the list of users, then click
on the text entry which appears next to each of following options:

‣ Account type:
‣ Password:
‣ Automatic Login:

Deleting a user Select a user from the list and click -. Ubuntu will deacti-
vate the user’s account, and you can choose whether to remove the user’s
home folder or leave it in place. If a user is removed and the user’s files
remain, the only user that can access the files will be root or anyone associ-
ated with the file’s group.

Managing groups

Group management is accomplished through the command line (Terminal)
or by adding third-party applications that are beyond the scope of this man-
ual. You will find more information in the subsection “Using the command
line” below.

Adding a group To add a group, type sudo addgroup groupname and press
Enter, replacing groupname with the name of the group you wish to add.


Modifying a group  To alter the users in an existing group, type sudo ad-
duser username groupname   (adding a user) or sudo deluser username
groupname (removing a user) and press Enter, replacing username and
groupname with the user and group name with which you’re working.

Deleting a group To delete a group, type sudo delgroup groupname and
press Enter, replacing groupname with the name of the group you wish to
delete.
  


Applying groups to files and folders

To change the group associated with a file or folder, open the Nautilus file
browser and navigate to the appropriate file or folder. en, either select
the folder and choose File ‣ Properties from the menubar, or right-click on
the file or folder and select Properties. In the Properties dialog window,
click on the Permissions tab and select the desired group from the Groups
drop-down list. en close the window.

Using the command line

You can also modify user and group seings via the command line. We
recommend that you use the graphical method above unless you have a
good reason to use the command line. For more information on using the
command line to modify users and groups, see the Ubuntu Server Guide at
hps://help.ubuntu.com/./serverguide/C/user-management.html

System updates

Good security happens with an up-to-date system. Ubuntu provides free
soware and security updates. You should apply these updates regularly.
See Updates and upgrades to learn how to update your Ubuntu computer
with the latest security updates and patches.

Trusting third party sources

Normally, you will add applications to your computer via the Ubuntu So-
ware Center which downloads soware from the Ubuntu repositories as
described in Chapter : Soware Management. However, it is occasion-
ally necessary to add soware from other sources. For example, you may
need to do this when an application is not available in the Ubuntu reposito-
ries or when you need a newer version of the one available in the Ubuntu
repositories.
   Additional repositories are available from sites such as getdeb.net and
Launchpad s which can be added as described in Soware Sources. You
can download the  packages for some applications from their respective
project sites on the Internet. Alternately, you can build applications from
their source code (an advanced method of installing and using applications).
   Using only recognized sources such as a project’s site, , or various
community repositories (such as getdeb.net) is more secure than down-
loading applications from an arbitrary (and perhaps less reputable) source.
When using a third party source, consider its trustworthiness, and be sure
you know exactly what you’re installing on your computer.

Firewall

A firewall is an application that protects your computer against unautho-
rized access by people on the Internet or your local network. Firewalls
block connections to your computer from unknown sources. is helps
prevent security breaches.
   Uncomplicated Firewall () is the standard firewall configuration pro-
gram in Ubuntu. It runs from the command line, but a program called Gufw
allows you to use it with a graphical user interface . See Chapter :
Soware Management to learn more about installing the Gufw package.
     .


   Once Gufw is installed, start Gufw by clicking Dash ‣ Applications ‣
Firewall configuration. To enable the firewall, select the Enable option. By
default, all incoming connections are denied. is seing should be suitable
for most users.
   If you are running server soware on your Ubuntu system (such as a
web server, or an  server), then you will need to open the ports these
services use. If you are not familiar with servers, you will likely not need to
open any additional ports.
   To open a port click on the Add buon. For most purposes, the Precon-
figured tab is sufficient. Select Allow from the first box and then select the
program or service required.
   e simple tab can be used to allow access on a single port, and the
Advanced tab can be used to allow access on a range of ports.

Encryption

You may wish to protect your sensitive personal data—for instance, finan-
cial records—by encrypting it. Encrypting a file or folder essentially “locks”
that file or folder by encoding it with an algorithm that keeps it scrambled
until it is properly decoded with a password. Encrypting your personal data
ensures that no one can open your personal folders or read your private
data without your authorization through the use of a private key.
   Ubuntu includes a number of tools to encrypt files and folders. is
chapter will discuss two of them. For further information on using en-
cryption with either single files or email, see Ubuntu Community Help
documents at hps://help.ubuntu.com/community.

Home folder

When installing Ubuntu, it is possible to encrypt a user’s home folder. See
Chapter : Installation for more on encrypting the home folder.

Private folder

If you have not chosen to encrypt a user’s entire home folder, it is possible
to encrypt a single folder—called Private—in a user’s home folder. To do
this, follow these steps:
. Install the ecryptfs-utils soware package from the Ubuntu Soware
   Center. (For more information about the Soware Center, review Using
   the Ubuntu Soware Center.)
. Use the terminal to run ecryptfs-setup-private to set up the private
   folder.
. Enter your account’s password when prompted.
. Either choose a mount passphrase or generate one.
. Record both passphrases in a safe location. ese are required if you ever
   have to recover your data manually.
. Log out and log back in to mount the encrypted folder.
   Aer the Private folder has been set up, any files or folders in it will
automatically be encrypted.
   If you need to recover your encrypted files manually see https://help.
ubuntu.com/community/EncryptedPrivateDirectory.
6       Troubleshooting
Resolving problems

Sometimes, things may not work as they should. Luckily, problems that
are encountered while working with Ubuntu are oen easily fixed. Below,
we offer a guide for resolving the basic problems that users may encounter
while using Ubuntu. If you need any additional help beyond what this
chapter provides, take a look at other support options that are discussed in
Finding additional help and support later in this book.

Troubleshooting guide

e key to an effective troubleshooting is to work slowly, complete all
of troubleshooting steps, and to document the changes that you make to
Ubuntu. is way, you will be able to undo your work, or give fellow users
the information about your previous aempts in cases when you need to
turn to the community for support.

Ubuntu fails to start after I’ve installed Windows

Occasionally you may install Ubuntu and then decide to install Microso
Windows as a second operating system running side-by-side with Ubuntu.
is is supported by Ubuntu, but you might also find that aer installing
Windows you will no longer be able to start Ubuntu.
    When you first turn on your computer, a “bootloader” must start Ubuntu
or another operating system. When you installed Ubuntu, you installed an       A bootloader is the initial software that loads
advanced bootloader called  which allows you to choose between the         the operating system when you switch on the
                                                                               computer.
various operating systems on your computer, such as Ubuntu, Windows,
Solaris or Mac OS X. However, when you installed Windows, it replaced the
 with its own bootloader, thus removing the ability to choose which
operating system you’d like to use. You can restore  and regain the
ability to choose your operating system by using the same  you used to
install Ubuntu.
    First, insert your Ubuntu  into your computer and then restart it,
making sure to have your computer start from the  (see Chapter : Instal-
lation). Next, choose your language (e.g., English) and select Try Ubuntu.
Once Ubuntu starts, click on the top-most icon in the Launcher (the Dash
icon). en, search for Terminal using the search box and then select Ter-
minal in the search results. A window should open with a blinking prompt
line. Enter the following, and press Enter:
    $ sudo fdisk -l

    Disk /dev/hda: 120.0 GB, 120034123776 bytes
    255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 14593 cylinders
    Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes


      Device Boot       Start          End        Blocks    Id   System
    /dev/sda1               1         1224         64228+   83   Linux
    /dev/sda2   *        1225         2440     9767520      a5   Windows
    /dev/sda3            2441        14593    97618972+     5    Extended
    /dev/sda4           14532        14593        498015    82   Linux swap
     .



  Partition table entries are not in disk order

                                                                               The device (/dev/sda1, /dev/sda2, etc) we are
    is output shows that your system (Linux, on which Ubuntu is based)        looking for is identified by the word “Linux” in
                                                                               the System column. Modify the instructions
is installed on device /dev/sda, but your computer is booting to /dev/sda    below if necessary, replacing /dev/sda1 with
(where Windows is located). We need to fix this by telling the computer to      the name of your Linux device.
boot to the Linux device instead.
    To do this, first create a place to connect your existing existing Ubuntu
installation with your temporary troubleshooting session:
  $ sudo mkdir /media/root

  Next, link your Ubuntu installation and this new folder:
  $ sudo mount /dev/sda1 /media/root

  If you’ve done this correctly, then you should see the following:
  $ ls /media/root
  bin dev home lib mnt root srv usr
  boot etc initrd lib64 opt sbin sys var
  cdrom initrd.img media proc selinux tmp vmlinuz

  Now, you can reinstall :
  $ sudo grub-install --root-directory=/media/root /dev/sda
  Installation finished. No error reported.
  This is the contents of the device map /boot/grub/device.map.
  Check if this is correct or not. If any of the lines is incorrect,
  fix it and re-run the script grub-install.
  (hd0) /dev/sda

   Finally, remove the Ubuntu disc from your  drive, reboot your
computer, and then start enjoying your Ubuntu operating system once
again.
   is guide may not work for all Ubuntu users due to differences in the
various system configuration. Still, this is the recommended and most
successful method for restoring the  bootloader. If you are following
this guide and if it does not restore  on your computer, then try the
other troubleshooting methods at https://help.ubuntu.com/community/
RecoveringUbuntuAfterInstallingWindows.

I forgot my password

If you forget your password in Ubuntu, you will need to reset it using the
“Recovery mode.”
    To start the Recovery mode, shut down your computer and then start
again. As the computer starts up, press Shift. Select the Recovery mode
option using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Recovery mode should be
the second item in the list.
    Wait until Ubuntu starts up—this may take a few minutes. Once booted,
you will not be able to see a normal login screen. Instead, you will be pre-
sented with the Recovery Menu. Select root using the arrow keys and press
Enter.
    You will now be at a terminal prompt:
  root@ubuntu:~#

  To reset your password, enter:
 


                                                                                Figure 6.1: This is the grub screen in which you
                                                                                can choose recovery mode.




   # passwd username

   Replace “username” above with your username, aer which Ubuntu will
prompt you for a new password. Enter your desired password and press the
Enter key and then re-type your password again, and press Enter. (Ubuntu
asks for your password twice to make sure you did not make a mistake
while typing). Once you have restored your password, return to the normal
system environment by entering:
   # init 2

   Login as usual and continue enjoying Ubuntu.

I accidentally deleted some files that I need

If you’ve deleted a file by accident, you may be able to recover it from
Ubuntu’s trash folder. is is a special folder where Ubuntu stores deleted
files before they are permanently removed from your computer.
    To access the trash folder click on the Trash icon at the boom of the
Unity Launcher.
    If you want to restore deleted items from the trash:

. Open Trash
. Click on each item you want to restore to select it. Press and hold Ctrl
   to select multiple items.
. Click Restore Selected Items to move the deleted items back to their
   original locations.

How do I clean Ubuntu?

Over time, Ubuntu’s soware packaging system can accumulate unused
packages and temporary files. ese temporary files, also called caches,
contain files from all of the packages that you have installed. Over time this
cache can grow quite large. Cleaning out the cache allows you to reclaim
space on your computer’s hard drive for storing your documents, music,
photographs, or other files.
   To clear the cache, you can either use the clean, or the autoclean option
for the command-line program apt-get.                                           The clean command will remove every
   To run clean, open Terminal and enter:                                       single cached item, while the autoclean
                                                                                command only removes cached items that can
   $ sudo apt-get clean                                                         no longer be downloaded (these items are
                                                                                often unnecessary).
     .


   Packages can also become unused over time. If a package was installed to
assist with running another program—and that program was subsequently
removed you no longer need the supporting package. You can remove it
with apt-get autoremove.
   Load Terminal and enter:
   $ sudo apt-get autoremove


I can’t play certain audio or video files

Many of the formats used to deliver rich media content are proprietary,
meaning they are not free to use, modify, or distribute with an open-source
operating system like Ubuntu. erefore, Ubuntu does not include the ca-
pability to use these formats by default; however, users can easily configure
Ubuntu to use these proprietary formats. For more information about the
differences between open source and proprietary soware, see Chapter :
Learning More.
   If you find yourself in need of a proprietary format, you may install
the files necessary for using this format from the Ubuntu Soware Center.
Ensure that you have Universe and Multiverse repositories enabled before
continuing. See the Soware Sources section to learn how to do this. When
you are ready to continue, install the necessary soware as follows:
. Open the Ubuntu Soware Center by searching for it from the Dash (the
   top-most buon on the Launcher).
. Search for ubuntu-restricted-extras by typing “Ubuntu restricted
   extras” in the search box on the right-hand side of the Ubuntu Soware
   Center main window. When the Soware Center finds the appropriate
   soware, click the arrow next to its title.
. Click Install, then wait while Ubuntu installs the soware.
    One program that can play many of these formats is VLC media player.
It can be installed from the Ubuntu Soware Center. Once Ubuntu has
successfully installed this soware, your rich media content should work
properly.

How can I change my screen resolution?

e image on every monitor is composed of millions of lile colored dots
called pixels. Changing the number of pixels displayed on your monitor is
called “changing the resolution.” Increasing the resolution will make the
displayed images sharper, but will also tend to make them smaller. e
opposite is true when screen resolution is decreased. Most monitors have
a “native resolution,” which is a resolution that most closely matches the
number of pixels in the monitor. Your display will usually be sharpest when
your operating system uses a resolution that matches your display’s native
resolution.
   e Ubuntu configuration utility Displays allows users to change the
resolution. Open it by clicking on the session indicator and then on Dis-
plays…. e resolution can be changed using the drop-down list within
the program. Picking options higher up on the list (for example, those with
larger numbers) will increase the resolution.
   You can experiment with various resolutions by clicking Apply at the
boom of the window until you find one that is comfortable for you. Typ-
ically the highest resolution will be the native resolution. Selecting a res-
olution and clicking Apply will temporarily change the screen resolution
 


                                                                               Figure 6.2: You can change your display
                                                                               settings.




to the selected value and a dialog box will also be displayed. It allows you
to revert to the previous resolution seing or keep the new resolution. e
dialog box will disappear in  seconds, restoring the old resolution.

                                                                               Figure 6.3: You can revert back to your old
                                                                               settings if you need to.




   is feature was implemented to prevent someone from being locked
out of the computer by a resolution that distorts the monitor and makes it
unusable. When you have finished seing the screen resolution, click Close.

Ubuntu is not working properly on my Apple MacBook or MacBook Pro

When installed on notebook computers from Apple—such as the MacBook
or MacBook Pro—Ubuntu does not always enable all of the computer’s
built-in components, including the iSight camera and the Airport wireless
Internet adapter. Luckily, the Ubuntu community offers documentation
on fixing these and other problems. If you are having trouble installing or
using Ubuntu on your Apple notebook computer, please follow the instruc-
tions at https://help.ubuntu.com/community/MacBook. You can select the
appropriate guide aer identifying your computer’s model number. For
instructions on doing this, visit the web page above.

Ubuntu is not working properly on my Asus EeePC

When installed on netbook computers from Asus—such as the EeePC—
Ubuntu does not always enable all of the computer’s built-in components,
including the keyboard shortcut keys and the wireless Internet adapter.
e Ubuntu community offers documentation on enabling these com-
ponents and fixing other problems. If you are having trouble installing
or using Ubuntu on your Asus EeePC, please follow the instructions at
https://help.ubuntu.com/community/EeePC. is documentation page con-
tains information pertaining specifically to EeePC netbooks.
     .


   To enable many of the features and Function Keys, a quick fix is to add
“acpi_osi=Linux” to your grub configuration. From the Terminal
     $ gksudo gedit /etc/default/grub

and very carefully change the line
     GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT="quiet splash"

to
     GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT="quiet splash acpi_osi=Linux"

Save and close the file. en, from the terminal:
     sudo update-grub

Aer the command finishes, and you restart the computer, you will be able
to use the Fn keys normally.

My hardware is not working properly

Ubuntu occasionally has difficulties running on certain computers, gen-
erally when hardware manufacturers use non-standard or proprietary
components. e Ubuntu community offers documentation to help you
troubleshoot many common issues that may arise from this situation, in-
cluding problems with wireless cards, scanners, mouse and printers. You
can find the complete hardware troubleshooting guide on Ubuntu’s sup-
port wiki, accessible at https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HardwareSupport. If your
hardware problems persist, please see Geing more help for more trou-
bleshooting options or information on obtaining support or assistance from
an Ubuntu user.

Getting more help

is guide does not cover every possible workflow, task or issue in Ubuntu.
If you require assistance beyond the information in the manual, you can
find a variety of support opportunities online.
    More details about many support options available to you can be found
at Finding additional help and support later in this book.
7      Learning More
What else can I do with Ubuntu?

You should now be able to use Ubuntu for most of your daily activities
—such as browsing the web, sending email, and creating documents. But
you may be interested in learning about other versions of Ubuntu you
can integrate into your digital lifestyle. In this chapter, we’ll introduce
you to additional versions of Ubuntu specialized for certain tasks. We’ll
also provide you with resources for answering any remaining questions
you may have, and tell you how you can get involved in the worldwide
community of Ubuntu users. But first, we’ll discuss the technologies that
make Ubuntu a powerful collection of soware.

Open source software

Ubuntu is open source soware. Open source soware differs from pro-
prietary soware—soware whose source code is not freely available for
modification or distribution by anyone but the rightsholder. Microso          The source code of a program is the collection
Windows and Adobe Photoshop are examples of proprietary soware.              of files that have been written in a computer
                                                                              language to make the program.
    Unlike proprietary soware applications, the soware included with
                                                                              Proprietary software is software that cannot be
Ubuntu is specifically licensed to promote sharing and collaboration. e       copied, modified, or distributed freely.
legal rules governing Ubuntu’s production and distribution ensure that
anyone can obtain, run, or share it for any purpose she or he wishes.
Computer users can modify open source soware like Ubuntu to suit
their individual needs, to share it, to improve it, or to translate it into
other languages—provided they release the source code for these mod-
ifications so others can do the same. In fact, the terms of many open
source licensing agreements actually make it illegal not to do so. For
more information regarding Ubuntu’s soware licensing standards, see
http://www.ubuntu.com/project/about-ubuntu/licensing.
    Because open source soware is developed by large communities of
programmers distributed throughout the globe, it benefits from rapid de-
velopment cycles and speedy security releases (in the event that someone
discovers bugs in the soware). In other words, open source soware is
updated, enhanced, and made more secure every day as programmers all
over the world continue to improve it.
    Aside from these technical advantages, open source soware also has
economic benefits. While users must adhere to the terms of an open source
licensing agreement when installing and using Ubuntu, they needn’t pay
to obtain this license. And while not all open source soware is free of
monetary costs, much is.
    To learn more about open source soware, see the Open Source Initia-
tive’s open source definition, available at http://www.opensource.org/docs/
definition.php.

Distribution families

Ubuntu is one of several popular operating systems based on Linux (an
open source operating system). ese Linux-based operating systems—
     .


called Linux “distributions,”—may look different from Ubuntu at first glance,
but they share similar characteristics because of their common roots.           A distribution, or “distro,” is an operating
   Linux distributions can be divided into two broad families: the Debian       system made from open source applications,
                                                                                which are bundled together to make them
family and the Red Hat family. Each family is named for a distribution on       easier to install and use.
which subsequent distributions are based. For example, “Debian” refers
to both the name of a Linux distribution as well as the family of distribu-
tions derived from Debian. Ubuntu is part of this family. When describing
relationships between various open source projects, soware developers
oen use the metaphor of tributaries connecting to a common body of
water. For this reason, you may hear someone say that Ubuntu is located
“downstream” from Debian, because alterations to Debian flow into new
versions of Ubuntu. Additionally, improvements to Ubuntu usually trickle
“upstream”—back to Debian and its family members, which benefit from the
work of the Ubuntu community. Other distributions in the Debian family
include Linux Mint, Xandros, and CrunchBang Linux. Distributions in the
Red Hat family include Fedora, and Mandriva.
   e most significant difference between Debian-based and Red Hat-
based distributions is the system each uses for installing and updating
soware. ese systems are called “package management systems.” Debian           Package management systems are the means by
soware packages are  files, while Red Hat soware packages are            which users can install, remove, and organize
                                                                                software installed on computers with open
files. e two systems are generally incompatible. For more information           source operating systems like Ubuntu.
about package management, see Chapter : Soware Management.
   You will also find Linux distributions that have been specialized for
certain tasks. Next, we’ll describe these versions of Ubuntu and explain the
uses for which each has been developed.

Choosing amongst Ubuntu and its derivatives

Just as Ubuntu is based on Debian, several distributions are subsequently
based on Ubuntu. Each differs with respect to the soware included as part
of the distribution. Some are developed for general use, while others are
designed for accomplishing a more narrow set of tasks.

Alternative interfaces

Ubuntu features a graphical user interface () based on the open source
 desktop. As we explained in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop, a
“user interface” is a collection of soware elements—icons, colors, windows,
themes, and menus—that determines how someone may interact with a
computer. Some people prefer using alternatives to , so they have
created Ubuntu distributions featuring different user interfaces. ese
include:

‣ Kubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the
   environment found in Ubuntu;
‣ Lubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the
   environment found in Ubuntu; and
‣ Xubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the
   environment found in Ubuntu.

   Additionally, each of these distributions may contain default applications
different from those featured in Ubuntu. For instance, the default music
player in Ubuntu is Rhythmbox, but in Lubuntu the default music player
is Aqualung, and in Kubuntu the default is Amarok. Be sure to investigate
  


these differences if you are considering installing an Ubuntu distribution
with an alternative desktop environment.
   For more information about these and other derivative distributions, see
http://www.ubuntu.com/project/derivatives.

Task-specific distributions

Other Ubuntu distributions have been created to accomplish specific tasks
or run in specialized seings.

Ubuntu Server Edition

e Ubuntu Server Edition is an operating system optimized to perform
multi-user tasks when installed on servers. Such tasks include file shar-      A server is a computer that’s been configured to
ing and website or email hosting. If you are planning to use a computer       manage, or “serve,” files many people wish to
                                                                              access.
to perform tasks like these, you may wish to use this specialized server
distribution in conjunction with server hardware.
   is manual does not explain the process of running a secure web server
or performing other tasks possible with Ubuntu Server Edition. For details
on using Ubuntu Server Edition, refer to the manual at http://www.ubuntu.
com/business/server/overview.

Edubuntu

Edubuntu is an Ubuntu derivative customized for use in schools and other
educational institutions. It contains soware similar to that offered in
Ubuntu, but also features additional applications—like a collaborative text
editor and educational games.
   For additional information regarding Edubuntu, visit http://www.
edubuntu.org/

Ubuntu Studio

is derivative of Ubuntu is designed specifically for people who use com-
puters to create and edit multimedia projects. It features applications to
help users manipulate images, compose music, and edit video. While users
can install these applications on computers running the desktop version of
Ubuntu, Ubuntu Studio makes them all available immediately upon installa-
tion.
   If you would like to learn more about Ubuntu Studio (or obtain a copy
for yoursel), visit http://ubuntustudio.org/home.

Mythbuntu

Mythbuntu allows users to turn their computers into entertainment sys-
tems. It helps users organize and view various types of multimedia content
such as movies, television shows, and video podcasts. Users with  tuners
in their computers can also use Mythbuntu to record live video and televi-
sion shows.
   To learn more about Mythbuntu, visit http://www.mythbuntu.org/.

Finding additional help and support

is guide cannot possibly contain everything you’ll ever need to know
about Ubuntu. Because Geing Started with Ubuntu . could never an-
     .


swer all your questions, we encourage you to take advantage of Ubuntu’s
vast community when seeking further information, troubleshooting tech-
nical issues, or asking questions about your computer. Next, we’ll discuss a
few of these resources so you can learn more about Ubuntu or other Linux
distributions.

Live chat

If you are familiar with Internet relay chat (), you can use chat clients
such as XChat or Pidgin to join the channel #ubuntu on irc.freenode.net.
Here, hundreds of volunteer users can answer your questions or offer sup-
port in real time. To learn more about using Internet Relay Chat to seek
help with Ubuntu, visit https://help.ubuntu.com/community/InternetRelayChat.

LoCo teams

Within the Ubuntu community are dozens of local user groups called “LoCo
teams.” Spread throughout the world, these teams offer support and advice,
answer questions and promote Ubuntu in their communities by hosting
regular events. To locate and contact the LoCo team nearest you, visit
http://loco.ubuntu.com/.

Books and Magazines

Many books have been wrien about Ubuntu, and professional magazines
oen feature news and information related to Ubuntu. You will frequently
find these resources at your local bookstore or newsstand. However, many
of these print publications are also available as digital downloads for pur-
chase in the Ubuntu Soware Center. To find these, launch the Soware
Center, then click on “Books & Magazines” in the le panel.

Official Ubuntu Documentation

e Ubuntu Documentation team maintains a series of official wiki pages             In addition to official Ubuntu and community
designed to assist both new and experienced users wishing to learn more          help, you will often find third-party help avail-
                                                                                 able on the Internet. While these documents
about Ubuntu. e Ubuntu community endorses these documents, which                can often seem like great resources, some
serve as a reliable first point of reference for users seeking help online. You   could be misleading or outdated. It’s always
can access these at http://help.ubuntu.com. To get to the built-in Ubuntu        best to verify information from third-party
                                                                                 sources before taking their advice. When possi-
Desktop Guide, press F1 on your desktop, or type yelp in the Dash.               ble, rely on official Ubuntu documentation for
                                                                                 assistance with Ubuntu.

The Ubuntu Forums

e Ubuntu Forums are the official forums of the Ubuntu community. Mil-
lions of Ubuntu users use them daily to seek help and support from one
another. You can create an Ubuntu Forums account in minutes. To create
an account and learn more about Ubuntu from community members, visit
http://ubuntuforums.org.

Launchpad Answers

Launchpad, an open source code repository and user community, provides a
question and answer service that allows anyone to ask questions about any
Ubuntu-related topic. Signing up for a Launchpad account requires only
a few minutes. You can ask a question by visiting Launchpad at https://
answers.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+addquestion.
  


Ask Ubuntu

Ask Ubuntu is a free, community-driven website for Ubuntu users and
developers. Like the Ubuntu Forums, it allows users to post questions that
other members of the Ubuntu community can answer. But Ask Ubuntu also
allows visitors to “vote” on the answers users provide, so the most useful or
helpful responses get featured more prominently on the site. Ask ubuntu
is part of the Stack Exchange network of websites, and is one of the best
Ubuntu support resources available at no cost. Visit http://www.askubuntu.
com to get started.

Search Engines

Because Ubuntu is a popular open source operating system, many users
have wrien about it online. erefore, using search engines to locate
answers to your questions about Ubuntu is oen an effective means of
acquiring help. When using search engines to answer questions about
Ubuntu, ensure that your search queries are as specific as possible. In other
words, a search for “Unity interface” will return results that are less useful
than those associated with the query “how to use Ubuntu Unity interface”
or “how to customize Ubuntu Unity interface.”

Community support

If you’ve exhausted all these resources and still can’t find answers to your
questions, visit Community Support at http://www.ubuntu.com/support/
community.

The Ubuntu community

Surrounding Ubuntu is a global community of passionate users who want to
help others adopt, use, understand, and even modify or enhance Ubuntu. By
choosing to install and run Ubuntu, you’ve become part of this community.
As you learn more about Ubuntu, you may wish to collaborate with others
to make it beer—to discuss the future of Ubuntu, to report soware bugs
you discover, to promote Ubuntu to new users, to share Ubuntu advice,
or to answer other users’ questions. In this section, we’ll discuss a few
community projects that can connect you to other Ubuntu users.

Full Circle Magazine

Full Circle Magazine is “the independent magazine for the Ubuntu Linux
community.” Released every month, Full Circle Magazine contains reviews
of new soware (including games) for Ubuntu, step-by-step tutorials for
projects you can undertake with Ubuntu, editorials discussing important
issues in the Ubuntu community, and Ubuntu tips from other users. You can
download issues of Full Circle Magazine at http://fullcirclemagazine.org/.

The Ubuntu UK Podcast

Produced by members of the UK’s Ubuntu LoCo team, this bi-weekly online
audio broadcast (or “podcast”) features lively discussion about Ubuntu, and
oen includes interviews with Ubuntu community members who work to
improve Ubuntu. Episodes are available at http://podcast.ubuntu-uk.org/.         A podcast is a radio-style broadcast available as
                                                                                 an audio file for download to computers and
                                                                                 portable media players.
     .


OMG! Ubuntu!

OMG! Ubuntu! is a weblog that aims to inform the Ubuntu community
about Ubuntu news, events, announcements, and updates in a timely fash-
ion. It also allows Ubuntu users to discuss ways they can promote or share
Ubuntu. You can read this blog or subscribe to it at http://www.omgubuntu.
co.uk/.

Contributing

Contributing to Ubuntu

As we mentioned earlier in this chapter, Ubuntu is a community-maintained
operating system. You can help make Ubuntu beer in a number of ways.
e community consists of thousands of individuals and teams. If you
would like to contribute to Ubuntu, please visit https://wiki.ubuntu.com/
ContributeToUbuntu.
   You can also participate in the Ubuntu community by contributing to
this manual. You might choose to write new content for it, edit its chapters
so they are easier for new Ubuntu users to understand and use, or trans-
late it in your own language. You may also provide the screenshots found
throughout the manual. To get involved in the Ubuntu Manual Project, visit
http://ubuntu-manual.org/getinvolved.
A      License
Creative Commons Attribution–ShareAlike 3.0 Legal Code

  (  )       
    (“”  “”).   
   /   .    
          
 .
            ,  
          .   
        ,   
         
    .

. Definitions
 (a) “Adaptation” means a work based upon the Work, or upon the Work
     and other pre-existing works, such as a translation, adaptation,
     derivative work, arrangement of music or other alterations of a lit-
     erary or artistic work, or phonogram or performance and includes
     cinematographic adaptations or any other form in which the Work
     may be recast, transformed, or adapted including in any form recog-
     nizably derived from the original, except that a work that constitutes
     a Collection will not be considered an Adaptation for the purpose of
     this License. For the avoidance of doubt, where the Work is a musical
     work, performance or phonogram, the synchronization of the Work in
     timed-relation with a moving image (“synching”) will be considered
     an Adaptation for the purpose of this License.
 (b) “Collection” means a collection of literary or artistic works, such
     as encyclopedias and anthologies, or performances, phonograms
     or broadcasts, or other works or subject maer other than works
     listed in Section () below, which, by reason of the selection and
     arrangement of their contents, constitute intellectual creations, in
     which the Work is included in its entirety in unmodified form along
     with one or more other contributions, each constituting separate and
     independent works in themselves, which together are assembled into
     a collective whole. A work that constitutes a Collection will not be
     considered an Adaptation (as defined below) for the purposes of this
     License.
 (c) “Creative Commons Compatible License” means a license that is
     listed at http://creativecommons.org/compatiblelicenses that has been
     approved by Creative Commons as being essentially equivalent to this
     License, including, at a minimum, because that license: (i) contains
     terms that have the same purpose, meaning and effect as the License
     Elements of this License; and, (ii) explicitly permits the relicensing
     of adaptations of works made available under that license under this
     License or a Creative Commons jurisdiction license with the same
     License Elements as this License.
 (d) “Distribute” means to make available to the public the original and
     copies of the Work or Adaptation, as appropriate, through sale or
     other transfer of ownership.
     .


 (e) “License Elements” means the following high-level license aributes
      as selected by Licensor and indicated in the title of this License: Ari-
      bution, ShareAlike.
  () “Licensor” means the individual, individuals, entity or entities that
      offer(s) the Work under the terms of this License.
 (g) “Original Author” means, in the case of a literary or artistic work, the
      individual, individuals, entity or entities who created the Work or if
      no individual or entity can be identified, the publisher; and in addition
      (i) in the case of a performance the actors, singers, musicians, dancers,
      and other persons who act, sing, deliver, declaim, play in, interpret or
      otherwise perform literary or artistic works or expressions of folklore;
      (ii) in the case of a phonogram the producer being the person or legal
      entity who first fixes the sounds of a performance or other sounds;
      and, (iii) in the case of broadcasts, the organization that transmits the
      broadcast.
 (h) “Work” means the literary and/or artistic work offered under the
      terms of this License including without limitation any production
      in the literary, scientific and artistic domain, whatever may be the
      mode or form of its expression including digital form, such as a book,
      pamphlet and other writing; a lecture, address, sermon or other work
      of the same nature; a dramatic or dramatico-musical work; a choreo-
      graphic work or entertainment in dumb show; a musical composition
      with or without words; a cinematographic work to which are assim-
      ilated works expressed by a process analogous to cinematography;
      a work of drawing, painting, architecture, sculpture, engraving or
      lithography; a photographic work to which are assimilated works ex-
      pressed by a process analogous to photography; a work of applied art;
      an illustration, map, plan, sketch or three-dimensional work relative
      to geography, topography, architecture or science; a performance; a
      broadcast; a phonogram; a compilation of data to the extent it is pro-
      tected as a copyrightable work; or a work performed by a variety or
      circus performer to the extent it is not otherwise considered a literary
      or artistic work.
  (i) “You” means an individual or entity exercising rights under this Li-
      cense who has not previously violated the terms of this License with
      respect to the Work, or who has received express permission from
      the Licensor to exercise rights under this License despite a previous
      violation.
  (j) “Publicly Perform” means to perform public recitations of the Work
      and to communicate to the public those public recitations, by any
      means or process, including by wire or wireless means or public
      digital performances; to make available to the public Works in such a
      way that members of the public may access these Works from a place
      and at a place individually chosen by them; to perform the Work to
      the public by any means or process and the communication to the
      public of the performances of the Work, including by public digital
      performance; to broadcast and rebroadcast the Work by any means
      including signs, sounds or images.
 (k) “Reproduce” means to make copies of the Work by any means includ-
      ing without limitation by sound or visual recordings and the right
      of fixation and reproducing fixations of the Work, including storage
      of a protected performance or phonogram in digital form or other
      electronic medium.
 


. Fair Dealing Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit,
   or restrict any uses free from copyright or rights arising from limitations
   or exceptions that are provided for in connection with the copyright
   protection under copyright law or other applicable laws.
. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, Licen-
   sor hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpet-
   ual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise the
   rights in the Work as stated below:
 (a) to Reproduce the Work, to incorporate the Work into one or more
      Collections, and to Reproduce the Work as incorporated in the Collec-
      tions;
 (b) to create and Reproduce Adaptations provided that any such Adap-
      tation, including any translation in any medium, takes reasonable
      steps to clearly label, demarcate or otherwise identify that changes
      were made to the original Work. For example, a translation could be
      marked “e original work was translated from English to Spanish,”
      or a modification could indicate “e original work has been modi-
      fied.”;
 (c) to Distribute and Publicly Perform the Work including as incorpo-
      rated in Collections; and,
 (d) to Distribute and Publicly Perform Adaptations.
 (e) For the avoidance of doubt:
      i. Non-waivable Compulsory License Schemes. In those jurisdictions
         in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or
         compulsory licensing scheme cannot be waived, the Licensor re-
         serves the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise
         by You of the rights granted under this License;
     ii. Waivable Compulsory License Schemes. In those jurisdictions
         in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or
         compulsory licensing scheme can be waived, the Licensor waives
         the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You
         of the rights granted under this License; and,
    iii. Voluntary License Schemes. e Licensor waives the right to col-
         lect royalties, whether individually or, in the event that the Licen-
         sor is a member of a collecting society that administers voluntary
         licensing schemes, via that society, from any exercise by You of the
         rights granted under this License.
      e above rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether
      now known or hereaer devised. e above rights include the right to
      make such modifications as are technically necessary to exercise the
      rights in other media and formats. Subject to Section (), all rights
      not expressly granted by Licensor are hereby reserved.
. Restrictions. e license granted in Section  above is expressly made
   subject to and limited by the following restrictions:
  (a) You may Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work only under the
      terms of this License. You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Re-
      source Identifier (URI) for, this License with every copy of the Work
      You Distribute or Publicly Perform. You may not offer or impose any
      terms on the Work that restrict the terms of this License or the abil-
      ity of the recipient of the Work to exercise the rights granted to that
      recipient under the terms of the License. You may not sublicense the
      Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and
      to the disclaimer of warranties with every copy of the Work You Dis-
     .


     tribute or Publicly Perform. When You Distribute or Publicly Perform
     the Work, You may not impose any effective technological measures
     on the Work that restrict the ability of a recipient of the Work from
     You to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under the terms
     of the License. is Section (a) applies to the Work as incorporated
     in a Collection, but this does not require the Collection apart from
     the Work itself to be made subject to the terms of this License. If You
     create a Collection, upon notice from any Licensor You must, to the
     extent practicable, remove from the Collection any credit as required
     by Section (c), as requested. If You create an Adaptation, upon notice
     from any Licensor You must, to the extent practicable, remove from
     the Adaptation any credit as required by Section (c), as requested.
 (b) You may Distribute or Publicly Perform an Adaptation only under the
     terms of: (i) this License; (ii) a later version of this License with the
     same License Elements as this License; (iii) a Creative Commons juris-
     diction license (either this or a later license version) that contains the
     same License Elements as this License (e.g., Aribution-ShareAlike
     . US)); (iv) a Creative Commons Compatible License. If you license
     the Adaptation under one of the licenses mentioned in (iv), you must
     comply with the terms of that license. If you license the Adaptation
     under the terms of any of the licenses mentioned in (i), (ii) or (iii) (the
     “Applicable License”), you must comply with the terms of the Ap-
     plicable License generally and the following provisions: (I) You must
     include a copy of, or the URI for, the Applicable License with every
     copy of each Adaptation You Distribute or Publicly Perform; (II) You
     may not offer or impose any terms on the Adaptation that restrict
     the terms of the Applicable License or the ability of the recipient of
     the Adaptation to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under
     the terms of the Applicable License; (III) You must keep intact all
     notices that refer to the Applicable License and to the disclaimer of
     warranties with every copy of the Work as included in the Adapta-
     tion You Distribute or Publicly Perform; (IV) when You Distribute or
     Publicly Perform the Adaptation, You may not impose any effective
     technological measures on the Adaptation that restrict the ability of a
     recipient of the Adaptation from You to exercise the rights granted to
     that recipient under the terms of the Applicable License. is Section
     (b) applies to the Adaptation as incorporated in a Collection, but this
     does not require the Collection apart from the Adaptation itself to be
     made subject to the terms of the Applicable License.
 (c) If You Distribute, or Publicly Perform the Work or any Adaptations
     or Collections, You must, unless a request has been made pursuant
     to Section (a), keep intact all copyright notices for the Work and
     provide, reasonable to the medium or means You are utilizing: (i) the
     name of the Original Author (or pseudonym, if applicable) if supplied,
     and/or if the Original Author and/or Licensor designate another party
     or parties (e.g., a sponsor institute, publishing entity, journal) for ari-
     bution (“Aribution Parties”) in Licensor’s copyright notice, terms of
     service or by other reasonable means, the name of such party or par-
     ties; (ii) the title of the Work if supplied; (iii) to the extent reasonably
     practicable, the URI, if any, that Licensor specifies to be associated
     with the Work, unless such URI does not refer to the copyright no-
     tice or licensing information for the Work; and (iv) , consistent with
     Ssection (b), in the case of an Adaptation, a credit identifying the
     use of the Work in the Adaptation (e.g., “French translation of the
 


     Work by Original Author,” or “Screenplay based on original Work
     by Original Author”). e credit required by this Section (c) may be
     implemented in any reasonable manner; provided, however, that in
     the case of a Adaptation or Collection, at a minimum such credit will
     appear, if a credit for all contributing authors of the Adaptation or
     Collection appears, then as part of these credits and in a manner at
     least as prominent as the credits for the other contributing authors.
     For the avoidance of doubt, You may only use the credit required by
     this Section for the purpose of aribution in the manner set out above
     and, by exercising Your rights under this License, You may not im-
     plicitly or explicitly assert or imply any connection with, sponsorship
     or endorsement by the Original Author, Licensor and/or Aribution
     Parties, as appropriate, of You or Your use of the Work, without the
     separate, express prior wrien permission of the Original Author,
     Licensor and/or Aribution Parties.
 (d) Except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Licensor or as may be
     otherwise permied by applicable law, if You Reproduce, Distribute
     or Publicly Perform the Work either by itself or as part of any Adap-
     tations or Collections, You must not distort, mutilate, modify or take
     other derogatory action in relation to the Work which would be prej-
     udicial to the Original Author’s honor or reputation. Licensor agrees
     that in those jurisdictions (e.g. Japan), in which any exercise of the
     right granted in Section (b) of this License (the right to make Adap-
     tations) would be deemed to be a distortion, mutilation, modification
     or other derogatory action prejudicial to the Original Author’s honor
     and reputation, the Licensor will waive or not assert, as appropriate,
     this Section, to the fullest extent permied by the applicable national
     law, to enable You to reasonably exercise Your right under Section
     (b) of this License (right to make Adaptations) but not otherwise.
. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer
            ,
            
         , , ,
     , ,  , 
     , ,     ,
   ,        , 
   ,       ,   
   .        
    ,        .
. Limitation on Liability.       
    ,            
      , , ,  
              
   ,           
   .
. Termination
 (a) is License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automat-
     ically upon any breach by You of the terms of this License. Individuals
     or entities who have received Adaptations or Collections from You
     under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated
     provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with
     those licenses. Sections , , , , , and  will survive any termination
     of this License.
     .


 (b) Subject to the above terms and conditions, the license granted here is
     perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work).
     Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the right to release
     the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the
     Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not
     serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or
     is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this
     License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as
     stated above.
. Miscellaneous
 (a) Each time You Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work or a Collec-
     tion, the Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Work on the
     same terms and conditions as the license granted to You under this
     License.
 (b) Each time You Distribute or Publicly Perform an Adaptation, Licensor
     offers to the recipient a license to the original Work on the same
     terms and conditions as the license granted to You under this License.
 (c) If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under
     applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the
     remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action
     by the parties to this agreement, such provision shall be reformed
     to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
     enforceable.
 (d) No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no
     breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing
     and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
 (e) is License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties
     with respect to the Work licensed here. ere are no understandings,
     agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified
     here. Licensor shall not be bound by any additional provisions that
     may appear in any communication from You. is License may not be
     modified without the mutual wrien agreement of the Licensor and
     You.
 () e rights granted under, and the subject maer referenced, in this
     License were draed utilizing the terminology of the Berne Conven-
     tion for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works (as amended on
     September , ), the Rome Convention of , the WIPO Copy-
     right Treaty of , the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty
     of  and the Universal Copyright Convention (as revised on July
     , ). ese rights and subject maer take effect in the relevant
     jurisdiction in which the License terms are sought to be enforced
     according to the corresponding provisions of the implementation of
     those treaty provisions in the applicable national law. If the standard
     suite of rights granted under applicable copyright law includes addi-
     tional rights not granted under this License, such additional rights are
     deemed to be included in the License; this License is not intended to
     restrict the license of any rights under applicable law.

Creative Commons Notice

Creative Commons is not a party to this License, and makes no warranty
whatsoever in connection with the Work. Creative Commons will not be
liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever,
 


including without limitation any general, special, incidental or consequen-
tial damages arising in connection to this license. Notwithstanding the
foregoing two () sentences, if Creative Commons has expressly identified
itself as the Licensor hereunder, it shall have all rights and obligations of
Licensor.
    Except for the limited purpose of indicating to the public that the Work
is licensed under the CCPL, Creative Commons does not authorize the use
by either party of the trademark “Creative Commons” or any related trade-
mark or logo of Creative Commons without the prior wrien consent of
Creative Commons. Any permied use will be in compliance with Creative
Commons’ then-current trademark usage guidelines, as may be published
on its website or otherwise made available upon request from time to time.
For the avoidance of doubt, this trademark restriction does not form part of
the License.
    Creative Commons may be contacted at http://creativecommons.org/.
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Glossary
Canonical Canonical, the financial backer of Ubuntu, provides support for
   the core Ubuntu system. It has over  paid staff members worldwide
   who ensure that the foundation of the operating system is stable, as well
   as checking all the work submied by volunteer contributors. To learn
   more about Canonical, go to http://www.canonical.com.
  or command-line interface is another name for the terminal.
cursor e (usually) blinking square or vertical line used to show you
   where text will appear when you start typing. You can move it around
   with the arrow keys on your keyboard prompt in a terminal or other
   text-input application.

desktop environment A generic term to describe a  interface for humans
   to interact with computers. ere are many desktop environments such
   as , ,  and  just to name a few.
  stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, it is used by a
    server to assign computers on a network an  address automati-
   cally.
dialup connection A dialup connection is when your computer uses a mo-
   dem to connect to an  through your telephone line.
distribution A distribution is a collection of soware that is already com-
   piled and configured ready to be installed. Ubuntu is an example of a
   distribution.
dual-booting dual-booting is the process of being able to choose one of two
   different operating systems currently installed on a computer from the
   boot menu. Once selected your computer will then boot into whichever
   operating system you chose at the boot menu. Dual booting is oen used
   generically, and may refer to booting among more than two operating
   systems.

encryption Encryption is a security measure, it prevents others from access-
   ing and viewing the contents of your files and/or hard drives, the files
   must first be decrypted with your password.
Ethernet port An Ethernet port is what an Ethernet cable is plugged into
   when you are using a wired connection.

  (which once stood for  Network Object Model Environ-
  ment) is the default desktop environment used in Ubuntu.
 e  (which stands for Graphical User Interface) is a type of user in-
  terface that allows humans to interact with the computer using graphics
  and images rather than just text.

  stands for Internet Service Provider, an  is a company that provides
   you with your Internet connection.

kernel A kernel is the central portion of a Unix-based operating system,
   responsible for running applications, processes, and providing security
   for the core components.
     .


maximize When you maximize an application in Ubuntu it will fill the
  whole desktop, excluding the panels.
minimize When you minimize an open application, the window will no
  longer be shown. If you click on a minimized application’s panel buon,
  it will then be restored to its normal state and allow you to interact with
  it.

output e output of a command is any text it displays on the next line
   aer typing a command and pressing enter, e.g., if you type pwd into a
   terminal and press Enter, the directory name it displays on the next line
   is the output.

package Packages contain soware in a ready-to-install format. Most of
   the time you can use the Soware Center instead of manually installing
   packages. Packages have a .deb extension in Ubuntu.
parameter Parameters are special options that you can use with other
   commands in the terminal to make that command behave differently, this
   can make a lot of commands far more useful.
partition A partition is an area of allocated space on a hard drive where
   you can put data.
partitioning partitioning is the process of creating a partition.
prompt e prompt displays some useful information about your computer,
   it can be customized to display in different colors as well as being able to
   display the time, date and current directory as well as almost anything
   else you like.
proprietary Soware made by companies that don’t release their source
   code under an open source license.

router A router is a specially designed computer that using its soware and
   hardware, routes information from the Internet to a network. It is also
   sometimes called a gateway.

server A server is a computer that runs a specialized operating system and
   provides services to computers that connect to it and make a request.
shell e terminal gives access to the shell, when you type a command into
   the terminal and press enter the shell takes that command and performs
   the relevant action.
Soware Center e Soware Center is where you can easily manage so-
   ware installation and removal as well as the ability to manage soware
   installed via Personal Package Archives.

terminal e terminal is Ubuntu’s text-based interface, it is a method of
   controlling the operating system using only commands entered via the
   keyboard, the other method if using your Ubuntu computer is to use a
    such as Unity.

USB Universal Serial Bus is a standard interface specification for connect-
  ing peripheral hardware devices to computers. USB devices range from
  external hard drives to scanners and printers.

wired connection A wired connection is when your computer is physically
   connected to a router or Ethernet port with a cable, this is the most
   method of connecting to the Internet and local network for desktop
   computers.
   


wireless connection A network connection that uses a wireless signal to
   communicate with either a router, access point, or computer.
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Credits
is manual wouldn’t have been possible without the efforts and contribu-
tions from the following people:

Team leads

Kevin Godby—Lead TEXnician
John Xygonakis—Authors Coordinator  Translation Maintainer
Hannie Dumoleyn—Editors Coordinator  Translation Maintainer
orsten Wilms—Design
Adnane Belmadiaf—Web development

Authors

Herat Gandhi Amrish                   Sayantan Das                              Brian Peredo
Bryan Behrenshausen                   Che Dean                                  Joel Picke
Senthil Velan Bhooplan                Patrick Dickey                            Kev irk
Mario Burgos                          Hannie Dumoleyn                           Tom Swartz
Jim Conne                            Andrew Montag


Editors

Mario Burgos                          Sco Gwin                                 Chris Woollard
Jim Conne                            Paddy Landau
Hannie Dumoleyn                       Vibhav Pant


Designers

orsten Wilms


Developers

Adnane Belmadiaf                      Kevin Godby


Translation editors

Fran Diéguez (Galician)               Xuacu Saturio (Asturian)                  Chris Woollard (British English)
Hannie Dumoleyn (Dutch)               Daniel Schury (German)                    John Xygonakis (Greek)
Shazedur Rahim Joardar (Bengali)      Shrinivasan (Tamil)


Past contributors

Benjamin Humphrey (Project Founder)                        Mez Pahlan (Author)
Jim Conne (Author)                                        Kartik Sulakhe (Author)
Will Kromer (Author)                                       David Wales (Author)
Simon Lewis (Author)                                       Rick Fosburgh (Editor-in-Chie)
Ryan Macnish (Author)
Getting started with ubuntu 12.04
Index
-bit versus -bit, –        s and s, see s and s   home folder, 

accessibility,                  EeePC                             , 
  screen reader,                  troubleshooting,            installing Ubuntu in Windows, –
Apple, see MacBook                email, see underbird            instant messaging, see Empathy
applications                      Empathy, –                   Internet
  adding and removing,            chaing, –                    browsing, –
  presentation, see LibreOffice       desktop sharing,                connecting, –
  running,                        setup,                          wireless, 
  searching,                      video chat,                  Internet radio, 
  spreadsheet, see LibreOffice      encryption, see security
  word processor, see LibreOffice                                    kernel, 
audio, see sound and music        Facebook, see Gwibber
audio, playing, see Rhythmbox     file system structure, –
                                                                   Launcher, 
                                  files
                                                                      running applications, 
Bluetooth,                         browsing, 
                                                                   LibreOffice, 
booting                              Nautilus
                                                                   Linux, –
  troubleshooting,                   opening files, 
                                                                   Linux distributions, –
                                     recovering, 
                                                                   Live , see Ubuntu Live 
camera, importing photos,          sync, see Ubuntu One
                                                                   locking the screen, 
Canonical,                       files and folders
                                                                   logging out, 
s and s                         copying, 
                                                                   login options, 
   blanking,                       creating, 
   burning, –                    displaying hidden, 
                                                                   Mac  , see MacBook
   codecs,                         moving, 
                                                                   MacBook
   copying,                        searching, 
                                                                     troubleshooting, 
   playing, ,                 Firefox, –
                                                                   microblogging, see Gwibber
   ripping,                     Firewall
                                                                   monitor, see display
cloud storage, see Ubuntu One        using, 
                                                                   mounting devices, 
codecs                            firewall
                                                                   Movie Player, 
   audio,                          installing, 
                                                                   music, see Rhythmbox
   video,                       FireWire, see  
                                                                     downloading, 
command line, see terminal
                                  groups, see also users
Dash,                             adding,                     Nautilus, 
Debian, , see also Linux           deleting,                     multiple tabs, 
desktop                             files and folders,             multiple windows, 
   background,                    managing,                     navigating, 
   customization,                 modifying,                    window, 
      appearance,               Gwibber, –                   NetworkManager, 
      background, 
      theme,                    hardware                         open-source soware, 
   places,                        troubleshooting, 
   sharing online,              help                             password, see security
   top bar,                       Ask Ubuntu,                 photos, see also Shotwell
disk, see s and s              documentation,                editing, 
display                             forums,                       importing, 
   adding secondary, –          Full Circle Magazine,         viewing, 
   changing resolution,           general help,                podcasts, 
   troubleshooting,              heads-up display (),      presentation application, 
downloading Ubuntu,                Launchpad Answers,          printer, 
drivers, –                      live chat,                    add via , 
dual-booting,                     online,                        adding via network, 
     .


rebooting,                        spreadsheet,                 Ubuntu Promise, 
Rhythmbox, –                    video players,               Ubuntu Soware Center, 
  Internet radio,                 web browser,                 Unity, 
  playing music,                  word processor,              Unix, , 
  podcasts,                    Soware Center,                 unmounting devices, 
                                 sound                             updates
scanner,                          input,                         about, 
   troubleshooting,               output,                        automatic, 
screen, see display                 recording,                     release updates, –
security                            troubleshooting,            , 
   encryption,                   volume,                      users, see also groups
   introduction,              sound effects,                     adding, 
   passwords,                 spreadsheet,                      creating during installation, –
   permissions,               start up, see boot                  deleting, 
   reseing passwords,        suspending the computer,          managing, 
   screen locking,            system requirements,               modifying, 
   system updates, 
Shotwell, –                  terminal, –
                                                                   video
shuing down,                  underbird, –
                                                                     troubleshooting, 
Shuleworth, Mark,                 setup, 
                                                                   video chat, 
slide show, see LibreOffice        torrent
                                                                   videos
soware                             Ubuntu image, 
                                                                     codecs, 
   adding repository, –    Twier, see Gwibber
                                                                     playing, 
   email, 
                                                                   volume, see sound
   finding applications, –    Ubuntu
   installation history,         alternate interfaces, –
   installing,                   bootable  drive,           webcam, 
   managing,                     definition of,                  Wi-Fi, 
   manual installation,         derivatives,                 windows, 
   movie players,                downloading,                     closing, 
   multimedia players,           Edubuntu,                      force on top, 
   music players,                history of,                      minimizing, 
   office suites,                  installing, –                 moving, 
   podcast readers,              Mythbuntu,                     moving between, 
   presentation,                 philosophy of,                   resizing, 
   recommendations, –          Server Edition,                restoring, 
   removing, –                 Ubuntu Studio,                 switching, 
   repositories,               Ubuntu Live , –             word processor, 
   servers, –              Ubuntu One, –                 workspaces, 


is book was typeset with XƎLTEX.
                            A


e book design is based on the Tue-LTEX document classes available at http://code.google.com/p/tufte-latex/.
                                    A


e text face is Linux Libertine, designed by Philipp H. Poll. It is an open font available at http://linuxlibertine.sf.net/.

e captions and margin notes are set in Ubuntu, a font commissioned by Canonical and designed by Dalton Maag. It is freely
available for download at http://font.ubuntu.com/.

e terminal text and keystrokes are set in DejaVu Sans Mono (available at http://dejavu-fonts.org/), originally developed by
Bitstream, Inc. as Bitstream Vera.

e screenshots were captured using ickshot, available at http://ubuntu-manual.org/quickshot.

e cover and title page pictograms contain shapes taken from the Humanity icon set, available at https://launchpad.net/humanity.

e title page and cover were designed using Inkscape, available at http://inkscape.org/.
Ad

More Related Content

What's hot (16)

Ubuntu Server - A Quick and Comprehensive Overview
Ubuntu Server - A Quick and Comprehensive OverviewUbuntu Server - A Quick and Comprehensive Overview
Ubuntu Server - A Quick and Comprehensive Overview
evolutionaryit
 
Ubuntu OS and it's Flavours
Ubuntu OS and it's FlavoursUbuntu OS and it's Flavours
Ubuntu OS and it's Flavours
Tushar B Kute
 
Edubuntu Sfd08
Edubuntu Sfd08Edubuntu Sfd08
Edubuntu Sfd08
Lawrence "Lawrz" Libo-on
 
Iniciación a linux
Iniciación a linuxIniciación a linux
Iniciación a linux
fernando valenzuela hernández
 
S.zacchiroli 20121205-fossa
S.zacchiroli 20121205-fossaS.zacchiroli 20121205-fossa
S.zacchiroli 20121205-fossa
here_and_there
 
Ubuntu - The History
Ubuntu - The HistoryUbuntu - The History
Ubuntu - The History
pramoddps
 
introduction to ubuntu
introduction to ubuntuintroduction to ubuntu
introduction to ubuntu
asifnawaz144wb
 
The linux-guide
The linux-guideThe linux-guide
The linux-guide
MohanKumar Palanichamy
 
Introduction to Linux_by_Amit & Jiban
Introduction to Linux_by_Amit & Jiban Introduction to Linux_by_Amit & Jiban
Introduction to Linux_by_Amit & Jiban
Amit Nath
 
U
UU
U
WILKSS
 
Be Free Be Linux
Be Free Be LinuxBe Free Be Linux
Be Free Be Linux
aboelnour
 
Derivative of Ubuntu
Derivative of UbuntuDerivative of Ubuntu
Derivative of Ubuntu
guestbcc6c9
 
LinUx KDE guide
LinUx KDE guide LinUx KDE guide
LinUx KDE guide
ruwaghmare
 
Linux opearting system ppt
Linux opearting system pptLinux opearting system ppt
Linux opearting system ppt
OECLIB Odisha Electronics Control Library
 
Introduction To Fedora
Introduction To FedoraIntroduction To Fedora
Introduction To Fedora
Arindam Ghosh
 
Preparando tu computadora para Linux
Preparando tu computadora para LinuxPreparando tu computadora para Linux
Preparando tu computadora para Linux
vitonelps
 

Similar to Getting started with ubuntu 12.04 (20)

Iniciando conubuntu1004 en
Iniciando conubuntu1004 enIniciando conubuntu1004 en
Iniciando conubuntu1004 en
Jose Manuel Acosta
 
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
fmbalvarez
 
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual TeamGetting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
desirhaterd
 
Getting started with ubuntu
Getting started with ubuntuGetting started with ubuntu
Getting started with ubuntu
Thưởng Cao Xuân
 
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.0408.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
El Alex Andrade
 
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Ali Kemal TÜTÜNCÜ
 
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
CristianBarna1
 
Ubuntu Handbook
Ubuntu HandbookUbuntu Handbook
Ubuntu Handbook
Fahad Shaikh
 
Coacpxp
CoacpxpCoacpxp
Coacpxp
butchbrooklyn
 
Folleto ubuntu
Folleto ubuntuFolleto ubuntu
Folleto ubuntu
Pablo rodriguez gonzalez
 
Oo Welcome
Oo WelcomeOo Welcome
Oo Welcome
raymondhu
 
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of FeistyUbuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Priyank Kapadia
 
Ubuntu Community
Ubuntu CommunityUbuntu Community
Ubuntu Community
guest00eb5743
 
Ubuntu 10
Ubuntu 10Ubuntu 10
Ubuntu 10
deepak171991
 
A Newbie’s Initiation To Linux
A Newbie’s Initiation To LinuxA Newbie’s Initiation To Linux
A Newbie’s Initiation To Linux
Fat-Thing Gabriel-Culley
 
1 the linux-guide
1 the linux-guide1 the linux-guide
1 the linux-guide
Minh Nhựt Hoàng Nam
 
Day1 ubuntu boot camp
Day1   ubuntu boot campDay1   ubuntu boot camp
Day1 ubuntu boot camp
Darlene Parker
 
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick MeerkatLinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
Anurag Upadhaya
 
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release PartyUbuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Danial Behzadi
 
Linux Overload
Linux OverloadLinux Overload
Linux Overload
Allan Caeg
 
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
Getting Started with Ubuntu 10.04
fmbalvarez
 
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual TeamGetting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
Getting Started with Ubuntu 12 10 1st Edition The Ubuntu Manual Team
desirhaterd
 
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.0408.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
08.03.2015-Getting started with ubuntu 14.04
El Alex Andrade
 
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
Getting started with ubuntu 16.04
CristianBarna1
 
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of FeistyUbuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Ubuntu, Canonical and the release of Feisty
Priyank Kapadia
 
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick MeerkatLinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
LinuxIdentity magazine - Ubuntu 10.10 Maverick Meerkat
Anurag Upadhaya
 
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release PartyUbuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Ubuntu 12.04 Persian Release Party
Danial Behzadi
 
Linux Overload
Linux OverloadLinux Overload
Linux Overload
Allan Caeg
 
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
contactwilliamm2546
 
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjectsGeography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
ProfDrShaikhImran
 
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem KayaPresentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
MIPLM
 
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POSHow to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
Celine George
 
Biophysics Chapter 3 Methods of Studying Macromolecules.pdf
Biophysics Chapter 3 Methods of Studying Macromolecules.pdfBiophysics Chapter 3 Methods of Studying Macromolecules.pdf
Biophysics Chapter 3 Methods of Studying Macromolecules.pdf
PKLI-Institute of Nursing and Allied Health Sciences Lahore , Pakistan.
 
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar RabbiPresentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Md Shaifullar Rabbi
 
SPRING FESTIVITIES - UK AND USA -
SPRING FESTIVITIES - UK AND USA            -SPRING FESTIVITIES - UK AND USA            -
SPRING FESTIVITIES - UK AND USA -
Colégio Santa Teresinha
 
K12 Tableau Tuesday - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
K12 Tableau Tuesday  - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public SchoolsK12 Tableau Tuesday  - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
K12 Tableau Tuesday - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
dogden2
 
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak Southwest US 4-30-2025.pptx
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak  Southwest US 4-30-2025.pptxYSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak  Southwest US 4-30-2025.pptx
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak Southwest US 4-30-2025.pptx
Yale School of Public Health - The Virtual Medical Operations Center (VMOC)
 
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Mebane Rash
 
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Library Association of Ireland
 
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACYUNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
DR.PRISCILLA MARY J
 
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative JourneyMetamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Arshad Shaikh
 
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odooHow to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
Celine George
 
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_NameSinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
keshanf79
 
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo SlidesOdoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Celine George
 
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak Southwest US 5-3-2025.pptx
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak  Southwest US 5-3-2025.pptxYSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak  Southwest US 5-3-2025.pptx
YSPH VMOC Special Report - Measles Outbreak Southwest US 5-3-2025.pptx
Yale School of Public Health - The Virtual Medical Operations Center (VMOC)
 
2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
2541William_McCollough_DigitalDetox.docx
contactwilliamm2546
 
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjectsGeography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
Geography Sem II Unit 1C Correlation of Geography with other school subjects
ProfDrShaikhImran
 
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Phoenix – A Collaborative Renewal of Children’s and Young People’s Services C...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem KayaPresentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
Presentation of the MIPLM subject matter expert Erdem Kaya
MIPLM
 
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POSHow to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
How to Manage Opening & Closing Controls in Odoo 17 POS
Celine George
 
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar RabbiPresentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Presentation on Tourism Product Development By Md Shaifullar Rabbi
Md Shaifullar Rabbi
 
K12 Tableau Tuesday - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
K12 Tableau Tuesday  - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public SchoolsK12 Tableau Tuesday  - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
K12 Tableau Tuesday - Algebra Equity and Access in Atlanta Public Schools
dogden2
 
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Stein, Hunt, Green letter to Congress April 2025
Mebane Rash
 
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Marie Boran Special Collections Librarian Hardiman Library, University of Gal...
Library Association of Ireland
 
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACYUNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
UNIT 3 NATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMMEE. SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE PHARMACY
DR.PRISCILLA MARY J
 
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative JourneyMetamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Metamorphosis: Life's Transformative Journey
Arshad Shaikh
 
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odooHow to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
How to Set warnings for invoicing specific customers in odoo
Celine George
 
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Michelle Rumley & Mairéad Mooney, Boole Library, University College Cork. Tra...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Niamh Lucey, Mary Dunne. Health Sciences Libraries Group (LAI). Lighting the ...
Library Association of Ireland
 
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_NameSinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
Sinhala_Male_Names.pdf Sinhala_Male_Name
keshanf79
 
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo SlidesOdoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Odoo Inventory Rules and Routes v17 - Odoo Slides
Celine George
 
Ad

Getting started with ubuntu 12.04

  • 3. Copyright © – by e Ubuntu Manual Team. Some rights reserved. cb a is work is licensed under the Creative Commons Aribution–Share Alike . License. To view a copy of this license, see Appendix A, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/./, or send a leer to Creative Commons,  Second Street, Suite , San Francisco, California, , USA. Geing Started with Ubuntu . can be purchased from http://ubuntu-manual. org/buy/gswu/en_US. A printed copy of this book can be ordered for the price of printing and delivery. An electronic copy of this book can be downloaded for free. We permit and even encourage you to distribute a copy of this book to colleagues, friends, family, and anyone else who might be interested. http://ubuntu-manual.org Revision number:  Revision date: -- :: +
  • 5. Contents Prologue  Welcome  Ubuntu Philosophy  A brief history of Ubuntu  Is Ubuntu right for you?  Contact details  About the team  Conventions used in this book   Installation  Geing Ubuntu  Trying out Ubuntu  Installing Ubuntu—Geing started  Finishing Installation  Ubuntu installer for Windows   e Ubuntu Desktop  Understanding the Ubuntu desktop  Unity  Using Launcher  e Dash  Workspaces  Managing windows  Browsing files on your computer  Nautilus file manager  Searching for files and folders on your computer  Customizing your desktop  Accessibility  Session options  Geing help   Working with Ubuntu  All the applications you need  Geing online  Browsing the web  Reading and composing email  Using instant messaging  Microblogging  Viewing and editing photos  Watching videos and movies  Listening to audio and music  Burning CDs and DVDs  Working with documents, spreadsheets, and presentations  Ubuntu One   Hardware  Using your devices  Hardware identification 
  • 6.     . Displays  Connecting and using your printer  Sound  Using a webcam  Scanning text and images  Other devices   Soware Management  Soware management in Ubuntu  Using the Ubuntu Soware Center  Managing additional soware  Manual soware installation  Updates and upgrades  Ubuntu for advanced users  Introduction to the terminal  Ubuntu file system structure  Securing Ubuntu  Why Ubuntu is safe  Basic security concepts  Users and groups  System updates  Firewall  Encryption   Troubleshooting  Resolving problems  Troubleshooting guide  Geing more help   Learning More  What else can I do with Ubuntu?  Open source soware  Distribution families  Choosing amongst Ubuntu and its derivatives  Finding additional help and support  e Ubuntu community  Contributing  A License  Creative Commons Aribution–ShareAlike . Legal Code  Creative Commons Notice  Glossary  Credits  Index 
  • 7. Prologue Welcome Welcome to Geing Started with Ubuntu, an introductory guide wrien to help new users get started with Ubuntu. Our goal is to cover the basics of Ubuntu (such as installation and work- ing with the desktop) as well as hardware and soware management, work- ing with the command line, and security. We designed this guide to be simple to follow, with step-by-step instructions and plenty of screenshots, allowing you to discover the potential of your new Ubuntu system. Please bear in mind that this guide is still very much a work in progress and always will be. It is wrien specifically for Ubuntu . , and LTS is an abbreviation for “Long Term Support.” although we have aimed to not limit our instructions to this version, A new LTS version is released every 2 years. Starting with Ubuntu 12.04 LTS, both the it is unavoidable that some things will change over the life of Ubuntu. Desktop version and the Server version will Whenever a new version of Ubuntu is released, we will incorporate up- have five years support, meaning you get free dates and changes into our guide, and make a new version available at security updates for at least five years. http://www.ubuntu-manual.org. Geing Started with Ubuntu . is not intended to be a comprehensive Ubuntu instruction manual. It is more like a quick-start guide that will get you doing the things you need to do with your computer quickly and easily, without geing bogged down with technical details. As with prior versions, Ubuntu .  incorporates many new features, including enhancements to the Unity shell and . More about the Unity shell and what it means, HUD is an abbreviation for heads-up display. and the , can be found in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop. It is a new concept, integrated into Unity as of Unity 5.2; it is still in development. For more detailed information on using Unity and the Ubuntu desk- top, see the “Ubuntu Desktop Guide,” which can be obtained in any of the following ways: ‣ in the Dash, type yelp; ‣ in the desktop menubar, click Help ‣ Ubuntu Help; ‣ go to https://help.ubuntu.com, Ubuntu .  ‣ Ubuntu Desktop Help. e Internet is also an excellent resource. For example, on https://help. ubuntu.com you will find documentation on installing and using Ubuntu, and at the Ubuntu Forums, http://ubuntuforums.org, and Ask Ubuntu, http://askubuntu.com, you find answers to many Ubuntu related questions. More information about Ubuntu’s online If something isn’t covered in this manual, chances are you will find the and system documentation can be found in Chapter 7: Learning More. information you are looking for in one of those locations. We will try our best to include links to more detailed help wherever we can. Ubuntu Philosophy e term “Ubuntu” is a traditional African concept that originated from the Bantu languages of southern Africa. It can be described as a way of People sometimes wonder how to pronounce connecting with others—living in a global community where your actions Ubuntu. Each “u” is pronounced the same as in the word put. affect all of humanity. Ubuntu is more than just an operating system: it is a community of people that come together voluntarily to collaborate on an international soware project that aims to deliver the best possible user experience.
  • 8.     . The Ubuntu Promise ‣ Ubuntu will always be free of charge, along with its regular enterprise releases and security updates. ‣ Ubuntu comes with full commercial support from Canonical and hun- dreds of companies from across the world. ‣ Ubuntu provides the best translations and accessibility features that the free soware community has to offer. ‣ Ubuntu’s core applications are all free and open source. We want you to use free and open source soware, improve it, and pass it on. A brief history of Ubuntu Ubuntu was conceived in  by Mark Shuleworth, a successful South African entrepreneur, and his company Canonical. Shuleworth recognized Canonical is the company that provides financial the power of Linux and open source, but was also aware of weaknesses that and technical support for Ubuntu. It has employees based around the world who work prevented mainstream use. on developing and improving the operating Shuleworth set out with clear intentions to address these weaknesses system, as well as reviewing work submitted by and create a system that was easy to use, completely free (see Chapter : volunteer contributors. To learn more about Canonical, go to http://www.canonical.com. Learning More for the complete definition of “free”), and could compete with other mainstream operating systems. With the Debian system as a base, Shuleworth began to build Ubuntu. Using his own funds at first, Debian is the Linux operating system that installation s were pressed and shipped worldwide at no cost to the Ubuntu is based upon. For more information visit http://www.debian.org/. recipients. Ubuntu spread quickly, its community rapidly grew, and soon Ubuntu became the most popular Linux distribution available. With more people working on the project than ever before, its core fea- tures and hardware support continue to improve, and to its core features and hardware support, and Ubuntu has gained the aention of large organi- zations worldwide. One of IBM’s open source operating systems is based on Ubuntu. In , the French Police began to transition their entire computer infrastructure to a variant of Ubuntu—a process which has reportedly saved them “millions of euros” in licensing fees for Microso Windows. By the end of , the French Police anticipates that all of their computers will be running Ubuntu. Canonical profits from this arrangement by providing technical support and custom-built soware. While large organizations oen find it useful to pay for support services, For information on Ubuntu Server Edition, and Shuleworth has promised that the Ubuntu desktop system will always how you can use it in your company, visit http:// www.ubuntu.com/business/server/overview. be free. As of , Ubuntu is installed on an estimated % of the world’s computers. is equates to tens of millions of users worldwide, and is growing each year. As there is no compulsory registration, the percentage of Ubuntu users should be treated as an estimate. What is Linux? Ubuntu is built on the foundation of Linux, which is a member of the Unix family. Unix is one of the oldest types of operating systems and has pro- vided reliability and security in professional applications for almost half a century. Many servers around the world that store data for popular web- sites (such as YouTube and Google) run some variant of a Unix system. e Linux kernel is best described as the core, or almost the brain, of the operating system. e Linux kernel is the controller of the operating system; it is responsi- ble for allocating memory and processor time. It can also be thought of as the program which manages any and all applications on the computer itself.
  • 9.   Linux was designed from the ground up with security and hardware While modern graphical desktop environments compatibility in mind, and is currently one of the most popular Unix-based have generally replaced early command-line interfaces, the command line can still be a operating systems. One of the benefits of Linux is that it is incredibly flex- quick and efficient way of performing many ible and can be configured to run on almost any device—from the smallest tasks. See Chapter 5: Release upgrade for micro-computers and cellphones to larger super-computers. Unix was en- more information, and Chapter 2: The Ubuntu Desktop to learn more about gnome and other tirely command line-based until graphical user interfaces (s) began to desktop environments. emerge in the early s. ese early s were difficult to configure, clunky, and generally only used by seasoned computer programmers. In the past decade, however, graphical user interfaces have come a long way in terms of usability, reli- ability, and appearance. Ubuntu is just one of many different Linux distri- butions, and uses one of the more popular graphical desktop environments To learn more about Linux distributions, see called . Chapter 7: Learning More. Is Ubuntu right for you? New users to Ubuntu may find that it takes some time to feel comfortable when trying a new operating system. You will no doubt notice many sim- ilarities to both Microso Windows and Mac  , and some differences. Users coming from Mac   are more likely to notice similarities due to the fact that both Mac   and Ubuntu originated from Unix. e Unity shell, which is the default in Ubuntu, is a completely new concept, which needs some exploring to get used to it. See Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop for more information about the Unity shell. Before you decide whether or not Ubuntu is right for you, we suggest giving yourself some time to grow accustomed to the way things are done in Ubuntu. You should expect to find that some things are different from what you are used to. We also suggest taking the following into account: Ubuntu is community based. at is, Ubuntu is developed, wrien, and maintained by the community. Because of this, support is probably not available at your local computer store. Fortunately, the Ubuntu community is here to help. ere are many articles, guides, and manuals available, as well as users on various Internet forums and Internet Relay Chat () rooms that are willing to assist beginners. Additionally, near the end of this guide, we include a troubleshooting chapter: Chapter : Troubleshooting. Many applications designed for Microso Windows or Mac   will not run on Ubuntu. For the vast majority of everyday computing tasks, you will find suitable alternative applications available in Ubuntu. However, many profes- sional applications (such as the Adobe Creative Suite) are not developed to work with Ubuntu. If you rely on commercial soware that is not compatible with Ubuntu, yet still want to give Ubuntu a try, you may want to consider dual-booting. Alternatively, some applications devel- To learn more about dual-booting (running oped for Windows will work in Ubuntu with a program called Wine. For Ubuntu side-by-side with another operating system), see Chapter 1: Installation. more information on Wine, go to http://www.winehq.org. Many commercial games will not run on Ubuntu. If you are a heavy gamer, then Ubuntu may not be for you. Game developers usually design games for the largest market. Since Ubuntu’s market share is not as substantial as Microso’s Windows or Apple’s Mac  , most game developers will not allocate resources towards making their games compatible with Linux. If you just enjoy a game every now and then, there is active game See Chapter 5: Software Management to learn development within the community, and many high quality games can more about Ubuntu Software Center. be easily installed through the Ubuntu Soware Center.
  • 10.     . Contact details Many people have contributed their time to this project. If you notice any errors or think we have le something out, feel free to contact us. We do everything we can to make sure that this manual is up to date, informative, and professional. Our contact details are as follows: ‣ Website: http://www.ubuntu-manual.org/ ‣ Email: [email protected] ‣ : #ubuntu-manual on irc.freenode.net ‣ Bug Reports: https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu-manual/+filebug About the team Our project is an open source volunteer effort to create and maintain qual- ity documentation for Ubuntu and its derivatives. Want to help? We are always looking for talented people to work with, and due to the size of the project we are fortunate to be able to cater to a wide range of skill sets: ‣ Authors, editors ‣ Programmers (Python or TEX) ‣ User interface designers ‣ Icon and title page designers ‣ Event organizers and ideas people ‣ Testers ‣ Web designers and developers ‣ Translators and screenshoers ‣ Bug reporters and triagers To find out how you can get started helping, please visit http://ubuntu-manual. org/getinvolved. Conventions used in this book e following typographic conventions are used in this book: ‣ Buon names, menu items, and other  elements are set in boldfaced type. ‣ Menu sequences are sometimes typeset as File ‣ Save As…, which means, “Choose the File menu, then choose the Save As….” ‣ Monospaced type is used for text that you type into the computer, text that the computer outputs (as in a terminal), and keyboard shortcuts.
  • 11. 1 Installation Getting Ubuntu Before you can get started with Ubuntu, you will need to obtain a copy of Many companies (such as Dell and System76) the Ubuntu installation image for  or . Some options for doing this are sell computers with Ubuntu preinstalled. If you already have Ubuntu installed on your outlined below. computer, feel free to skip to Chapter 2: The Ubuntu Desktop. Minimum system requirements Ubuntu runs well on most computer systems. If you are unsure whether it The majority of computers in use today will will work on your computer, the Live  is a great way to test things out meet the requirements listed here; however, refer to your computer documentation or first. Below is a list of hardware specifications that your computer should manufacturer’s website for more information. meet as a minimum requirement. ‣  GHz x processor (Pentium  or beer) ‣   of system memory () ‣   of disk space (at least   is recommended) ‣ Video support capable of × resolution ‣ Audio support ‣ An Internet connection (highly recommended, but not required) Downloading Ubuntu e easiest and most common method for geing Ubuntu is to download the Ubuntu  image directly from http://www.ubuntu.com/download. Choose how you will install Ubuntu: ‣ Download and install ‣ Try it from a  or  stick ‣ Run it with Windows Download and Install / Try it from a CD or USB stick For the Download and install, or Try it from a  or  stick options, select whether you require the -bit or -bit version (-bit is recommended for most users), then click “Start download.” Installing and run alongside Windows For the Run it with Windows option, simply select “Start download,” and then follow the instructions for the Ubuntu installer for Windows. 32-bit versus 64-bit Ubuntu and its derivatives are available in two versions: -bit and -bit. is difference refers to the way computers process information. Comput- 32-bit and 64-bit are types of processor ers capable of running -bit soware are able to process more information architectures. Most new desktop computers have a 64-bit capable processor. than computers running -bit soware; however, -bit systems require more memory in order to do this. Nevertheless, these computers gain per- formance enhancements by running -bit soware. ‣ If your computer has a -bit processor install the -bit version.
  • 12.      . ‣ If your computer is older, a netbook, or you do not know the type of processor in the computer, install the -bit version. If your computer has a -bit processor, click on the “-bit” option before you click “Start download.” Downloading Ubuntu as a torrent When a new version of Ubuntu is released, the download servers can get Torrents are a way of sharing files and informa- “clogged” as large numbers of people try to download or upgrade Ubuntu tion around the Internet via peer-to-peer file sharing. A file with the .torrent extension is at the same time. If you are familiar with using torrents, you can download made available to users, which is then opened the torrent file by clicking “Alternative downloads,” and then “BitTorrent with a compatible program such as uTorrent, download.” Downloading via torrent may improve your download speed, Deluge, or Transmission. These programs download parts of the file from other people all and will also be help to spread Ubuntu to other users worldwide. around the world. Burning the CD image Once your download is complete, you will be le with a file called ubuntu- While the 64-bit version of Ubuntu is referred .-desktop-i.iso or similar (i here in the filename refers to the -bit to as the “AMD64” version, it will work on Intel, AMD, and other compatible 64-bit processors. version. If you downloaded the -bit version, the filename contains amd instead). is file is a  image—a snapshot of the contents of a —which you will need to burn to a . Creating a bootable USB drive If your  is able to boot from a  stick, you may prefer to use a  memory stick instead of burning a . Scroll down to “Burn your  or create a  drive,” select  or  stick, choose the  you are using to create the  drive, and then click Show me how. If you select the “ Stick” option, your installation will be running from the  memory stick. In this case, references to Live , will refer to the  memory stick. Trying out Ubuntu e Ubuntu  and  stick function not only as installation media, but also allow you to test Ubuntu without making any permanent changes to your computer by running the entire operating system from the  or  stick. Your computer reads information from a  at a much slower speed than In some cases, your computer will not recognize it can read information off of a hard drive. Running Ubuntu from the Live that the Ubuntu CD or USB is present as it starts up and will start your existing operating  also occupies a large portion of your computer’s memory, which would system instead. Generally, this means that usually be available for applications to access when Ubuntu is running from the priority given to boot devices when your your hard drive. e Live / experience will therefore feel slightly computer is starting needs to be changed. For example, your computer might be set to look slower than it does when Ubuntu is actually installed on your computer. for information from your hard drive, and then Running Ubuntu from the / is a great way to test things out and to look for information on a CD or USB. To run allows you to try the default applications, browse the Internet, and get a Ubuntu from the Live CD or USB, we want the computer to look for information from the general feel for the operating system. It’s also useful for checking that your appropriate device first. Changing your boot computer hardware works properly in Ubuntu and that there are no major priority is usually handled by BIOS settings; this compatibility issues. is beyond the scope of this guide. If you need assistance with changing the boot priority, see To try out Ubuntu using the Live / stick, insert the Ubuntu  into your computer manufacturer’s documentation your  drive, or connect the  drive and restart your computer. for more information. Aer your computer finds the Live / stick, and a quick loading screen, you will be presented with the “Welcome” screen. Using your
  • 13.   mouse, select your language from the list on the le, then click the but- ton labeled Try Ubuntu. Ubuntu will then start up, running directly from the Live / drive. Figure 1.1: The “Welcome” screen allows you to choose your language. Once Ubuntu is up and running, you will see the default desktop. We will talk more about how to actually use Ubuntu in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop, but for now, feel free to test things out. Open some applications, change seings and generally explore—any changes you make will not be saved once you exit, so you don’t need to worry about accidentally breaking anything. When you are finished exploring, restart your computer by clicking the Alternatively, you can also use your mouse to “Power” buon in the top right corner of your screen (a circle with a line double-click the “Install Ubuntu 12.04” icon that is visible on the desktop when using the Live through the top) and then select Restart. Follow the prompts that appear on CD. This will start the Ubuntu installer. screen, including removing the Live  and pressing Enter when instructed, and then your computer will restart. As long as the Live  is no longer in the drive, your computer will return to its original state as though nothing ever happened! Installing Ubuntu—Getting started At least   of free space on your hard drive is required in order to install Clicking on the underlined “release notes” link Ubuntu; however,   or more is recommended. is will ensure that will open a web page containing any important information regarding the current version of you will have plenty of room to install extra applications later on, as well Ubuntu. as store your own documents, music, and photos. To get started, place the Ubuntu  in your  drive and restart your computer. Your computer should load Ubuntu from the . When you first start from the , you will be presented with a screen asking you whether you want to first try out Ubuntu or install it. Select the language you want to view the installer in and click on the Install Ubuntu buon. is will start the installation process. If you have an Internet connection, the installer will ask you if you would like to “Download updates while installing.” We recommend you do so. e second option, “Install this third-party soware,” includes the Fluendo  codec, and soware required for some wireless hardware. If you are not connected to the Internet, the installer will help you set up a wireless connection. e “Preparing to install Ubuntu” screen will also let you know if you
  • 14.      . have enough disk space and if you are connected to a power source (in case you are installing Ubuntu on a laptop running on baery). Once you have selected your choices, click Continue. Internet connection If you are not connected to the Internet, the installer will ask you to choose a wireless network (if available). We recommend that you connect during install, though updates and third-party software can be . Select Connect to this network, and then select your network from the installed after installation. list. . If the list does not appear immediately, wait until a triangle/arrow ap- pears next to the network adapter, and then click the arrow to see the available networks. . In the Password field, enter the network  or  key (if necessary). . Click Connect to continue. Figure 1.2: Set up wireless. Allocate drive space is next step is oen referred to as partitioning. Partitioning is the process If you are installing on a new machine with no of allocating portions of your hard drive for a specific purpose. When you operating system, you will not get the first option. The upgrade option is only available if create a partition, you are essentially dividing up your hard drive into sec- you are upgrading from a previous version of tions that will be used for different types of information. Partitioning can Ubuntu. sometimes seem complex to a new user; however, it does not have to be. In fact, Ubuntu provides you with some options that greatly simplify this pro- cess. e Ubuntu installer will automatically detect any existing operating system installed on your machine, and present installations options based on your system. e options listed below depend on your specific system and may not all be available: ‣ Install alongside other operating systems ‣ Install inside Windows ‣ Upgrade Ubuntu … to . ‣ Erase … and install Ubuntu ‣ Something else
  • 15.   Install alongside other operating systems. If you are a Windows or Mac user and you are trying to install Ubuntu for Ubuntu provides you with the option of either the first time, select the Install alongside other operating systems option. replacing your existing operating system altogether, or installing Ubuntu alongside is option will enable you to choose which operating system you wish to your existing system. The latter is called dual- use when you computer starts. Ubuntu will automatically detect the other booting. Whenever you turn on or restart your operating system and install Ubuntu alongside it. computer, you will be given the option to select which operating system you want to use for that session. For more complicated dual-booting setups, you will need to configure the parti- tions manually. Figure 1.3: Choose where you would like to install Ubuntu. Upgrade Ubuntu … to 12.04 is option will keep all of your Documents, music, pictures, and other personal files. Installed soware will be kept when possible (not all your currently installed soware may be supported on the new version). System- wide seings will be cleared. Erase disk and install Ubuntu Use this option if you want to erase your entire disk. is will delete any existing operating systems that are installed on that disk, such as Windows , and install Ubuntu in its place. is option is also useful if you have an empty hard drive, as Ubuntu will automatically create the necessary partitions for you. Formaing a partition will destroy any data currently on the partition. Be sure to back up any data you want to save before Formaing. Ubuntu installs a home folder where your personal files and configuration data are Something else located by default. If you choose to have your home folder on a separate partition, then in the is option is for advanced users and is used to create special partitions, or event that you decide to reinstall Ubuntu or format the hard drive with a file system different to the default one. perform a fresh upgrade to the latest release, your personal files and configuration data won’t Aer you have chosen the installation type, click Continue, or Install be lost. Now. More information and detailed instructions on partitioning are available at: https://help. ubuntu.com/community/HowtoPartition.
  • 16.      . Confirm Partition choices and start install If you chose Something else, configure the partitions as you need. Once you are happy with the way the partitions are going to be set up, click the Install Now buon at the boom right to move on. To reduce the time required for installation, Ubuntu will continue the installation process in the background while you configure important user details—like your username, password, keyboard seings and default time- zone. Where are you? Figure 1.4: Tell Ubuntu your location. e next screen will display a world map. Using your mouse, click your geographic location on the map to tell Ubuntu where you are. Alternatively, you can use the drop-down lists underneath the map. is allows Ubuntu to configure your system clock and other location-based features. Click Forward when you are ready to move on. Keyboard layout Figure 1.5: Verify that your keyboard layout is correct. Next, you need to tell Ubuntu what kind of keyboard you are using.
  • 17.   In most cases, you will find the suggested option satisfactory. If you are unsure which keyboard option to select, you can click the Detect Keyboard Layout buon to have Ubuntu determine the correct choice by asking you to press a series of keys. You can also manually choose your keyboard layout from the list of options. If you like, enter text into the box at the boom of the window to ensure you are happy with your selection, then click Continue. Who are you? Ubuntu needs to know some information about you so it can set up the primary user account on your computer. When configured, your name will appear on the login screen as well as the user menu, which we discuss in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop. On this screen you will need to tell Ubuntu: ‣ your name ‣ what you want to call your computer ‣ your desired username ‣ your desired password ‣ how you want Ubuntu to log you in Figure 1.6: Setup your user account. Enter your full name under “Your name?”. e next text field is the name your computer uses, for terminals and networks. You can change this to what you want, or keep the predetermined name. Next is your username, the name that is used for the user menu, your home folder, and behind the scenes. You will see this is automatically filled in for you with your first name. Most people find it easiest to stick with this. However, it can be changed if you prefer. Next, choose a password and enter it into the password field on the le, and then enter same password into the password field on the right. When both passwords match, a strength rating will appear to the right that will show you whether your password is “too short,” “weak,” “fair,” or “strong.” You will be able to continue the installation process regardless of your password strength, but for security reasons it is best to choose a strong one. is is best achieved by having a password that is at least six characters long, and is a mixture of leers, numbers, symbols, and upper-
  • 18.      . case/lowercase. Avoid obvious passwords that include your birth date, spouse’s name, or the name of your pet. Login Options Finally, at the boom of this screen you have three options from which to choose regarding how you wish to log in to Ubuntu. ‣ Log in automatically ‣ Require my password to log in ‣ Encrypt my home folder Log in automatically Ubuntu will log in to your primary account automatically when you start up the computer so you won’t have to enter your username and password. is makes your login experience quicker and more convenient, but if privacy or security are important to you, we don’t recommend this option. Anyone who can physically access your computer will be able to turn it on and also access your files. Require my password to login is option is selected by default, as it will prevent unauthorized people from accessing your computer without knowing the password you cre- ated earlier. is is a good option for those who, for example, share their computer with other family members. Once the installation process has been completed, an additional login account can be created for each family member. Each person will then have their own login name and password, account preferences, Internet bookmarks, and personal storage space. Encrypt my home folder is option provides you with an extra layer of security. Your home folder is where your personal files are stored. By selecting this option, Ubuntu will automatically enable encryption on your home folder, meaning that files and folders must be decrypted using your password before they can be accessed. erefore if someone had physical access to your hard drive (for example, if your computer was stolen and the hard drive removed), they would not be able to see your files without knowing your password. If you choose this option, be careful not to enable automatic login at a later date. It will cause complications with your encrypted home folder, and will potentially lock you out of important files. Finishing Installation Ubuntu will now finish installing on your hard drive. As the installation progresses, a slideshow will give you an introduction to some of the de- fault applications included with Ubuntu. ese applications are covered in more detail in Chapter : Working with Ubuntu. e slideshow will also highlight the Ubuntu support options: Aer approximately twenty minutes, the installation will complete and you will be able to click Restart Now to restart your computer and start
  • 19.   Figure 1.7: Ubuntu community support options. Where to get help for Ubuntu. Ubuntu. e  will be ejected, so remove it from your  drive and press Enter to continue. Figure 1.8: You are now ready to restart your computer. Wait while your computer restarts, and you will then see the login win- dow (unless you selected automatic login).
  • 20.      . Login Screen Aer the installation is over and the computer is restarted, you will be greeted by the login screen of Ubuntu. e login screen uses LightDM which is a light on resources and easy to customize display manager. e login screen will present you with your username and you will have to enter the password to get past it. Click your username and enter your pass- word. Once done, you may click the arrow or press Enter to get into the Ubuntu desktop. Ubuntu’s login screen supports multiple users and also supports custom backgrounds for each user. In fact, Ubuntu automati- cally will pick up your current desktop wallpaper and set it as your login background. Ubuntu’s login screen also lets you select the different en- vironments to login. In a default Ubuntu installation, you will have two environments; Ubuntu and Ubuntu-D. If you want to login to Ubuntu-D, click on the Ubuntu icon and select Ubuntu-D from the list and then enter your password to login. e login screen allows you to update your key- A guest session is also available at the login board language, volume intensity and enable/disable accessibility seings screen. You can activate this session for guests using your laptop or desktop. before you log in to your desktop. It also displays date/time and baery power for laptops. You can also shut down or restart your system from the login screen. Figure 1.9: Login Screen. Ubuntu installer for Windows You can install and run Ubuntu alongside your current installation of Win- dows: . Download the Ubuntu installer for Windows http://www.ubuntu.com/ download/ubuntu/windows-installer . Run the download file . Install Ubuntu Download and run the installer Aer the file, wubi.exe, is downloaded, run the file to start the installation. If a security message appears, click Continue, to proceed with the installation:
  • 21.   Figure 1.10: User Account Control dialog Installation e Ubuntu Installer will start. Choose and enter a “Username” and “Pass- word.” e password must be entered twice to ensure accuracy. Aer choosing a password, click Install. e Ubuntu Installer will download and install Ubuntu. is process will take some time. e download file size is Mb. Aer the installation is complete, click Finish on the “Completing the Ubuntu Setup Wizard” screen to reboot the computer. Figure 1.11: Ubuntu Windows Installer Installation complete Aer the computer restarts, you can select “Ubuntu” from the boot menu. You will then be logged in to Ubuntu and will be presented with your new desktop!
  • 23. 2 The Ubuntu Desktop Understanding the Ubuntu desktop Initially, you may notice many similarities between Ubuntu and other Ubuntu 12.04 has an emphasis on “social operating systems such as Microso Windows or Mac  . is is because from the start” and features social network integration in the desktop for sites like Twitter they are all based on the concept of a graphical user interface ()—i.e., and Facebook. you use your mouse to navigate the desktop, open applications, move files, and perform most other tasks. In short, things are visually-oriented. is chapter is designed to help you become familiar with various applications and menus in Ubuntu so that you become confident in using the Ubuntu . Figure 2.1: The Ubuntu 12.04 default desktop. Unity All -based operating systems use a desktop environment. Desktop envi- ronments encompass many things, such as: ‣ e look and feel of your system ‣ e way the desktop is laid out ‣ How the desktop is navigated by the user In Linux distributions (such as Ubuntu), there are a number of desktop To read more about other variants of Ubuntu, environments available. Ubuntu uses Unity as the default desktop envi- refer to Chapter 7: Learning More. ronment. Aer installing and logging in to Ubuntu, you will see the Unity desktop. is initial view is comprised of the e Desktop Background and two bars—one is horizontally located at the top of your desktop and appro- priately named e top bar, and the other bar is vertically oriented at the far le, called the Launer. The Desktop Background Below the top bar is an image that covers the entire desktop. is is the default desktop background, or wallpaper, belonging to the default Ubuntu
  • 24.      . . theme known as Ambiance. To learn more about customizing your desktop (including changing your background), see the section on Cus- tomizing your desktop below. The top bar e top bar incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu .. e right The top bar is also referred as the top panel. part of the bar is called the indicator area. Each installation of Ubuntu may contain slightly different types and quantities of icons based on a number of factors, including type of hardware and available on-board accessories. e most common indicators are (starting from the le): For more about: ‣ the Messaging Indicator see Microblogging; Keyboard indicator allows you to select the keyboard layout you would like ‣ the Network Indicator see Getting online; and change your keyboard preferences. ‣ the Session Indicator see Session options. Messaging indicator incorporates all your social applications. From here, The keyboard indicator only shows when you you can access your instant messenger, your email client, your mi- have chosen more than one keyboard layout in the keyboard settings during installation. croblogging application, and even UbuntuOne, your personal cloud! Network indicator allows you to manage your network connections and connect quickly and easily to a wired or wireless network. Sound indicator provides an easy way to adjust the sound volume as well as access your music player and sound seings. Clock displays the current time and provides an easy way to access your calendar and Time and Date seings. User menu allows you to easily switch between different users and access your online and user accounts. Session indicator provides an easy way to access System Seings, Updates, Printers, and session options for locking your computer, logging out of your session, restarting the computer, or shuing down completely. Figure 2.2: The Indicators of the top bar. Every application has a menu (like File, Edit, View, etc.). In Unity, the application menu isn’t on the titlebar of the application as is commonly the case with other  environments. Instead, it is located on the le area of the top bar. To show an application’s menu, just move your mouse to the top bar. is capability of Unity to only show the application’s menu when needed is especially beneficial for netbook and laptop users as it provides you with more free work space. Note that some older applications may still display their menu within the application window. The Launcher e vertical bar of icons on the le side of the screen is called the Launcher. e Launcher provides easy access to applications, mounted devices, and the Trash. All running applications on your system will place an icon in this Launcher while the application is running. e first icon at the top of the Launcher is the Dash, a major innovation and core element of Unity —we will explore the Dash in a later section of this chapter. By default, other applications appear on the Launcher, including applications such as LibreOffice and Firefox, the Workspace lens, any mounted devices, and, of course, the always-important Trash lens at the boom of the Launcher. Workspaces helps you to select the workspace or the window you want. Trash contains deleted files. Tip: Pressing Super+S will show the Workspaces.
  • 25.     Figure 2.3: The Ubuntu 12.04 Launcher Panel on the left with a sample of applications on it. Using Launcher Running applications To run an application from the Launcher (or cause an already-running If you hold the Super key, a number will appear application to appear), just click on the application’s icon. Running applica- on each of the first ten applications, along with a margin containing useful shortcuts. You can tions will have one or more triangles on the le side of its icon, indicating launch an application with a number n on it by the number of application windows open for this application. e appli- typing Super+n. cation in the foreground (meaning on top of all other open application windows) has a white triangle on the right side of its icon. You can also run an application through the Dash. We will talk about the Dash, in the e Dash section. Adding and removing applications from the Launcher ere are two ways to add an application to the Launcher: Figure 2.4: Just below the Home Folder icon, ‣ Open the Dash, find the application to add, and drag and drop it to the you will see the Firefox icon. Notice the Launcher triangle on the right side indicating it is the application in the foreground (on top of all ‣ Run the application you want to add to the Launcher, right-click on the other applications), and the triangle on the application’s icon on the Launcher, and select Keep in the Launer. left side indicating there’s only one window associated with Firefox at this time. To remove an application from the Launcher, right-click on the applica- tion’s icon, then select Remove from the Launer or deselect Keep in the Launer—if the application is running. The Dash e Dash is a tool to help you access and find applications and files on your The Dash allows you to search for information, computer quickly. If you are a Windows user, you’ll find the Dash to be both locally (installed applications, recent files, bookmarks, etc.) as well as remotely (Twitter, a more advanced Start Menu. If you are a Mac user, the Dash is similar to Google Docs, etc.). This is accomplished by Launchpad in the dock. If you’ve used a previous version of Ubuntu or an- utilizing one or more lenses, each responsible other  Linux distribution, the Dash replaces the   menus. To for providing a category of search results for the Dash. For more information about the Dash and its lens, see: https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Unity
  • 26.      . explore the Dash, click on the top-most icon on the Launcher; the icon has the Ubuntu logo on it.Aer selecting the Dash icon, another window will Figure 2.5: The Dash appear with a search bar on the top as well as grouping of recently accessed applications, files, and downloads. e search bar provides dynamic results as you enter your search terms. e five lenses at the boom are links to your Home lens, Applications lens, Files lens, and Music and Videos lenses. Lenses act as specialized search categories in the Dash. Search for files and applications with the Dash e Dash is an extremely powerful tool and allows you to search your entire system for applications and filenames based on search terms. Find files/folder e Dash can help you find the names of files or folders. Simply type in what you remember of the name of the file or folder and the Dash will show results it finds as you type. Note that the Files lens can also assist you in finding files or folders. e Files lens shows you the most recent files accessed, as well as recent downloads. You can use the filter results buon in the top-right corner of the Dash to filter down the results to your requirements by file or folder modification times, by file type (.odt, .pdf, .doc, .tex., etc.), or by size. Find applications e standard Ubuntu installation comes with many applications. Users can also download thousands more applications from the Ubuntu Soware Center. As you collect an arsenal of awesome applications (and get a bonus Ubuntu Software Center and software manage- point for alliteration!), it may become difficult to remember the name of a ment will be discussed in detail at Chapter 5: Software Management. particular application. Simply use the Application lens on the Dash. is lens will automatically categorizes installed applications under “Most Fre- quently Used,” “Installed,” or “Apps Available for Download.”You can also If you are new to the world of Ubuntu, be enter a name of the application or a part of it, and the Dash will return the sure to read the Chapter 3: Working with Ubuntu. It will provide you help in choosing the results. Even if you don’t remember the name of the application at all, type application(s) that suit your needs. a keyword that is relevant to that application and Dash will find it, in most
  • 27.     cases (e.g., type music and Dash will return you the default music player any any music player you’ve used). Figure 2.6: You can see the default results when you press Application lens, and also the criteria on the right side. Workspaces Workspaces are also known as virtual desktops. ese separate views of your desktop allow you to group applications together, and by do- ing so, help to reduce cluer and improve desktop navigation. In one workspace, you can open all of your media applications; your office suite in another, and your web browser open in a third workspace. Ubuntu has four workspaces by default. Switching between workspaces To switch between workspaces, click on the Workspaces Switcher located on the Launcher. is lens allows you to toggle through the workspaces (whether they contain open applications or not), and choose the one you want to use. Managing windows When opening a program in Ubuntu (such as a web browser or a text editor —see Chapter : Working with Ubuntu for more information on using applications)—a window will appear on your desktop. e windows in Ubuntu are very similar to those in Microso Windows or Mac  . Simply stated, a window is the box that appears on your screen when you start a program. In Ubuntu, the top part of a window (the titlebar) will have the title of the window centered (most oen, the title will be the name of the application). A window will also have three buons in the top-le corner. From le to right, these buons represent close, minimize window, and maximize window. Other window management options are available by right-clicking anywhere on the title bar.
  • 28.      . Figure 2.7: This is the top bar of a window, named Titlebar. The close, minimize, and maximize buttons are on the top-left corner of window. Closing, maximizing, restoring, and minimizing windows To close a window, click on the in the upper-le corner of the window —the first buon on the le-hand side. e buon immediately to the right of the is the minimize buon ( ) which removes the window from the visible screen and places it in the Launcher. is buon doesn’t close the application, it just hides the application from view. When an application is minimized to the Launcher, the le-side of the icon in the Launcher will display a triangle showing you the application is still running. Clicking the icon of the application that is minimized will restore the window to its original position. Finally, the right-most buon ( ) is the maximize buon, which makes the application window fill the entire screen. Clicking the maximize buon again will return the window to its original size. If a windows is maximized, its top-le buons and menu are automatically hidden from view. To make them appear, just move your mouse to the le side of the top bar. Moving and resizing windows To move a window around the workspace, place the mouse pointer over You can also move a window by holding the Alt the window’s title bar, then click and drag the window while continuing key and dragging the window. to hold down the le mouse buon. To resize a window, place the pointer on an edge or corner of the window so that the pointer turns into a larger, two-sided arrow, (known as the resize icon). You can then click and drag to resize the window. Figure 2.8: The Workspaces Switcher on the Launcher. Switching between open windows In Ubuntu there are many ways to switch between open windows. Super key is also known as the Windows key (Win key). Press Super+D to hide all window and display the desktop, the same works to . If the window is visible on your screen, you can click any portion of it to restore all windows. raise it above all other windows.
  • 29.     . Use Alt+Tab to select the window you wish to work with. Hold down the Alt key, and keep pressing Tab until the window you’re looking for appears in the popup. . Click on the corresponding icon on the Launcher. Move your mouse to the le side of your screen to show the Launcher, and right-click on the application icon. If the application has multiple windows open, double- click on the icon in order to select the window you want. Moving a window to different workspace To move a window to a different workspace, make sure the window isn’t maximized. If it is maximized, click on the right-most buon on the le side of the title bar to restore it to its original size. en right-click on the window’s title bar and select: ‣ Move to Workspace Le, to move the window to the le workspace ‣ Move to Workspace Right, to move the window to the right workspace ‣ Move to Another Workspace, and then choose the workspace you wish to move the window to. Window always on the top or on visible workspace At times, you may want to have a window always on top so that it can be seen or monitored while you work with other applications. For example, you may want to browse the web and, at the same time, view and answer to any incoming instant message. To keep a window on top, right-click on the window’s title bar, then select Always on the top. Note that this window will be on the top of all windows that are opened in the current workspace. If you want to have a window always on the top regardless of the workspace, right-click on the window’s titlebar, then select Always on Visible Workspace. is window will now be on top of all other windows across all workspaces. Browsing files on your computer ere are two ways to locate files on your computer—either search for You can open your Home folder from the them or access them directly from their folder. You can search for a file via Launcher. the Dash or Files & Folders in the Launcher. You can also use the Files & Folders tool to access commonly used folders (such as Documents, Music, Downloads), as well as most recently accessed files. Places To access Places, move your mouse over the top bar and select Places. e If you do not see the desktop menu, click Places menu holds a list of commonly used folders (such as Documents, somewhere on the desktop and it will appear. Music, Downloads, and the Home Folder). You can also browse the files on your computer by clicking Computer in this menu. If you set up a home network, you will find a menu item to access shared files or folders. You can also access the Sear for Files tool from the Places menu, or browse a list of recently opened folders. Your Home Folder e home folder is used to store your personal files. Your home folder matches your login name. When you open your personal folder, you will
  • 30.      . see there are several more folders inside, including: Desktop (which con- tains any files that are visible on the desktop), Documents, Downloads, Music, Pictures, Public, Templates, and Videos. ese are created automati- cally the installation process. You can add more files and folders as needed. Nautilus file manager Just as Windows has Windows Explorer and Mac   has Finder to browse files and folders, Ubuntu uses the Nautilus file manager by default. We will now look at Nautilus in more detail. The Nautilus file manager window When you select the Home Folder shortcut in the Launcher or click on a folder in the Dash, or double-click on a folder on the desktop, the Nautilus file manager window opens. e default window contains the following features: Menu bar e menubar is located at the top of the screen. ese menus allow you to modify the layout of the browser, navigate, bookmark commonly used folders and files, and view hidden folders and files. If you bookmark a folder, it will appear in the Toolbar e toolbar contains tools for navigation as well as resizing the Bookmarks menu and in the left pane. window. A drop-down list gives you the option of switching the view from Icon View to List View or Compact View. e search icon (which looks like a magnifying glass) opens a field so you can search for a file by name. Just below the toolbar, you will see a representation of your cur- If you start typing a location in the toolbar rent browsing. is is similar to the history function in most browsers; starting with a / character, Nautilus will automatically change the navigation buttons it keeps track of where you are and allows you to backtrack if necessary. into a text field labeled Location. It is also You can click on the locations to navigate back through the file browser. possible to convert the navigation buttons into le page e le pane of the file browser has shortcuts to commonly used a text field by pressing Ctrl+L. folders. When a folder is bookmarked, it appears in the le pane. No maer what folder is open, the le pane will always contain the same folders. is le pane can be changed to display different features (such as Information, Tree, History, etc.) by clicking the down arrow beside “Places” near the top. central pane e largest pane shows the files and folders in the directory that you are currently browsing. Navigating Nautilus To navigate between folders, use the bookmarks in the le pane of the What is a Directory? Or a Folder? A directory is Nautilus file manager. You can also retrace your steps by clicking on the a division of space in a file system that you can use to organize files. A folder is the name given name of a folder in the path bar. Double-clicking on a visible folder will to a directory in a Graphical User Interface (GUI) cause you to navigate to it. environment like Nautilus. Opening files A file, in its simplest form, is data. Data can represent a text document, database information, or data that will be used to produce music or video. To open a file, you can either double-click on its icon or right-click the icon and select Open With.
  • 31.     Figure 2.9: Nautilus file manager displaying your home folder. Creating new folders To create a new folder from within Nautilus, click File ‣ Create Folder. en, name the folder that appears by replacing the default “Untitled Folder” with your desired label (e.g., “Personal Finances”). You can also create a new folder by pressing Ctrl+Shift+N, or by right-clicking in the file browser window and selecting Create Folder from the popup menu (this action will also work on the desktop). Hidden Files and Folders If you wish to hide certain folders or files, place a dot (.) in front of the You can easily view hidden files by clicking name (e.g., “.Personal Finances”). In some cases it is impossible to hide files View ‣ Show Hidden Files or by pressing Ctrl+H. Hiding files with a dot (.) is not a and folders without prefixing them with a dot. In Nautilus, these folders can security measure—it simply provides a way to be hidden by creating a .hidden file. is is accomplished by opening the keep folders organized and tidy. file and typing the name of the file or folder you wish to hide. Make sure that each file or folder is on a separate line. When you open Nautilus, the folder will no longer be visible. Copying and moving files and folders You can copy files or folders in Nautilus by clicking Edit ‣ Copy, or by right- You can also use the keyboard shortcuts clicking on the item and selecting Copy from the popup menu. When using Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to cut, copy, and paste (respectively) files and folders. the Edit menu in Nautilus, make sure you’ve selected the file or folder you want to copy first (by le-clicking on it once). Multiple files can be selected by le-clicking in an empty space (i.e., not on a file or folder), holding the mouse buon down, and dragging the cursor across the desired files or folders. is “click-drag” move is useful when you are selecting items that are grouped closely together. To select multiple files or folders that are not positioned next to each other, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on each item individually. Once multiple files and/or folders are selected, you can use the Edit menu to perform actions just like you would for a single item. When one or more items have been “copied,” navigate to the When you “cut” or “copy” a file or folder, desired location then click Edit ‣ Paste (or right-click in an empty area of nothing will happen until you “paste” it somewhere. Paste will only affect the most the window and select Paste) to copy them to the new location. While the recent item that was cut or copied. copy command can be used to make a duplicate of a file or folder in a new In the Nautilus Edit menu, you will also find location, the cut command can be used to move files and folders around. the Copy To and Move To buttons. These can be used to copy or move items to common locations and can be useful if you are using panes (see below). Note that it is unnecessary to use Paste when using these options.
  • 32.      . at is, a copy will be placed in a new location, and the original will be removed from its current location. To move a file or folder, select the item you want to move then click Edit ‣ Cut. Navigate to the desired location, then click Edit ‣ Paste. As with the copy command above, you can also If you click on a file or folder, drag it, and then perform this action using the right-click menu, and it will work for multiple hold down the Alt key and drop it to your destination folder, a menu will appear asking files or folders at once. An alternative way to move a file or folder is to click whether you want to copy, , move, or link the on the item, and then drag it to the new location. item. Notice that the symbol of the mouse cursor changes from an arrow into a question mark as soon as you hold down the Alt key. Using multiple tabs and multiple Nautilus windows Opening multiple Nautilus windows can be useful for dragging files and folders between locations. e option of tabs (as well as panes) is also avail- able in Nautilus. To open a second windows when browsing a folder in When dragging items between Nautilus Nautilus, select File ‣ New Window or press Ctrl+N. is will open a new windows, tabs, or panes, a small symbol will appear over the mouse cursor to let you window, allowing you to drag files and/or folders between two locations. know which action will be performed when To open a new tab, click File ‣ New Tab or press Ctrl+T. A new row will ap- you release the mouse button. A plus sign pear above the space used for browsing your files containing two tabs—both (+) indicates you are about to copy the item, whereas a small arrow means the item will be will display the directory you were originally browsing. You can click these moved. The default action will depend on the tabs to switch between them to click and drag files or folders between tabs folders you are using. the same as you would between windows. You can also open a second pane in Nautilus so you can see two locations at once without having to switch between tabs or windows. To open a second pane, click View ‣ Extra Pane, or press F3 on your keyboard. Again, dragging files and folders between panes is a quick way to move or copy items. Searching for files and folders on your computer You can search for files and folders using the Dash or Nautilus. Search for files and folders quickly by pressing Ctrl+F in Nautilus and then typing what you want to find. Search using the Dash In the Dash, click Sear for Files. Open the drop-down menu on the right side of the search bar. Select Folders, All Files, or one of the special folders, e.g., Documents. It is sufficient to type the first few leers of the file or folder for which you are searching. Search using Nautilus In Nautilus, click Go ‣ Sear for Files, or press Ctrl+F. is opens the search field where you can type the name of the file or folder you want to find. Customizing your desktop One of the advantages to a windowed environment through Unity is the ability to change the look and feel of your desktop. Don’t like the default charcoal Ubuntu theme? Do you have a picture of your third cousin’s aunt’s uncle’s nephew’s pet chihuahua that you’d love to see on your desktop as wallpaper? All of this (and more) is possible through desktop customiza- tions in Unity. Most customizations can be reached via the Session Indicator and then selecting System Settings to open the System Seings application window. e Dash, desktop appearance, themes, wallpapers, accessibility, and other configuration seings are available here. For more information see Session options.
  • 33.     Figure 2.10: You can change most of your system’s settings here. Appearance Figure 2.11: You can change the theme in the Look tab of the “Appearance” window. You can change the background, fonts, and window theme to further modify the look and feel of your desktop. To begin, open Appearance by either right-clicking on your background and selecting Change Desktop Baground or selecting Session Indicator ‣ System Settings ‣ Appearance. Theme e “Appearance” window will display the current selected background wallpaper and theme. emes control the appearance of your windows, buons, scroll bars, panels, icons, and other parts of the desktop. e Am- biance theme is used by default, but there are other themes from which you can choose. Just click once on any of the listed themes to give a new theme a try. e theme will change your desktop appearance immediately. Desktop background Under Baground, you may choose from Wallpapers, Pictures Folder, and Colors and Gradients. When Wallpapers is selected, you will see
  • 34.      . Ubuntu’s default selection of backgrounds. To change the background simply click the picture you would like to use. You’re not limited to this selection though. To use one of your own pictures, click the +… buon, and navigate to the image you would like to use, double-click the image, and the change will take effect immediately. is image will then be added to your list of available backgrounds. If you want to choose from a larger selection of desktop backgrounds, click the “Get More Backgrounds Online” link at the boom of the ”Appearance Preferences” window. is link will open your web browser, and direct you to the http://art.gnome.org/backgrounds website. Accessibility Ubuntu has built-in tools that make using the computer easier for people with certain physical limitations. You can find these tools by opening the Dash and searching for “Universal Access.” On the Seeing tab you can man- age the text size, the contrast of the interfaces, enable a zoom tool and even a screen reader. Selecting high-contrast themes and larger on-screen fonts can assist those with vision difficulties. You can activate “Visual Alerts” though the Hearing tab, if you have hearing impairment. Also you can ad- just keyboard and mouse seings to suit your needs through the Typing and Pointing and Cliing tabs respectively. Figure 2.12: Universal allows you to enable extra features to make it easier to use your computer. Orca screen reader Orca is a useful tool for people with visual impairments. Orca comes pre- installed in Ubuntu. To run Orca, click on the Dash and type Orca, and click on the displayed result. Orca is the ”Screen Reader” part of Universal Access and can be launched once the “Screen Reader” is activated. Orca’s voice synthesizer will activate and assist you through the various options such as voice type, voice language, Braille, and screen magnification. Once you have finished selecting your seings, you will need to log out of the computer (Orca will offer to do this for you). When you log back in, the Orca seings you selected will automatically run every time you use your computer.
  • 35.     Session options When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to log out, suspend, restart, or shut down through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel. You can also quickly access these options by pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Del keys. Logging out Logging out will leave the computer running but return you to the login screen. is is useful for switching between users, such as when a different person wishes to log in to their account, or if you are ever instructed to “log out and back in again.” Before logging out, you should always verify your work in any open applications is saved. Suspend To save energy, you can put your computer into suspend mode, which will save its current condition to internal memory, power off all devices, and allow you to start back up more quickly. While in a suspended state, the computer will use just a trickle of energy; this is required because the ses- sion is saved to internal memory, and if no power goes to internal memory, the data will be lost. Rebooting To reboot your computer, select Shut Down… from the “Session Indicator” and click on Restart. Shut down To totally power down your computer, select Shut Down… from the “Ses- sion Indicator” and click on Shutdown. Other options From the Session Indicator, you can also select Lo Screen to require You can lock your screen quickly by using the a password before using the computer again—this is useful if you need keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+L. Locking your screen is recommended if you move away from to leave your computer for some duration. You can also use the Session your computer for a short amount of time. Indicator to set up a guest session for a friend, or to switch users to log into another user account without closing your applications. Getting help General Help Ubuntu, just like other operating systems, has a built-in help reference Many applications have their own help section called the Ubuntu Desktop Guide. To access it, click on the Dash and type which can be accessed by clicking the Help menu within the application window. Help. Alternately, you can press F1 while on the desktop, or click Ubuntu Help in the top bar. Heads-Up Display help e  (heads-up display) is a new help feature introduced in Ubuntu .. is is a keyboard-friendly utility to help you find commands, fea- tures, and preferences embedded deep within the menu structure of an
  • 36.      . Figure 2.13: The HUD (heads-up display) shows application-specific help information based on your general input. application.Activate the  by pressing the le Alt+F2 keys on the key- board. If you want to search a menu item such as creating a new message in underbird, then just type message in the  and the option for com- posing a new email message will come up in the list of matching results. You can press the Enter key to active the command. e  works for The HUD feature may not be available in all almost all applications that are natively installable in Ubuntu; it also works applications as this is a new capability in Ubuntu 12.04. Your mileage may vary! for some applications running under wine. WINE is an acronym for Wine Is Not an Emula- tor. It allows you to run some Windows-based On-Line help applications in Ubuntu. Discussion of how to use WINE is beyond the scope of this manual, If you can’t find an answer to your question in this manual or in the Ubuntu but it is worth checking out if you need to run Windows applications under Ubuntu. Desktop Guide, you can contact the Ubuntu community through the Ubuntu Forums (http://ubuntuforums.org).Many Ubuntu users open an Figure 2.14: The built-in system help provides topic-based help for Ubuntu. We encourage you to check any information account on the forums to receive help, and in turn provide support to others you find on other websites with multiple as they gain more knowledge. Another useful resource is the Ubuntu Wiki sources when possible, but only follow direc- tions if you understand them completely. (https://wiki.ubuntu.com), a website maintained by the Ubuntu community.
  • 37. 3 Working with Ubuntu All the applications you need If you are migrating from a Windows or Mac platform, you may wonder if the programs that you once used are available for Ubuntu. Some of the programs you already use have native Linux versions. And, for those that don’t, there are free and open-source applications that will cover your needs. is section will recommend some alternates that will work well on Ubuntu. Most of the applications listed in this section are available via You can search for more applications in the the Soware Center. ose followed by an asterisk (*) can be downloaded Ubuntu Software Center by the category that you are interested in. directly from their official websites. Office Suites ‣ Windows: Microso Office, LibreOffice ‣ Mac  : iWork, Microso Office, LibreOffice ‣ Linux: LibreOffice, KOffice,  Office, Kexi (database application) In Ubuntu you may choose among many office suites. e most popular suite is the LibreOffice (formerly OpenOffice). Included in the suite: ‣ Writer—word processor ‣ Calc—spreadsheet ‣ Impress—presentation manager ‣ Draw—drawing program ‣ Base—database ‣ Math—equation editor LibreOffice Suite is installed by default. Note that Base is not installed by default and it can be installed through Ubuntu Soware Center. Email Applications ‣ Windows: Microso Outlook, Mozilla underbird ‣ Mac  : Mail.app, Microso Outlook, Mozilla underbird ‣ Linux: Mozilla underbird, Evolution, KMail As with office suites, there are multiple options for email applications. One very popular email application is Mozilla underbird, which is also available for Windows. underbird is the default email application in Ubuntu. Another option is Evolution—similar to Microso Outlook, it also provides a calendar. Web Browsers ‣ Windows: Microso Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Chromium, Google Chrome ‣ Mac  : Safari, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Chromium, Google Chrome ‣ Linux: Mozilla Firefox, Opera*, Chromium, Google Chrome*, Epiphany Opera is available for download from http:// e most popular web browsers can be installed directly from the www.opera.com/browser/download/. Google Chrome is available for download from https:// Ubuntu Soware Center. www.google.com/chrome/.
  • 38.      . PDF Readers ‣ Windows: Adobe Reader ‣ Mac  : Adobe Reader ‣ Linux: Evince, Adobe Reader, Okular Evince is a user-friendly and minimalistic reader, and it is the default PDF reader. If Evince doesn’t cover your needs, Adobe Reader is available for Ubuntu too. Multimedia Players ‣ Windows: Windows Media Player, VLC ‣ Mac  : icktime, VLC ‣ Linux: Totem, VLC, MPlayer, Kaffeine For multimedia, Ubuntu users have a wide variety of options for high quality players. Two popular and powerful media players for Ubuntu are VLC and Mplayer. Meanwhile, the classic and user-friendly Totem is the default media player in Ubuntu. Music Players and Podcatchers ‣ Windows: Windows Media Player, iTunes, Winamp ‣ Mac  : iTunes ‣ Linux: Rhythmbox, Banshee, Amarok, Audacity, Miro ere are several options for listening to music with Ubuntu: Rhythmbox (installed by default), Rhythmbox, and Amarok, among many others. With these you can listen to music and your favorite podcasts. Audacity is similar to Winamp. ere is Miro for those of you who watch video podcasts and TV series from the Internet. CD/DVD Burning ‣ Windows: Nero Burning ROM, InfraRecorder ‣ Mac  : Burn, Toast Titanium ‣ Linux: Brasero, Kb, Gnome-baker e are several popular disk burning applications such as Gnome-baker, Brasero, Ubuntu’s default CD burner, and Kb. ese burners are powerful tools, offering user-friendly interfaces, many features and they are all open source and free of charge! Photo Management ‣ Windows: Microso Office Picture Manager, Picasa ‣ Mac  : Aperture, Picasa ‣ Linux: Shotwell, gumb, Gwenview, F-Spot You can view and manage your favorite photos with Shotwell, Ubuntu’s default photo manager, or with gumb, Gwenview, and F-Spot. Graphics Editors ‣ Windows: Adobe Photoshop, GIMP
  • 39.     ‣ Mac  : Adobe Photoshop, GIMP ‣ Linux: GIMP, Inkscape GIMP is a very powerful graphics editor. You can create your own graphics, taper your photographs, modify your pictures. GIMP, a power- ful alternative to Photoshop, covers the needs of novice users, professional photographers, and designers. GIMP is not loaded by default, but can be installed via the Soware Center. Instant Messaging ‣ Windows: Windows Live Messenger, AIM, Yahoo! Messenger, Google Talk ‣ Mac  : Windows Live Messenger, AIM, Yahoo! Messenger, Adium, iChat ‣ Linux: Empathy, Pidgin, Kopete, aMSN None of the other platform  clients have Linux versions. However, you can use Pidgin, Empathy or Kopete to communicate over most proto- cols including: AIM, MSN, Google Talk (Jabber/XMPP), Facebook, Yahoo!, and ICQ. is means you need only one client to communicate with all of your friends. e drawback is that some of these clients have limited video support. If you are using MSN exclusively, aMSN may be worth a try. VoIP Applications ‣ Windows: Skype, Google Video Chat ‣ Mac  : Skype, Google Video Chat ‣ Linux: Ekiga, Skype, Google Video Chat VoIP technologies allow you to talk to people over the Internet. e most popular such application is Skype, which is available for Linux. An open-source alternative Ekiga supports voice communication using the SIP protocol. Note that Ekiga isn’t compatible with the Skype. BitTorrent Clients ‣ Windows: µTorrent, Azureus ‣ Mac  : Transmission, Azureus ‣ Linux: Transmission, Deluge, Azureus, KTorrent, Flush, Vuze, BitStorm Lite ere are a number of BitTorrent clients for Ubuntu: Transmission, Ubuntu’s default client, is simple and light-weight, Deluge, Azureus and KTorrent offer many features and can satisfy the most demanding of users. Getting online is section of the manual will help you to check your connection to the Internet and help you configure it where needed. Ubuntu can connect to the Internet using a wired, wireless, or a dial up connection. Ubuntu . also supports more advanced connection methods, which will be briefly discussed at the end of this section.
  • 40.      . A wired connection is when your computer connects to the Internet using an Ethernet cable. is is usually connected to a wall socket or a networking device—like a switch or a router. A wireless connection is when your computer connects to the Internet In order to connect wirelessly, you must be in using a wireless radio network—usually known as Wi-Fi. Most routers now a location with a working wireless network. To set up your own wireless network, you will come with wireless capability, as do most laptops and netbooks. Because of need to purchase and install a wireless router this, Wi-Fi is the most common connection type for these types of devices. or access point. Some locations may already Wireless connectivity makes laptops and netbooks more portable when have a publicly accessible wireless networks available. If you are unsure whether your moving to different rooms of a house and while traveling. computer has a wireless card, check with your A dialup connection is when your computer uses a modem to connect to manufacturer. the Internet through a telephone line. NetworkManager In order to connect to the Internet using Ubuntu, you need to use the Net- Figure 3.1: Different connection states and workManager utility. NetworkManager allows you to turn network con- their respective icons. nections on or off, manage wired and wireless networks, and make other network connections, such as dial up, mobile broadband, and VPN’s. You can access NetworkManager by using its icon found the top panel. is icon may look different depending on your current connection state. Clicking this icon will reveal a list of available network connections. e current connection (if any) will have the word “disconnect” underneath it. You can click on “disconnect” to manually disconnect from that network. is menu also allows you to view technical details about your current connection or edit all connection seings. In the image to the right you Figure 3.2: Here you can see the currently will see a tick mark next to “Enable Networking.” Click on the tick mark active connection is “Wired connection 1.” to disable all network connections. Clicking a second time will enable networking again. is can be very useful when you are required to turn off all wireless communications, like in an airplane. Establishing a wired connection If you have an Ethernet cable running from a wall socket or networking Are you already online? If the NetworkManager device, such as a switch or router, then you will want to setup a wired icon in the top panel shows a connection then you may have successfully connected during connection in Ubuntu. the Ubuntu setup process. You can also simply In order to connect to the Internet with a wired connection, you need to open a browser and see if you have access know whether your network supports  (Dynamic Host Configuration to the Internet. If so, you do not need to do anything for the rest of this section. Protocol).  is a way for your computer to automatically be configured to access your network and/or Internet connection.  is usually auto- matically configured on your router. is is usually the quickest and easiest way of establishing a connection to the Internet. If you are unsure whether your router is setup to use , you may wish to contact your ’s (In- ternet Service Provider) customer service line to check. If your router isn’t configured to use  then they will also be able to tell you what configu- ration seings you need in order to get online. Automatic connections with DHCP If your network supports  then you may already be set up for online access. To check this, click on the NetworkManager icon. ere should be a “Wired Network” heading in the menu. If “Wired connection ” appears directly underneath, then your machine is currently connected and proba- bly setup for . If “Disconnected” appears in gray underneath the wired network section, look below to see if an option labeled “Wired connec- Figure 3.3: This window displays your IP address and other connection information.
  • 41.     tion ” appears in the list. If so, click on it to aempt to establish a wired connection. To check if you are online, click on the NetworkManager icon in the An IP (Internet Protocol) address is a unique top panel and select the Connection Information option. You should see a number assigned to your machine so that your router can identify you on the network. Think window showing details of your connection. If your  address is displayed of it like a phone number for your computer. as ... or starts with ., then your computer was not successfully Having this unique address allows the router assigned connection information through . If it shows another address to speak to your computer, and therefore send/receive data. (e.g., ...), then it is likely that your  connection to the If you are still not online after following these router was successful. To test your Internet connection, you may want to steps, you may need to try setting up your open the Firefox web browser to try loading a web page. More information network connection manually using a static IP address. on using Firefox can be found later in this chapter. Manual configuration with static address If your network does not support  then you need to know a few items of information before you can get online. If you do not know any of this information, then you call your . ‣ An  address—is is a unique address used for identifying your com- puter on the network. An  address is always given in four numbered groups, separated by dots, for example – .... When connect- ing using , this address will periodically change (hence, the name ”dynamic”). However, if you have configured a static  address, your IP address will never change. ‣ A network mask—is tells your computer the size of the network to which it is being connected. It is formaed the same way as the  ad- dress, but usually looks something like .... ‣ A gateway—is is the  address of the device that your machine looks to for access to the Internet. Usually, this will be the router’s  address. ‣  server—is is the  address of the  (Domain Name Service) server.  is what your computer uses to resolve  addresses to domain If you do not know your ISP’s DNS names. For example http://www.ubuntu.com resolves to .... server addresses, Google has DNS servers that anyone in the world is is the  address of the Ubuntu website on the Internet.  is can use for free. The addresses of used so you don’t have to remember  addresses. Domain names (like these servers are: Primary – 8.8.8.8 ubuntu.com) are much easier to remember. You will need at least one Secondary – 8.8.4.4  server address but you can enter up to three addresses in case one server is unavailable. To manually configure a wired connection, click on the NetworkManager icon and select Edit Connections. Make sure you are looking at the “Wired tab” inside the “Network Connections” window. e list may already have an entry, such as “Wired connection ” or a similar name. If a connection is listed, select it and click the Edit buon. If no connection is listed, click the Add buon. If you are adding a connection, you need to provide a name for the connection. is will distinguish the connection being added from any other connections added in future. In the “Connection Name” field, choose a name such as “Wired Home.” To setup the connection: . Make sure that the Connect automatically option is selected under the connection name. . Switch to the v Settings tab. . Change the Method to “Manual.” Figure 3.4: In this window you can manually edit . Click on the Add buon next to the empty list of addresses. a connection.
  • 42.      . . Enter your  address in the field below the Address header. . Click to the right of the  address, directly below the Netmask header and enter your network mask. If you are unsure, “...” is the most common. . Click on the right of the network mask directly below the Gateway header and enter the address of your gateway. . In the  Servers field below, enter the address of your  server(s). If you are entering more than one, separate them with commas—for example, “..., ...”. . Click Apply to save your changes. A  address is a hardware address for your computer’s network card. Entering this information is sometimes important when using a cable modem connection. If you know the  address of your network card, this can be entered in the appropriate text field in the Wired tab of the editing window. To find the MAC addresses for all installed networking devices, open a terminal window, and at the command line prompt, type ifconfig. is will display a lot of information about each of the network devices installed on the computer. e wired devices will be labeled as LAN, LAN, etc. e wireless devices will appear as WLAN, WLAN, etc. When you have returned to the Network Connections screen, your newly added connection should now be listed. Click Close to return to the desktop. If your connection was configured correctly, the NetworkManager icon should have changed to show an active wired connection. To test if your connection is properly set up, simply open a web browser. If you can access the Internet, then you are connected! Wireless If your computer is equipped with a wireless (Wi-Fi) card and you have a wireless network nearby, you should be able to set up a wireless connection in Ubuntu. Connecting to a wireless network for the first time If your computer has a wireless network card, you can connect to a wireless To improve speed and reliability of your network. Most laptops and netbooks have a built-in wireless networking wireless connection, try moving closer to your router or wireless access point. card. Ubuntu is usually able to detect any wireless network in range of your computer. To see a list of wireless networks, click on the NetworkMan- ager icon. Under the “Wireless Networks” heading you should see a list of available wireless networks. Each network will be shown by its name and a signal meter to the le showing its relative signal strength. e signal meter looks like a set of bars similar to what is seen when viewing signal strength of a cell phone. Simply put, the more bars, the stronger the signal. A wireless network can be open to anyone, or it can be protected with a password. A small padlock will be displayed by the signal bar if any wireless network within range are password-protected. You will need to know the correct password in order to connect to these secured wireless networks. To connect to a wireless network, select the desired network by clicking on its name within the list. is will be the name that was used during the installation of the wireless router or access point. Most s (Internet
  • 43.     service providers) provide pre-configured routers with a sticker on them detailing the current wireless network name and password. Most publicly accessible wireless networks will be easily identifiable by the name used for the wireless network—for example “Starbucks-Wireless.” If the network is unprotected (i.e., the signal meter does not show a pad- lock), a connection should be established within a few seconds—and with- out a password required. e NetworkManager icon in the top panel will animate as Ubuntu aempts to connect to the network. If the connection is successful, the icon will change to display a signal meter. An on-screen notification message will also appear informing you that the connection was successful. If the network is password-protected, Ubuntu will display a window called “Wireless Network Authentication Required” as it tries to make a connection. is means that a valid password is required to make a connec- tion. is is what the screen should look like: Figure 3.5: Enter your wireless network password. If you know the password, enter it in the Password field and then click on the Connect buon. As you type the password, it will be obscured from view to prevent others from reading the password as you type it. . Once the To verify the characters you are entering for password is entered, click on the Connect buon. e NetworkManager the password, you can view the password by selecting the Show Password check box. Then, icon in the top panel will animate as Ubuntu aempts to connect to the you can make the password obscure again by network. If the connection is successful, the icon will change to display a selecting the Show password check box again signal meter. An on-screen notification message will also appear informing you that the connection was successful. If you entered the password incorrectly, or if it doesn’t match the cor- rect password (for example if it has recently been changed and you have forgoen), NetworkManager will make another aempt to connect to the network, and the “Wireless Network Authentication Required” window will re-appear so that you can re-type the password. You can hit the Cancel but- ton to abort the connection. If you do not know the correct password, you may need to call you ’s customer support line or contact your network administrator. Once you have successfully established a wireless connection, Ubuntu will store these seings (including the password) to make it easier to con- nect to this same wireless network in the future. You may also be prompted to select a keyring password here. e keyring stores passwords in one place so you can access them all in the future by remembering just the keyring password. Connecting to a saved wireless network If you have previously established a connection to a wireless network, this connection information will be stored by Ubuntu. is will allow you to connect to the network again without having to re-enter the password. In addition, Ubuntu will automatically try to connect to a wireless net-
  • 44.      . work in range if it has the seings saved. is works on both open and secure wireless networks. If you have numerous wireless networks in range that are saved on your computer, Ubuntu may choose to connect to a one network while you may want to connect to another network. To remedy this action, click on the NetworkManager icon. A list of wireless networks will appear along with their signal meters. Simply click on the network to which you wish to connect, and Ubuntu will disconnect from the current network and aempt to connect to the one you have selected. If the network is secure and Ubuntu has the details for this network saved, Ubuntu will automatically connect. If the details for this network connection are not saved, or incorrect, or have changed, then you will be prompted to enter the network password again. If the network is open (no password required), all of this will happen automatically and the connection will be established. Connecting to a hidden wireless network In some environments, you may need to connect to a hidden wireless net- work. ese hidden networks do not broadcast their names, and, therefore, their names will not appear in the list of available wireless networks even if they are in range. In order to connect to a hidden wireless network, you will need to get its name and security details from your network adminis- trator or . To connect to a hidden wireless network: . Click on NetworkManager in the top panel. . Select Connect to a hidden wireless network. Ubuntu will then open the “Connect to Hidden Wireless Network” window. . In the Network name field, enter the name of the network. is is also known as the  (Service Set Identifier). You must enter the name ex- actly how it was given to you. For example, if the name is “Ubuntu- Wireless,” entering “ubuntu-wireless” will not work as the “U” and “W” are both uppercase in the correct name. . In the Wireless security field, select one of the options. If the network is an open network, leave the field set to “None.” If you do not know the correct seing for the field, you will not be able to connect to the hidden network. . Click the Connect buon. If the network is secure, you will be prompted for the password. Provided you have entered all of the details correctly, the network should then connect, and you will receive an on-screen notification informing you that the connection was a success. As is the case with visible wireless networks, hidden wireless network seings will be saved once a connection is made, and the wireless network will then appear in the list of saved connections NetworkManager. Disabling and enabling your wireless card By default, wireless access is enabled if you have a wireless card installed in Many modern laptops also have a physical your computer. In certain environments (like on airplanes), you may need switch/button built into the chassis that provides a way to quickly enable/disable the to temporarily disable your wireless card. wireless card. To disable your wireless card, click on the NetworkManager icon and deselect the Enable Wireless option. Your wireless radio will now be turned off, and your computer will no longer search for wireless networks.
  • 45.     To reactivate your wireless card, simply reverse the process above. Ubuntu will then begin to search for wireless networks automatically. If you are in range of a saved network, you will automatically be connected. Changing an existing wireless network At times you may want to change the seings of a saved wireless network —for example, when the wireless password gets changed. To edit a saved wireless network connection: . Click on the NetworkManager icon and select Edit Connections… . A “Network Connections” window will open. Click on the Wireless tab. . By default, saved networks are in chronological order with the most recently connected at the top. Find the network you want to edit, click on it, and click on the Edit buon. . Ubuntu will now open a window called “Editing ⟨connection name⟩”, where ⟨connection name⟩ is the name of the connection you are editing. is window will display a number of tabs. . Above the tabs, there is a field called Connection name where you can change the name of the connection to give it a more recognizable name. . If the Connect automatically option is not selected, Ubuntu will detect the wireless network but will not aempt a connection until it is se- lected from the NetworkManager menu. Select or deselect this option as needed. . On the Wireless tab, you may need to edit the  field. A  is the wireless connection’s network name. If this field isn’t set correctly, Ubuntu will not be able to connect to the wireless network in question. . Below the  is a Mode field. e “Infrastructure” mode means that you would be connecting to a wireless router or access point. e “ad- hoc” mode is for a computer-to-computer connection (where one com- puter shares another’s connection) and is oen only used in advanced cases. . On the Wireless Security tab, you can change the Security field. A selection of “None” means that you are using an open network that doesn’t require a password. Other selection in this tab may required additional information:  /-bit Key is an older security seing is still in use by some older wireless devices. If your network uses this method of security, you will need to enter a key in the Key field that will appear when this mode is selected.  -bit Passphrase is the same older security as above. However, instead of having a key, your network administrator should have provided you with a passphrase to connect to the network.  &  Personal is the most common security mode for wireless networking. Once you select this mode, you will need to enter a password in the Password field. If your network administrator requires , Dynamic  or  &  Enterprise then you will need to have the administrator help you with those modes. . In the v Settings tab, you can change the Method field from “Auto- matic ()” to “Manual” or one of the other methods. For seing up manual seings (also known as a static address), please see the section above on manual setup for wired network connections.
  • 46.      . . When you finish making changes to the connection, click Apply to save your changes and close the window. You can click Cancel at any time to close the window without saving any changes. . Finally, click Close on the “Network Connections” window to return to the desktop. Aer clicking Apply, any changes made to the network connection will take effect immediately. Other connection methods ere are other ways to get connected with Ubuntu. With NetworkManager, you can configure “Mobile Broadband” connec- tions to connect to the Internet through your cellular data carrier. You can connect to  (Digital Subscriber Line) networks, a method of connecting to the Internet through your phone line via a modem. It is also possible for NetworkManager to establish a  (Virtual Private Network) connection. ese are most commonly used to create a secure connection to a workplace network. e instructions for making connections using “Mobile Broadband,” , or  are beyond the scope of this guide. Browsing the web Once you have connected to the Internet, you should be able to browse the web. Mozilla Firefox is the default application for this in Ubuntu. Figure 3.6: The default Ubuntu home page for the Firefox web browser. Starting Firefox ere are several ways to start Firefox. By default Ubuntu has the Firefox icon within the Launcher (the vertical bar down the le side of the screen). Select this icon to open Firefox. Or, open the Dash (the top-most icon in the
  • 47.     Launcher) and search for ‘firefox’ using the search box. If your keyboard has a “” buon, you can press that buon to start Firefox. Navigating web pages Viewing your homepage When you start Firefox, you will see your home page. By default, this is the Ubuntu Start Page. To quickly go to your home page, press Alt+Home on your keyboard or press on the home icon in Firefox. Navigating to another page To navigate to a new web page, you need to enter its Internet address (also URL stands for uniform resource locator, which known as a ) into the Location Bar. s normally begin with “hp://” tells the computer how to find something on the Internet—such as a document, web page or followed by one or more names that identify the address. One example an email address. WWW stands for World Wide is “http://www.ubuntu.com/.” (Normally, you can omit the “hp://“ part. Web, which means the web pages by which Firefox will fill it in for you.) most people interact with the Internet. Figure 3.7: You can enter a web address or search the Internet by typing in the location bar. To navigate: . Double-click in the Location Bar, or press Ctrl+L, to highlight the  that is already there. . Enter the  of the page you want to visit. e  you type replaces any text already in the Location Bar. . Press Enter. If you don’t know the  that you need, type a search term into the Search Bar to the right of the Location bar. Your preferred search engine —Google by default—will return a list of websites for you to choose from. (You can also enter your query directly into the Location Bar). Selecting a link Most web pages contain links that you can select. ese are known as “hyperlinks.” A hyperlink can let you move to another page, download a document, change the content of the page, and more. To select a link: . Move the mouse pointer until it changes to a pointing finger. is hap- pens whenever the pointer is over a link. Most links are underlined text, but buons and pictures on a web page can also be links. . Click the link once. While Firefox locates the link’s page, status messages will appear at the boom of the window. Retracing your steps If you want to visit a page you have viewed before, there are several ways To go backwards and forwards you can also use to do so. Alt+Left and Alt+Right respectively. ‣ To go back or forward one page, press the Ba or Forward buon by the le side of the Location Bar.
  • 48.      . ‣ To go back or forward more than one page, click-and-hold on the re- spective buon. You will see a list of pages you have recently visited. To return to a page, select it from the list. ‣ To see a list of any s you have entered into the Location Bar, press the down arrow at the right end of the Location Bar. Choose a page from the list. ‣ To choose from pages you have visited during the current session, open the History menu and choose from the list in the lower section of the menu. ‣ To choose from pages you have visited over the past few months, open the History ‣ Show All History (or press Ctrl+Shift+H). Firefox opens a “Library” window showing a list of folders, the first of which is “History.” Select a suitable sub-folder, or enter a search term in the search bar (at the top right), to find pages you have viewed before. Double-click a result to open the page. Stopping and reloading If a page is loading too slowly or you no longer wish to view a page, press The Reload button is at the right end of the Esc to cancel it. To reload the current page if it might have changed since Location Bar. you loaded it, press on the Reload buon or press Ctrl+R. Opening new windows At times, you may want to have more than one browser window open. is may help you to organize your browsing session beer, or to separate web pages that you are viewing for different reasons. ere are four ways to create a new window: ‣ On the top bar, select File ‣ New Window. ‣ Press Ctrl+N. ‣ Right-click on Firefox’s icon on the Launcher and select Open New Window. ‣ Click on Firefox’s icon on the Launcher using your middle mouse buon. Once a new window has opened, you can use it exactly the same as the first window—including navigation and opening tabs. You can open multiple windows. Opening a link in a new window Sometimes, you may want to click a link to navigate to another web page, but do not want the original to close. To do this, you can open the link in its own independent window. ere are two ways to open a link in its own window: ‣ Right-click a link and select Open Link in New Window. ‣ Press-and-hold the Shift key while clicking a link. Tabbed browsing An alternative to opening new windows is to use Tabbed Browsing instead. Tabbed browsing lets you open several web pages within a single Firefox A new tab is independent of other tabs in the window, each independent of the other. is frees space on your desktop as same way that new windows are independent of other windows. You can even mix-and-match you do not have open a separate window for each new web page. You can —for example, one window may contain tabs for your emails, while another window has tabs for your work.
  • 49.     open, close, and reload web pages in one place without having to switch to another window. You can alternate quickly between different tabs by using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Tab. Opening a new blank tab ere are three ways to create a new blank tab: ‣ Click on the Open new tab buon (a green plus-sign) on the right side of the last tab. ‣ On the top bar, open File ‣ New Tab. ‣ Press Ctrl+T. When you create a new tab, it contains a blank page with the Location Bar focused. Typing a web address () or other search term to open a website in the new tab. Opening a link in its own tab Sometimes, you may want to click a link to navigate to another web page, but do not want the original to close. To do this, you can open the link in its own tab. ere are several ways to open a link in its own tab. A tab always opens “in the background”—in other words, the focus remains on the original ‣ Right-click a link and select Open Link in New Tab. tab. The last method (Ctrl+Shift) is an exception; it focuses the new tab immediately. ‣ Press-and-hold the Ctrl key while clicking a link. ‣ Click the link using either the middle mouse buon or both le and right mouse buons simultaneously. ‣ Drag the link to a blank space on the tab bar or onto the Open new tab buon. ‣ Press-and-hold Ctrl+Shift while clicking a link. Closing a tab Once you have finished viewing a web page in a tab, you have various ways to close it: ‣ Click on the Close buon on the right side of the tab. ‣ Click the tab with the middle mouse buon or the mouse wheel. ‣ Press Ctrl+W. ‣ Right-click the tab and select Close Tab. Restoring a closed tab Sometimes, you may close the wrong tab by accident, or want to bring back a tab that you have recently closed. Bring back a tab in one of the following two ways: ‣ Press Ctrl+Shift+T to re-open the most recently closed tab. ‣ Select History ‣ Recently Closed Tabs, and choose the name of the tab to restore.
  • 50.      . Changing the tab order Move a tab to a different location on the tab bar by dragging it to a new location using your mouse. While you are dragging the tab, Firefox displays a small indicator to show the tab’s new location. Moving a tab between windows You can move a tab into a new Firefox window or, if one is already open, into a different Firefox window. Drag a tab away from the tab bar, and it will open into a new window. Drag it from the tab bar into the tab bar of another open Firefox window, and it will move there instead. Searching You can search the web from within Firefox without first visiting the home page of the search engine. By default, Firefox will search the web using the Google search engine. Searching the web To search the web in Firefox, type a few words into the Firefox search Bar. For example, if you want to find information about the Ubuntu: . Move your cursor to the Sear Bar using your mouse or press Ctrl+K. . Type the phrase Ubuntu. Your typing replaces any text currently in the Search Bar. . Press the magnifying glass or Enter to search. Search results from Google for “Ubuntu” will appear in the Firefox win- dow. Selecting search engines If you do not want to use Google as your search engine in the Search Bar, you can change the search engine that Firefox uses. To change your preferred search engine, press the search logo (at the Figure 3.8: These are the other search engines le of your Search Bar—Google by default) and choose the search engine of you can use—by default—from the Firefox your choice. Some search engines, such as Bing, Google and Yahoo, search search bar. the whole web; others, such as Amazon and Wikipedia, search only specific sites. Searching the web for words selected in a web page Sometimes, you may want to search for a phrase that you see on a web page. You can copy and paste the phrase into the Search Bar, but there is a quicker way. . Highlight the word or phrase in a web page using your le mouse but- ton. . Right-click the highlighted text and select Sear [Sear Engine] for [your selected words]. Firefox passes the highlighted text to the search engine, and opens a new tab with the results.
  • 51.     Searching within a page Figure 3.9: You can search within web pages using the Find Toolbar. You may want to look for specific text within the web page you are viewing. To find text within the current page in Firefox: . Choose Edit ‣ Find or press Ctrl+F to open the Find Toolbar at the boom of Firefox. . Enter your search query into the Find field in the Find Toolbar. e search automatically begins as soon as you type something into the field. . Once some text has been matched on the web page, you can: ‣ Click on Next to find text in the page that is below the current cursor position. ‣ Click on Previous to find text that is above the current cursor posi- tion. ‣ Click on Highlight all to highlight all occurrences of your search words in the current page. ‣ Select the Mat case option to limit the search to text that has the same capitalization as your search words. To quickly find the same word or phrase again, press F3. You can skip opening the Find Toolbar altogether. . Turn on the relevant Accessibility option with Edit ‣ Preferences ‣ Advanced ‣ General ‣ Accessibility ‣ Sear for text when I start typ- ing ‣ Close. . Now, provided your cursor is not within a text field, when you start typing, it will automatically start searching for text. Viewing web pages full screen To display more web content on the screen, you can use Full Screen mode. Full Screen mode hides everything but the main content. To enable Full Screen mode, choose View ‣ Full Screen or press F11. While in full-screen mode, move your mouse to the top of the screen to reveal the  and search bars. Press F11 to return to normal mode. Copying and saving pages With Firefox, you can copy part of a page so that you can paste it elsewhere, or save the page or part of a page as a file on your computer. Copying part of a page To copy text, links or images from a page: . Highlight the text and images with your mouse. . Right-click the highlighted text and select Copy, or press Ctrl+C. To copy just a single image, it is not necessary to highlight it. Just right- click the image and select Copy. You can paste the results into another application, such as LibreOffice.
  • 52.      . Copying a link To copy a text or image link () from a page: . Position the pointer over the text, link or image. Your mouse pointer changes to a pointing finger. . Right-click the link or image to open a pop-up menu. . Select Copy Link Location. You can paste the link into other applications or into Firefox’s Location Bar. Saving all or part of a page To save an entire page in Firefox: . Choose File ‣ Save Page As from the top bar, or press Ctrl+S. Firefox opens the “Save As” window. . Choose a location for the saved page. . Type a file name for the page. . Press Save. To save an image from a page: . Position the mouse pointer over the image. . Right-click the image and select Save Image As. Firefox opens the “Save Image” window. . Choose a location for the saved image. . Enter a file name for the image. . Press Save. Changing your home page Firefox shows the home page when it opens. By default, this is the Ubuntu Start Page. You can change your default home page to a new one, or even to several new ones. Figure 3.10: Change Firefox settings in this window. To change your home page:
  • 53.     . Navigate to the page that you would like to become your new home page. If you want Firefox to open more than one tab when it starts, open a new tab and navigate to the extra page as many times as you would like. The home page can also be set by entering the . Choose Edit ‣ Preferences ‣ General ‣ Startup ‣ Use Current Pages ‣ addresses that should be open in the Home Page, with a pipe (“|”) separating pages to be Close. opened in separate tabs. Download settings In Edit ‣ Preferences ‣ General ‣ Downloads, you can hide or show the The Downloads window shows the progress Downloads window, tell Firefox where to place downloaded files, and of currently downloading files, and lists files downloaded in the past. It can be used to open whether or not to ask where each time. or re-download files. Bookmarks When browsing the web you may want to come back to certain web pages again without having to remember the . To do this, you bookmark each page. ese bookmarks are saved in the web browser, and you can use them to re-open to those web pages. Bookmarking a page Aer navigating to a web page you can save its location by bookmarking it. ere are two ways to bookmark a page: ‣ From the top bar, choose Bookmarks ‣ Bookmark is Page, or press Ctrl+D. A window opens, allowing you to provide a descriptive name for the bookmark and a location (within the browser’s bookmarks) to save it. Press Done to save. ‣ Press the star on the right-hand side in the Location Bar. It turns yellow. is saves the page in the Unsorted Bookmarks folder. Navigating to a bookmarked page To navigate to a bookmarked page, open the Bookmarks menu from the top bar, and choose your bookmark. Firefox opens the bookmark in the current tab. You can reveal the bookmarks, including the Unsorted Bookmarks, in a sidebar on the le of the browser window. Select View ‣ Sidebar ‣ Bookmarks, or press Ctrl+B. Repeat, or press the close button at its top, to hide the sidebar. Deleting or editing a bookmark To delete or edit a bookmark, do one of the following: ‣ If you are viewing the page already, the star in the Location Bar will be yellow. Press it. Firefox opens a small pop-up window, where you can either Remove Bookmark or edit the bookmark. ‣ Select Bookmarks ‣ Show All Bookmarks or press Shift+Ctrl+O. In the window that opens, you can navigate to bookmarks. Select the one you would like to change. To delete, right-click and choose Delete or press Delete on your keyboard. To edit, change the details shown at the boom of the window.
  • 54.      . History Whenever you are browsing the web, Firefox saves your browsing history. is allows you to come back to a web page that you have recently visited without needing to remember or bookmark the page’s . To see your most recent history, open the History menu from the top bar. e menu displays several of the most recent web pages that you have viewed. Choose one of the pages to return to it. To view the complete history, either: ‣ Select View ‣ History or press Ctrl+H to view the history in a sidebar (this replaces the bookmarks sidebar if it is open). (Repeat, or press the close button at its top, to hide the sidebar.) ‣ Select History ‣ Show All History or press Shift+Ctrl+H to view the history in a pop-up window. Your browsing history is categorized as “Today,” “Yesterday,” “Last  days,” “is month,” the previous five months by name, and finally “Older than  months.” If history for a category does not exist, that category will not be listed. Select one of the date categories in the sidebar to expand it and reveal the pages that you visited during that time. Once you find the page you want, select it to re-display it. You can also search for a page by its title or . Enter a few leers from one or more words or, optionally, the  in the Sear field at the top of the history sidebar. e sidebar displays a list of web pages matching your search words. Select the page you want. (You can even do this in the Location Bar, saving you from having to open the History sidebar or pop-up window.) Clearing private data Firefox stores all its data only on your computer. Nevertheless, if you share your computer, you may at times want to delete all private data. Select Tools ‣ Clear Recent History or press Shift+Ctrl+Delete. Choose your Time range to clear, and under Details which items to clear, and press Clear Now. Preventing Firefox from recording private data You can start “private browsing,” where Firefox will not record anything permanently. is lasts until you turn it off or until you restart Firefox. Choose Tools ‣ Start Private Browsing or press Shift+Ctrl+P. Press the buon Start Private Browsing to confirm. As long as you remain in this mode, Firefox will not record browsing, download, form or search history, or cookies, nor will it cache files. However, if you bookmark anything or download files, these will be retained. Repeat Tools ‣ Start Private Browsing or Shift+Ctrl+P, or restart Fire- fox, to end private browsing. Using a different web browser If you choose to install a different web browser on your computer, you may want to use it as the default browser when you click links from emails, instant messages, and other places. Canonical supports Firefox and Chromium (Google’s Linux version of Chrome), but there are several others that you can choose from.
  • 55.     Figure 3.11: The Default Applications where you can change your preferred browser. To change your preferred web browser, open Session Indicator from the top panel on the far right-hand side, and open System Settings ‣ Details ‣ Default Applications. Choose your preferred web browser from the drop- down menu Web. Reading and composing email Introduction to Thunderbird underbird is an email client developed by Mozilla and is easy to setup and use. It is free, fast, and comes packed full of useful features. Even if you are new to Ubuntu and underbird, you will be up and running in no time, checking your email and staying in touch with friends and family. Setting up Thunderbird In the top right corner of the Ubuntu desktop you will see an envelope icon in the notification area. is is the messaging menu. From here, you can launch underbird by clicking set up mail. Alternatively, you can click the Ubuntu buon in the top le corner of the screen at the top of the Launcher to bring up the Dash and type thunderbird into the search box. Once underbird opens, you will be greeted by a pop-up box prompting you to setup your email account. Figure 3.12: Setting up Thunderbird Enter your name in the first text box, your email address in the second
  • 56.      . text box (for example, [email protected]), and your email password in the third text box. Once completed, click the continue buon. underbird will automati- cally set up your email account for you. When underbird finishes detect- ing your email seings, click create account and underbird will do the rest. You can also set underbird as your default news and  reader by checking the boxes in the pop-up box that appear aer you click create your account. If you don’t want to see this message box every time you start underbird, simply deselect Always perform this e when starting underbird. You are now ready to start using underbird. Around the Thunderbird workspace Now that you have your email account set up, lets get to know the un- derbird workspace. underbird is designed to be very user-friendly and easy to navigate. When you open the application, you will see the main workspace with your email folders (all folders window) on the le. On the right of the screen, you will see two windows. e top-right window dis- plays a list of your received email, and the boom-right window displays the current email you are viewing. e size of these windows can be easily resized to suit your viewing environment. To resize the windows, simply le-click and hold the dividing bar that separates the two windows and drag the bar up or down to the desired position. e All Folders window is where you can see your mail folders. is window can also include: Inbox Where your email is stored and accessed Email address folder You will see one of these folders for each of the ac- counts you have setup Dras Where your dra emails are stored Sent mail Where the emails you have sent are stored Spam is is where suspected spam email is stored so you can check them to make sure you haven’t lost any important emails Trash is is where messages you’ve deleted are stored so you can double check to make sure you haven’t accidentally deleted an important email (also one of the local folders) Important is is where emails you have marked as important are stored Starred is is where emails you have marked with a star are stored Personal is is where emails you have marked as personal are stored Receipts You can move important receipts to this folder. Travel You can use this folder to store travel emails such as flight times and bookings Work You can store work emails in this folder to keep them separate from your personal email Outbox Where the emails you are in the process of sending are stored (also one of the local folders) Across the top of the underbird workspace, you will see four con- trol buons, get mail, write, address book, and tag. ese are used to get your mail, write your mail, access your address book, and tag your email messages. At the top-right of the All Folders window, you will see a set of quick filter buons, unread, starred, contact, tags, andattament. You can use these buons to filter your email messages so that you only see your unread mail, your favorite mail (starred), mail from people in your address book, mail you have tagged, and mail that includes aachments.
  • 57.     If you are accustomed to a more traditional desktop and you have un- derbird maximized to full screen, you might be wondering where the menus are located. ey are still there, and if you want to access them, move your mouse to the top of the screen and you will see the familiar menus: file, edit, view, go, message, tools, and help. At the top of the window that displays your email, you can see five action buons, reply, forward, arive, junk, and delete. You will find these very useful for quickly replying to email, forwarding your email to another person, archiving (backing up) your email, marking an email as junk mail, and quickly deleting an email. To the le of these quick action buons, you will see information about the email you are viewing that includes the sender’s name, the subject of the email, the reply address, and the recipient of the email. Using your address book At the top of the main workspace, you will see the address book buon. Click this buon to access your address book. Once the address book opens you, will see the address book window. From here, you can easily organize your contacts. At the top of the address book window, you will see five buons, new contact, new list, properties, write, and delete. ey function in the following ways: New Contact is buon allows you to add a new contact and add as much detail as you wish to save, including name, nickname, address, email, additional email, screen name, work number, home number, fax, pager and mobile/cell number. New List is buon allows you to add lists for your contacts such as family, friends, acquaintances, etc. Properties is buon allows you to rename your address book name. e default name is personal address book, but you can change the name as you see fit. Write is buon allows you to quickly send an email to a selected con- tacted without needing to go back to the main underbird workspace. Simply select a contact from your contacts list and click the write buon to send them an email. Delete is buon allows you to quickly delete a contact from your address book. Just select the contact you want to delete and press delete to remove the contact from your address book. Checking and reading messages underbird will automatically check your email account for new mes- sages every ten minutes, but if you need to manually check for new mes- sages at any time, le-click the get mail button in the top le corner of the workspace. underbird will then check your email account for new mes- sages and download them. As they are downloaded, you will see the new email appear in the message window on the right side of the workspace. When you click on one of your emails, it will appear in the window below your email list. If you want to view your email in a full window, double- le-click your chosen email, and underbird will display the email in a full window in its own tab. At the top of the open email, you will see infor- mation about the email and the five quick action buons, reply, forward, arive, junk and delete as previously discussed. If an email has remote content, you will see a message asking if you want to display the email or
  • 58.      . not. You may want to filter your emails from time to time; this is easily Remote content represent parts of an email done with underbird. When you have an email selected and you want that may be hosted elsewhere. Remote content might consist of video or audio, but most to tag the email, simply click the tag buon and a drop down list will be often is graphics or HTML content. For security displayed. In this drop down list, you have the options to Remove All Tags purposes, Thunderbird will as you if you wish to or Mark as…, Important, Work, Personal, To Do, Later. You can also create view this remote content. a new tag more suited to your own personal requirements. Composing and Replying to Messages To compose a new email message, click the write buon in the top le of the workspace. is will bring up a new window where you can compose your new email. In the To: field, enter the email address of the destination —the contact to whom you are sending this email. If there is more than one contact to whom you are writing, separate multiple recipients with commas. If a contact that you are addressing is in your address book, you can address them by name. Start typing the name of the contact; underbird will dis- play the list of mailing contacts below your text. Once you see the contact you intend to address, click on their email address or use the down arrow key and then press Enter to select the address. If you would like to carbon- copy (Cc) some contacts, click the To: field and select Cc:. Contacts who are listed on the To: and Cc: lines will receive the email, and will see the rest of the contacts to whom an email was sent. If you would like to send an email to some contacts without disclosing to whom your email was sent, you can send a blind carbon-copy, or Bcc. To enable Bcc, select Bcc: by clicking the To: field and selecting Bcc:. Any contacts entered in the Bcc: field will re- ceive the message, but none of the recipients will see the names or emails of contacts on the Bcc: line. Instead of typing the email addresses or names of the contacts you are addressing in the message, you can select the contacts from your address book. Start typing a few leers from your contact’s first or last name in the To: field to filter the list to only show mailing contacts. Once you identify the contact you would like to address, click on their name in the list. If you’ve added the contact in error, delete their address and enter the correct address. You may enter a subject for your email in the Sub- ject field. Messages should have a subject to help the recipient identify the general contents of the email while glancing at their message list. Enter the If you do not include a subject in your email, contents of your message in the big text field below the subject. ere is no Thunderbird will warn you about this omission. practical limit on the amount of text you can include in your message. By default, underbird will auto-detect the correct format for your email but you can change this by clicking Options then mouse over Format and select your preferred option from the list. You have a choice of Auto-Detect, Plain Text Only, Rich Text (HTML) Only, and Plain and Rich (HTML) Text. When you have finished composing your email, click on the Send buon on the window’s toolbar. Your message will be placed in the Outbox, and will be sent to your desired recipient. Attaching files At times, you may want to send files to your contacts. To send files, you will need to aach them to your email message. To aach a file to an email You can attach quite a few different file types you are composing, click on the Atta buon. When the new window to emails, but be careful about the size of the attachments! If they are too big, some email opens, select the file you want to send and click open. e file you selected systems will reject the email you are sending, will then be aached to the email when you click send. and your recipient will never receive it!
  • 59.     Replying to Messages In addition to composing new messages, you may want to reply to messages that you receive. ere are three types of email replies: y or Reply to Sender sends your reply only to the sender of the message to whom you are replying. Reply to All sends your reply to the sender of the message as well as any address in To: or Cc: lines. Forward allows you to send the message, with any additional comments you may add, to some other contacts. To use any of these methods, click on the message to which you want to reply and then click the Reply, Reply to All, or Forward buon on the message toolbar. underbird will open the reply window. is window should look much like the window for composing new messages, but the To:, Cc:, Subject:, and main message content fields should be filled in from the message to which you are replying. Edit the To:, Cc:, Bcc:, Subject: or main body as you see fit. When your reply is finished, click on the Send buon on the toolbar. Your message will be placed in the Outbox and will be sent. Using instant messaging Instant messaging allows you to communicate with people in real time online. Ubuntu includes the Empathy application that lets you use instant messaging features to keep in touch with your contacts. To start Empathy, open the Messaging Menu (the envelope icon on the menubar), then select Chat. Empathy lets you connect to many instant messaging networks. You can connect to: Facebook Chat, Google Talk, Jabber, People Nearby, , Gadu-Gadu, Groupwise, , , , mxit, myspace, , sametime, silc, , , Yahoo!, and Zephyr. Running Empathy for the first time When you open Empathy for the first time you will need to configure it with the details of your instant messaging accounts. When Empathy starts you will see the “Welcome to Empathy” window. Choose the option corresponding to your situation. You have a previous account If you have an account that you have used previously with another instant messaging program, then select the Yes, I’ll enter my account details now option. en, click Forward to continue. On the next screen, choose your account type from the drop-down list below What kind of at account do you have?. en, enter your account details in the field below. Depending on the account type that you choose, Empathy may request that you enter a username, or an  for your account, followed by a pass- word. If you do not remember your account information, you will need to visit the website of the instant messaging service to retrieve that information. (It is suggested that you visit the web sites where you have instant messenger
  • 60.      . Figure 3.13: Creating a new instant messenger account in Empathy. accounts, before you start Empathy, so you can gather all of the credentials for each account.) If you have another account to add then select the Yes option, and click Forward to repeat the above process. When you have entered all of your accounts leave the No, that’s all for now option selected, and click Apply to finish the setup process. Next, Empathy should display the “Please enter personal details” screen. If you choose to fill in this information, you will be able to communicate with people who are on your local network either at home or from the office. Enter your first name in the First name field, and your last name in the Last name field. Enter a nickname that you want to use on your lo- cal network in the Niname field. When you have completed all of the information, click Apply. If you don’t want to communicate with people on your local network, select the I don’t want to enable this feature for now option, and click Apply. You do not have a previous account If you don’t have an account that you can use, then you can create one by selecting the No, I want a new account option. Click Forward to display the next set of options. Choose the account type that you would like to create from the drop- down list below What kind of at account do you want to create? You can create either a Jabber or a Google Talk account. Note: If you wish to create a type of account Next, enter the account name that you would like in the text field, and in other than one of these, then you will need to visit the relevant website and create the the following text field enter a password of your choice. If you would like account first. Then follow the instructions in to set up another account then select the Yes option, and repeat the above the “You have an account” section. process. When you have entered all the accounts leave the No, that’s all for now option selected, and click Forward. Empathy should display the “Please enter personal details” window. Providing this information allows you to communicate with people who are on your local network either at home or in the workplace. Enter your First name in the text field, and enter your Last name in the next field. In the Niname field enter a nickname by which you would like to be identified. When you have filled all of the text fields click Apply to save your seings. If you don’t want to talk to people on your local network then select the I don’t want to enable this feature for now option and click Apply.
  • 61.     You want to talk to people nearby If you would only like to communicate with people on your local network either at home or in the workplace, then you should select the No, I just want to see people online nearby for now option. Click Forward to display the next set of options. en enter your First name in the text field, and enter your Last name in the next field. In the Niname field enter a nickname by which you would like to be identified. When you have filled all of the text fields, click Forward. Figure 3.14: You can talk to people nearby by entering your information. Changing account settings If you need to add more accounts aer the first launch, open the Edit menu, then select Accounts. Empathy will then display the “Accounts” window. Adding an account To add an account click on the + buon on the boom le of the “Accounts” window. Empathy should display some options on the right-hand side of the window. Choose your account type from the Protocol drop-down list. Next, enter your account name in the first text field. en enter your password in the Password text field. Finally click on the Log in buon to save and verify your seings. Editing an account You might need to edit an account if you change the password or get the password wrong. Fortunately, this is very easy to do. Select the account you want to change on the le side of the “Accounts” window. Empathy should show the current information for the account. Once you have made your changes, click Save. Removing an account To remove an account select the account on the le hand side of the win- dow and click on the - buon. Empathy should open the “Do you want to remove” window. Click on the Remove buon to confirm that you want to remove the account, or click Cancel to keep the account.
  • 62.      . Editing contacts Adding a contact To add a contact open the Chat menu, then select Add contact. Empathy should open the “New Contact” window. In the Account drop-down list, choose the account that you want to add the contact to. When creating a contact you must select the service that matches the service your contact is using. For example if your contact’s address ends in “@googlemail.com” then you will need to add it to an account that ends in “@googlemail.com.” Likewise if the contact’s email ends in “@hotmail.com” then you will need to add it to an account ending in “@hotmail.com.” Aer choosing the account you wish to add the contact to, enter their login , their username, their screen name or their email address in the Identifier text field. Next, in the Alias text field, enter the name you want to see in your contact list. Click Add to add the contact to your list of contacts. Removing a contact Click on the contact that you want to remove, then on the Unity bar at the top of the screen, open the Edit menu, select Contact, then Remove. is will open the “Remove contact” window. Click on the Remove buon to confirm that you want to remove this contact, or click Cancel to keep the contact. Communicating with contacts Text To communicate with a contact, select the contact in Empathy’s main win- dow and double-click their name. Empathy should open a new window where you can type messages to your contact, and see a record of previ- ously exchanged messages. To send a message to the contact, enter your message in the text field be- low the conversation history. When you have typed your message press the Enter key to send the message to your contact. If you are communicating with more than one person then all of the conversations will be shown in tabs in your Empathy window. Audio If your contact has audio capabilities then there will be a microphone icon next to their name. Click on the microphone icon to open the popup menu. Select the Audio call option from the menu. Empathy should then open the “Call” window. is window shows your picture on the right and your contact’s picture on the le. Ensure that your microphone and speakers are connected, and proceed with the audio conversation. You can finish the conversation by clicking on the Hang up buon. Video If your contact has video chat capabilities then there will be a webcam icon next to their name. Click on the icon to open a popup menu. Select the Video call option from the menu. Empathy should then open the “Call”
  • 63.     window. is window shows your webcam view in the top right and your contact’s webcam will be in the middle. If you don’t have a webcam then your picture will be shown instead. You can finish the call by clicking on the Hang up buon. Sending and receiving files Sending a file When you are in a conversation with a contact and you would like to send them a file, open the Contact menu, then select Send file. Empathy should open the “Select file” window. Find the file you wish to send, and click on the Send buon. A “File Transfers” window will open showing the file and its transfer progress. When the file transfer is complete, you can close the “File Transfers” window. Receiving a file When a contact wants to send you a file, the status icon to the le of the contact’s name will flash with an icon of a paper plane. To receive the file, double-click the contact’s name. Empathy will open the “Select a destina- tion” window. Choose the location where you would like Empathy to save the file, and click Save. Empathy should open the “File Transfers” window. e “File Transfers” window shows you the progress of current file transfer. You can stop the file transfer by clicking on the Stop buon, open trans- ferred files by clicking on the Open buon, and clear the list of completed transfers by clicking on the Clear buon. Changing your status You can use your status to show your contacts how busy you are or what you are doing. You can use the standard statuses, which are: ‣ Available ‣ Busy ‣ Away ‣ Invisible ‣ Off-line ese can be changed in one of two ways. e first method is in the main Empathy window from the drop-down list at the top of the window. e same drop-down list lets you set a custom status by choosing “Cus- tom Message…” next to the icon that matches your status. Enter what you would like your status to say, and click on the green check mark. e second method is to click the Messaging Icon on the top Unity Bar. >From this menu, you will see all of the same options that Empathy presents, but accessible without having to open the application window. Changing your picture Your picture is what your contacts will see next to your name in their con- tact list. e default picture is the outline of a person. You can change your picture by opening the Edit menu, then choosing Personal Information. Empathy should open the “Personal Information” window. From the Ac- count drop-down list choose the account that you want to change, then click on the picture on the right-hand side of the window. Empathy should
  • 64.      . open the “Select Your Avatar Image” window. Find the file containing your picture, and click Open. If you would like to return it to the default avatar, click on the No Image buon, instead. Desktop Sharing Desktop sharing is a very niy feature available with Ubuntu. It can be used for a lot of purposes like troubleshooting, online meetings or just showing off your cool desktop to your friend. It is very easy to get remote desktop sharing working between two Ubuntu machines. . Click on System ‣ Preferences ‣ Remote Desktop and select Allow re- mote desktop. It is strongly recommended you add a password, for security reasons. . Open Empathy and login using your Google/Jabber client  . Double click on the user with whom you want to share your desktop . From the new window, click on Contact ‣ Share your desktop. It should be noted that the other user will obviously be able to see the information displayed on your screen. Please be sure to keep this in mind if you have documents or files that are of a private nature open on your desktop. Microblogging Gwibber is the default microblogging application that lets you access multiple social networking accounts, without having to open an Internet browser. Gwibber can be used to access and post on Twier, Facebook, Identi.ca, Ping.fm, Flickr, Digg, Status.net, Foursquare, Qaiku and Friend- Feed. Upgrades and add-ons Before you begin using Gwibber, go to Ubuntu Soware Center and search for Gwibber. Select Gwibber; press More Info; check each add-on that you want (or just select all of them); and press Apply Changes. You need add- ons for Ping.fm, Flickr, Digg, Status.net, Foursquare, Qaiku and FriendFeed. Wait for the them to finish installing. You need to log out and in again to activate the add-ons. Working with social networking accounts on Gwibber Pull down the Message menu from the top panel bar and select /menuBroad- cast. is starts the app. If you have not previously entered an account, the Accounts Manager will open automatically. Otherwise, select Edit ‣ Accounts to open it. To add a new account, select the + buon; select the account type (e.g., Facebook, Twier); select Add. Select account seings and Authorize; and follow any instructions to authorize the account. You can add more than one account from a Removing accounts from Gwibber is easy too. Go to the Accounts Man- service provider. ager window and select the account to be removed. Click the - buon to remove the account.
  • 65.     Figure 3.15: Use the Ubuntu Software Center to to get Gwibber add-ons. Figure 3.16: The Gwibber pull-down menu shows you a quick overview of your feeds. Figure 3.17: Add an account for use with Gwibber using the Accounts Manager. Using Gwibber to follow streams Gwibber displays feeds from each service provider as streams. You can list them in either ascending or descending order by selecting View ‣ Sort. You can separate the feeds as messages, replies, and private messages. In addition the aachments from the feed are sorted as images, links and
  • 66.      . videos. Click the image, link or the video to take you to the website in a new tab in your default browser; images can be previewed within Gwibber. Figure 3.18: A stream in Gwibber. Clicking on the image should open the Facebook page in a browser. Notifications You can customize how feeds display in the notification bubble, and the fre- quency with which Gwibber refreshes, in the preferences (Edit ‣ Preferences). Figure 3.19: A notification from Gwibber. Notifications can be customized from the Gwibber Preferences menu. Replying, Liking and Retweeting Each tweet can be liked, retweeted or replied from within Gwibber’s win- dow by clicking on the Twier icon at the top right of each post. Updating your Status To update your status using Gwibber, select Update Status from the mes- You can prevent an account from posting from sage icon in the top panel; this opens a new window. Type your status Gwibber; Edit ‣ Accounts ‣ Account Settings. message and post it to all your accounts with one click. Press Esc to cancel. You can customize each account in Gwibber to have its own color. You can also shorten URLs as you post from Gwibber using a list of URL shortening services. Play with Gwibber and discover other cool things it can do. Open http://gwibber. com/docs/user-guide/current/master_social_networking_with_gwibber.pdf for more information.
  • 67.     Figure 3.20: You can similarly “like” or comment on updates from within Gwibber. Viewing and editing photos Shotwell Photo Manager is the default photo application in Ubuntu. is application allows you to view, tag, edit, and share your photos. To start Shotwell, click on the Ubuntu icon near the top-le of the screen, then select the Shotwell icon labeled View Photos. Figure 3.21: Manage your photo collection, enhance your photos while keeping the original, and share your memories online using Shotwell Photo Manager. Importing Photos When you launch Shotwell for the first time, you will be greeted by the “Import” window. Aer the first launch, you can import more photos by dragging the photos into the Shotwell window. You can also import photos by connecting your camera or external storage device to the computer.
  • 68.      . From a digital camera Connect your camera to the computer using the data cable and power it on. If your camera is properly detected, you will see a new window prompting you to launch an application. Select Shotwell in the drop-down menu then click OK. Your camera will be listed in the Shotwell sidebar. Select your camera in the sidebar. You will see a preview of the camera’s contents. Select individual photos by pressing and holding Ctrl and clicking on each photo you want to import, and then clicking Import Selected on the boom bar of the window. Or, you can choose to import all photos by clicking Import All. From your computer You can import photos into Shotwell by dragging photos from your file browser into the Shotwell window. Alternatively, you can click File Import From Folder, ‣ select the folder containing the photos you want to import. From external hard drive,  flash drive, or / Importing photos from external storage is similar to importing from your computer. Your external storage device may also appear under the Camera label on the Shotwell sidebar. Follow the instructions for importing from a camera or computer. Choosing where Shotwell saves photos e default location for the Shotwell Library is your Pictures folder. When importing pictures in the “Import” window, you will be given the option to copy the files to your Library, or keep the files in place. If you have your photos stored on your computer, the option Import in Place will be suitable so photos aren’t duplicated. If you are importing photos from an external source, such as a portable hard drive,  flash drive, or /, you should select Copy into Library so the photos are copied to your computer—otherwise they won’t appear when you remove the external source. Viewing photos Choose Library or any collection in the sidebar to display photos from your selection. Use the slider on the boom bar to adjust the size of the thumbnails. To view a full-window image, double-click an individual photo. In the full-window view, you can navigate through the collection using the back and forward arrows, zoom on the image using the slider, pan by clicking and dragging the image, and exit the full-window view by double- clicking the image. To view the collection in full-screen mode, press F11 or go to View ‣ Fullscreen. You can navigate through the collection using the toolbar that is available by moving your mouse to the boom of the screen. To view a slideshow presentation of the collection, press F5 or go to View ‣ Slideshow. Press the Esc key to exit the Fullscreen or Slideshow views. Organizing photos Shotwell makes finding photos of the same type easier by using tags. You can apply as many tags to a photo as you like. To apply tags to photos, first select the photos. en right-click on the photos and select Add Tags. Enter the tags you want into the text field, separated by commas. If you are
  • 69.     adding new tags, these will appear in the side bar on the right under the Tags label. Editing images You may want to edit some of the photos you import into Shotwell. For example, you may want to remove something at the edge, adjust the color, reduce the red-eye effect, or straighten the image. To edit a photo, double- click on the photo that you want to edit and then click on one of the follow- ing buons: Rotate Click Rotate to rotate the image ° clockwise. You can click the buon more than once and it will rotate the image clockwise in ° intervals. Crop Click Crop to change the framing of the photo. e image will darken and a selection will appear. Adjust the selection to your desired crop by dragging a corner or side. If you want to choose a specific aspect ratio, use the drop- down menu to select one of the preset ratios or enter your own custom ratio. A pivot buon is provided to change your selection from landscape to portrait and vice versa. Once you are happy with the selection, click OK to apply the crop or Cancel to discard it. Red-eye reduction If you have taken a photo and the flash has caused the subject to have red eyes, you can fix this problem in Shotwell. Click the Red-eye buon. A circle will appear. Drag this circle over one of the subjects eyes and then use the slider to adjust the circle size. When the circle is over the eye, click Apply to fix the red eye. You will need to repeat this for each individual eye. Use caution when adjusting the size of the circle. A circle too large and covering the skin may cause discoloration when applying the red-eye reduction. Adjust Clicking Adjust will bring up a window that lets you edit a few things: Level Similar to contrast Exposure How bright the image is Saturation How colorful the image is Tint e overall color Temperature Whether the image is warm (more yellow) or cool (more blue) Shadows How dark the shadows are To change these values, drag the sliders until you are satisfied with the image. Click OK to apply the changes, Reset to undo the changes and start over, or Cancel to discard the changes. Auto-adjustment with Enhance Click Enhance to let Shotwell automatically adjust the color, levels, expo- sure, contrast and temperature to make a more pleasing image.
  • 70.      . Reverting an edited photo to the original When you edit a photo in Shotwell, your original image remains untouched. You can undo all of the changes and revert to the original version by right- clicking on the photo, then selecting Revert to Original. is option is only available for photos you have edited. Sharing your photos You can easily share your photos on the web using Shotwell’s Publish feature. Select the photos you want to share, then click the Publish buon located on the boom bar. Choose Facebook, Flickr, or Picasa Web Albums in the drop-down menu and log-in with your credentials. Some services may require you to authorize Shotwell before allowing the application to publish photos. Follow the instructions on the window, select your desired options, and click Publish to upload your images to the web. Further information We’ve only just touched on the features of Shotwell. To get more help, select Help ‣ Contents. is will load the online manual, where you can get more detailed instructions on how to use Shotwell effectively. Watching videos and movies To watch videos or s in Ubuntu, you can use the Movie Player appli- cation. To start the Movie Player, click on Dash, then search for “Movie Player” and select it. is will open the “Movie Player” window. Figure 3.22: Movie player (Totem) plays music and videos. Codecs Watching s may require Ubuntu to install a “codec,” which is a piece of soware that allows your computer to understand the contents of the , and display the video. Legal Notice: Patent and copyright laws operate differently depending on which country you are in. Please obtain legal advice if you are unsure whether a par- ticular patent or restriction applies to a media format you wish to use in your country.
  • 71.     So that you can play all videos and s, you will need to install some codecs. ese are located within the Multiverse repository. is is now enabled by default. To install the codecs, open the Ubuntu Soware Center, either through Dash or the Launcher. When the “Ubuntu Soware Center” window opens, use the search box in the top right and search for the following: ‣ ubuntu-restricted-extras ‣ libdvdread ‣ libdvdnav When you find each one, select it with a double-click and then click the Install buon. is may open an “Authenticate” window. If so, enter your password then click Authenticate to start the installation process. Playing videos from file Open the Movie menu, then select Open…. is will open the “Select Movies or Playlists” window. Find the file or files that you want to play and click on the Add buon. e video or videos will start playing. Playing a DVD When you insert a  in the computer, Ubuntu should open the “You have just inserted a Video . Choose what application to launch” window. Make sure that Open Movie Player is chosen in the drop-down list and then click OK. e “Movie Player” window will open and the movie will start. If the “Movie Player” window is already open, open Movie menu, then select Play Disc… and the movie will start. Listening to audio and music Ubuntu comes with the Rhythmbox Music Player for listening to your mu- sic, streaming Internet radio and managing playlists and podcasts. Rhythm- box also comes bundled with multiple ways to find and purchase music, TV shows, and movies, and even ways to subscribe to your favorite  feeds. Starting Rhythmbox ere are several ways to start Rhythmbox. ‣ Open the Dash, select Listen to Music, and choose any of the displayed music files (if you have any). ‣ Open the Dash, type Rhythmbox and click on the Rhythmbox Music Player icon. ‣ Ubuntu . comes with an indicator menu in the top bar for sound- related applications and devices. is menu includes a link to start Rhythmbox, and basic playback and volume controls. If you close Rhythmbox by pressing Alt+F4 or clicking the red close buon ( ), it will disappear from view but continue to play in the background. You can still control your music or reopen from the Sound indicator. To quit Rhythmbox completely, press Ctrl+Q.
  • 72.      . Figure 3.23: Rhythmbox Music Player Playing music To play music, you must first import music into your library. Choose Mu- sic ‣ Import Folder… or press Ctrl+O on your keyboard to import a folder of media, a single file, an Amazon  purchase or media from an iOS or Android device. e Rhythmbox toolbar contains most of the controls that you will use for browsing and playing your music. If you want to play a song, double-click a track or click it and press the Play buon on the toolbar (you can also choose Control ‣ Play from the menubar or press Ctrl+Space). When a song is playing, the Play buon will become a Pause buon. Clicking on it will pause the song. Next and Previous buons are next to the Play/Pause buon. You can click on these buons to play the next and previous songs in your library or playlist. Rhythmbox also has options to toggle Repeat or Shuffle modes. Rhythmbox offers two dif- ferent types of shuffling, both of which can be accessed by clicking on the drop-down menu next to Next buon or by using the global menubar (Control ‣ Shuffle). Repeat controls are located in boom right hand corner and through the global menubar (/menuControl ‣ Repeat). Playing Audio cds To play your CD, insert it into your CD drive. It will automatically appear within Rhythmbox in the Side Pane beneath your Music Library. You can click the  (named Audio , or the name of the album) and double-click a track in it to play the tracks on the . Importing (Ripping) Audio cds Begin by inserting a . Rhythmbox will automatically detect it and add it to the side menu. If you have an active Internet connection, Rhythmbox will try to find the album details via the web. Click the . Uncheck any tracks you don’t want imported. Press the Extract buon, located near the upper-le corner of Rhythmbox. Rhythmbox will begin importing the . As it finishes each track, it will appear in your Music Library.
  • 73.     Listening to streaming audio Rhythmbox is pre-configured to enable you to stream audio from various Streaming audio stations are “radio stations” sources. ese include Internet broadcast stations (Radio from the Side that broadcast over the Internet. Some of these are real radio stations that also stream over the Pane), Last.fm and Libre.fm. To listen to an Internet radio station, click in Internet, and others broadcast only over the the Radio icon in the Side Pane for a list of pre-configured stations. You can Internet. filter by genre in the middle pane. To add a new radio station, select Add and enter the radio station . You can browse a selected list of radio stations at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ Internet_stations or you can use your browser Connect digital audio players to search for “Internet radio stations.” Rhythmbox can connect with many popular digital media players. Con- nected players will appear in the Devices list. Features will vary depending on the player (and oen the player’s popularity), but common tasks like transferring songs and playlists should be supported. Figure 3.24: Rhythmbox connected to an Android device Listen to shared music If you are on the same network as other Rhythmbox users (or most other DAAP stands for “Digital Audio Access Proto- music player soware), you can share your music and listen to their shared col,” and is a method designed by Apple Inc. to let software share media across a network. music. To do this, click Music ‣ Connect to DAAP Share… en enter the IP address and the port number. en click OK. Clicking a shared library will enable you to browse and play songs from other computers. Manage podcasts Rhythmbox can manage all of your favorite podcasts. Select Podcasts from the Side Pane to view all added podcasts. e toolbar will display additional options to Browse, Show All, Add and Update. Choose Add on the toolbar and enter the URL of the podcasts to save it to Rhythmbox. Podcasts will be automatically downloaded at regular intervals or you can manually update feeds. Select an episode and click Play. You can also delete episodes.
  • 74.      . View Rhythmbox comes with the option of a party mode. To enter party mode press F11 on your keyboard or use the global menubar (View ‣ Party Mode); to exit from party mode press F11 again. Rhythmbox also has a browser bar that is enabled by default (this area is the top-right half of the program window). It gives you the option to search your music by artist (upper- right) or album. Rhythmbox preferences e default configuration of Rhythmbox may not be exactly what you want. Choose Edit ‣ Preferences to alter the application seings. e Preferences tool is broken into four main areas: General, Playback Music and Podcasts. General includes how you want Rhythmbox to display artist and track information. You can also adjust the columns visible in your library and how the toolbar icons are displayed. Playback options allow you to enable crossfading and the duration of the fade between tracks. Music includes where you would like to place your music files and the library structure for new tracks added to Rhythmbox. You can also set your preferred audio format. Podcasts designates where podcasts are stored on your computer along with the ability to change how oen podcast information is updated. Plugins Rhythmbox supports a wide array of plugins, which add functionality to Rhythmbox. Many of the plugins provide basic audio playback, and you may check a few more boxes, for example, to access the Magnatune Store. To view or change the activated plugins, use the global menubar (Edit ‣ Plugins). Managing your music Rhythmbox supports creating playlists. Playlists either are static lists of songs to be played in order, or can be smart playlists based on filter criteria. Playlists contain references to songs in your library. ey do not contain the actual songs, but only reference them. So, if you remove a song from a playlist (right-cli on the song ‣ Remove from Playlist), the song will remain in your library and on your hard drive. To create a playlist, choose Music ‣ Playlist ‣ New Playlist, press Ctrl+N, or right-click in the lower blank area of the side bar and select New Playlist. It appears in the sidebar as “New Playlist.” Right-click and select Rename to give the new playlist a name of your choosing. Drag songs from your library to the new playlist in the side pane or right-click on songs and select Add to Playlist and pick the playlist. Smart Playlists are created in a similar way. Choose Music ‣ Playlist ‣ New Automatic Playlist or right-click in the lower blank area of the side bar and select New Automatic Playlist. Define the filter criteria. You can add multiple filter rules and select a name. Save. You can update any playlist (including the predefined ones) by right-clicking on the name and choosing Edit. Rhythmbox supports song ratings. Right-cli a song in your library ‣ Properties ‣ Details and click on the number of stars. To remove a rating,
  • 75.     select zero stars. Other song information such as Title, Artist and Album can be changed. Right-cli a song in your library ‣ Properties ‣ Basic. To remove a song, right-cli ‣ Remove. To delete a song from your hard drive entirely, right-cli ‣ Move to the Rubbish Bin. If you ever want to move a song, highlight the song (or group of songs) from your library and drag it to a folder or to your desktop. is will make a copy of the audio file in the new location. Music stores Rhythmbox has an integrated store that gives you access to a huge catalog of music with a variety of licensing options. e Ubuntu One Music Store (see figure below) sells music from global major and minor music labels. e store offers -free (no copy protection) songs encoded in high-quality  format. You can browse the catalog, play previews, and buy songs with the Ubuntu One Music Store. As the name suggests, the Ubuntu One Music Store integrates with the Ubuntu One service. All purchases are transferred to your personal cloud storage and are automatically copied to all of your computers. For that reason, an Ubuntu One account is required (it is free of charge and quick to register). e catalog of music available for purchase will vary depending on where you live in the world. More information about the Ubuntu One Music Store can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/ music/. Figure 3.25: Ubuntu One Music Store Audio codecs Different audio files (, , , , etc.) require unique tools to de- code them and play the contents. ese tools are called codecs. Rhythmbox aempts to detect any missing codecs on your system so you can play all of your audio files. If a codec is missing, it automatically tries to find the codec online and guides you through its installation.
  • 76.      . Rhythmbox support Rhythmbox is used by many users throughout the world. ere are a vari- ety of support resources available in many languages. ‣ Help ‣ Contents or F1 for the main help. ‣ Help ‣ Get Help Online to report bugs. ‣ e Rhythmbox website http://www.rhythmbox.org/. ‣ e Multimedia & Video category of Ubuntu Forums: http://ubuntuforums. org/forumdisplay.php?f= Burning CDs and DVDs To create a  or  open the Dash and search for Brasero Disc Burner, then open Brasero. is opens Brasero, which gives you five burning op- tions. Each one of these is explained below. Figure 3.26: Brasero burns music, video, and data DVDs and CDs. Getting Started Before you can use Brasero, you need to Create a new project. ere are three types of projects available: Audio Project, Data Project, and Video Project. Make your selection based on your requirements. At this current time, Brasero does not support e following options apply for all projects except Disc copy and Burn Blu-Ray. Image. Adding files to a project To add files to the list, click the Green + buon, which opens the “Select Files” window. en navigate your way to the file you want to add, click the desired file, and then click the Add buon. Repeat this process for each file until all desired files have been added. Removing files If you want to remove a file from the project, click the file in the list and Icons of a broom are often used in Ubuntu to click on the Red - buon. To remove all the files in the list click on the represent clearing a text field or returning something to its default state. Broom shaped buon.
  • 77.     Saving a project To save an unfinished project, choose Project ‣ Save. e “Save Current Project” window will be opened. Choose where you would like to save the project. en in the Name: text field, enter a name for the project. Now click the Save buon. Burning the disc When you click the Burn… buon, you will see the “Properties of …” win- dow. You can specify the burning speed in the Burning speed drop down. It is best to choose the highest speed. To burn your project directly to the disc, select the Burn the image directly without saving it to disc option. With this option selected, no image file is created and no files are saved to the hard disk. All data is saved to the blank CD or DVD. e Simulate before burning option is useful if you encounter problems Temporary files are saved in the /tmp folder burning discs. Selecting this option allows you to simulate the disc burning by default. Should you wish to save these files in another location, you will need to change process without actually writing data to a disc—a wasteful process if your the setting in the Temporary files drop down computer isn’t writing data correctly. If the simulation is successful, Brasero menu. Under normal conditions, you should not will burn the disc aer a ten second pause. During those ten seconds, you need to change this setting. have the option to cancel the burning process. Blanking a disk If you are using a disc that has  wrien on it and you have used it before, RW stands for Re-Writable which means the disc then you can erase it so that it can be reused. is will erase all of the data can be used more than once. currently on the disc. To erase a disc, open the Tools menu, then select Blank. e “Disc Blanking” window will be open. In the Select a disc drop down choose the disc that you would like to erase. You can enable the Fast blank option if you would like to shorten the amount of time to perform the blanking process. However, selecting this option will not fully remove the files; if you have any sensitive data on your disc, it would be best not to enable the Fast blank option. Once the disc is erased (blank), you will see e disc was successfully blanked. Click the Close buon to finish. Audio project If you record your own music, then you may want to transfer this music onto an audio  so your friends and family can listen. You can start an audio project by clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ New Audio Project. When burning a music CD, it is important to remember that commercial music CDs usually have two-second gap between song. To ensure your music has this same gap between songs, click the file and then clicking the pause buon. You can slice files into parts by clicking the Knife buon. is opens a “Split Track” window. e Method drop down gives you four options each one of these lets you split the track in a different way. Once you have split the track, click OK. In the drop down window at the boom of the main “Brasero” window, make sure that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files. en click the Burn buon.
  • 78.      . Data project If you want to make a back up of your documents or photos, it would be best to make a data project. You can start a data project by clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ New Data Project. If you want to add a folder you can click the Folder picture, then enter the name of the folder. In the drop down at the boom of the main “Brasero” window, make sure that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files. en click the Burn buon. Video project If you want to make a  of your family videos, it would be best to make a video project. You can start a video project by clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ New Video Project. In the drop down window at the boom of the main “Brasero” window, make sure that you have selected the disc where you want to burn the files. en click the Burn buon. Disc copy You can copy a disc clicking Project ‣ New Project ‣ Disc copy. is opens the “Copy /” window. If you have two / drives you can copy a disc from one to the other, the disc that you want to copy to must be in the / drive. If you have only one drive you will need to make an image and then burn it to a disc. In the Select disc to copy drop-down choose the disc to copy. In the Select a disc to write to drop-down either choose image file or the disc that you want to copy to. Image file You can change where the image file is saved by clicking Properties. is shows the “Location for Image File”. You can edit the name of the file in the Name: text field. e default save location is your home folder, you can change this by clicking the + buon next to Browse for other folders. Once you have chosen where you want to save the photo or image, click Close. Back in the “Copy /” window click Create Image. Brasero will open the “Creating Image” and will display the job progress. When the process is complete, click Close. Burn image To burn an image, open the Project ‣ New Project ‣ Burn Image. Brasero will open the “Image Burning Setup” window. Click on the Cli here to select a disc image drop-down and the “Select Disc Image” window will appear. Navigate your way to the image you wish to burn, click on it, and then click Open. In the Select a disc to write to drop-down menu, click on the disc to which you’d like to write, then click Create Image.
  • 79.     Working with documents, spreadsheets, and presentations LibreOffice suite is the default office suite when working with: word docu- ments, spreadsheets, and slide presentations. Working with documents If you need to work with documents, you can use the LibreOffice Word Pro- The LibreOffice Word Processor is also known cessor. To start the word processor, open the Dash home of the Launcher, as the LibreOffice Writer. Spreadsheet is also known as Calc, and Presentation is known as search for LibreOffice Writer and select it. Ubuntu should then open the Impress. main window for the word processor. Working with spreadsheets If you need to work with spreadsheets, you can use the LibreOffice Spread- sheet. To start the spreadsheet application, click on the Dash home, type LibreOffice Calc and select LibreOffice Calc. Working with presentations If you need to work with slides for a presentation, you can use the Libre- Office Impress. To start the presentation application, open the Dash home menu, type LibreOffice Impress, and then click on it. Getting more help Each of these applications comes with a comprehensive set of help screens. If you are looking for more assistance with these applications, press the F1 key aer starting the application. Ubuntu One What is Ubuntu One? Ubuntu One is a service for storing your files online—in your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. Your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud is your personal online storage space; it can be accessed in any web browser or using an Ubuntu One application, such as those for Ubuntu, Windows, iPhone, or Android. Because Ubuntu One stores your files online, it’s the perfect way to backup your files to prevent data loss. You can also use Ubuntu One to share files with other people—this makes Ubuntu One a great tool for friends, families, and collaborative teams. Ubuntu One also provides services for backing up your contacts and streaming music to mobile devices. e Ubuntu One service is provided by Canonical. How safe is Ubuntu One? Before using Ubuntu One, you should bear the following points in mind: ‣ Uploading, downloading and synchronizing your information with Ubuntu One is done over an encrypted connection, which prevents anybody eavesdropping on your information as it is being transferred. ‣ Files are not stored by Canonical in encrypted form. It is important to keep this in mind when deciding what to upload to Ubuntu One. You can use other means to encrypt you data, such as an encrypted zip file.
  • 80.      . ‣ Information uploaded to Ubuntu One can potentially be accessed by Canonical. As with similar online services and websites, you are implic- itly trusting them to respect your privacy, so if you feel you cannot trust them with certain information, don’t upload it to Ubuntu One. ‣ If you violate the Ubuntu One terms and conditions and store illegal material, Canonical may be required to hand the information over to law enforcement agencies without your consent. ‣ Your online information can be accessed by anybody who knows (or can guess) your account name and password. For this reason, you should choose a good password and keep it secure. Getting started with Ubuntu One To use Ubuntu One, you will need to create a free Ubuntu One account 5GB is enough to store about 1,500 music files using an email address. is free account gives you access to GB of online or 5,000 photographs (depending on size). storage and the contact syncing service; access to more data storage or the music streaming service requires a paid subscription. ere are two ways to create an Ubuntu One account. You can either sign up using the Ubuntu One Control Panel (pre-installed in Ubuntu), or you can sign up on the Ubuntu One website https://one.ubuntu.com by clicking the Sign Up link. Figure 3.27: This Launcher icon opens the Creating an Ubuntu One account using the Ubuntu One Control Panel Ubuntu One Control Panel. In the Launcher, click the Ubuntu One icon, as shown in Figure .. is should open the dialog shown in Figure .. Figure 3.28: The Ubuntu One Control Panel Welcome Page. Click the I don’t have an account yet – sign me up buon. Fill in the details requested. Make sure you use a valid email address that If you do not have an email address, you can get only you have access to. one for free at gmail.com. You should review the Terms of Service and Privacy Policy before The captcha acts as a check that it really is a signing up. When you’re satisfied, click Set Up Account. person filling in the form and not a computer (because a computer won’t be able to read the Within a few minutes, you will receive an email containing the verifica- captcha text). tion code. Enter the verification code into the box as shown in Figure . and click Next. If all goes well, you will see a window saying: “You are now logged into Ubuntu One.”; in this window click the Finish buon. You will also get another email welcoming you to Ubuntu One. Now that you are logged into
  • 81.     Figure 3.29: Fill in all fields with your informa- tion to sign up for an Ubuntu One account. Figure 3.30: Enter the verification code into the field. Ubuntu One, you can configure your Ubuntu machine for Ubuntu One file syncing. Configure your Ubuntu machine for file syncing e Ubuntu One desktop application syncs your Ubuntu One Personal Sync is short for Synchronize; implying that Cloud with files on your local file system. Aer logging into the Ubuntu the contents of your Ubuntu One local file system and your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud One desktop application the following dialog (Figure .) should appear, will always be identical. allowing you to select which files to sync with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. If you have already used your Ubuntu One account, you may have more folders in this view (Figure .). You can choose which Ubuntu One cloud folders you would like synced with your local file system. If this is the first time you are using Ubuntu One, just click the Next buon. You can also change your Ubuntu One sync connection seings at this time by clicking on the Che Settings buon; you can change things like the maximum upload and download rate, or if notifications should be allowed. In this dialog (Figure .), you can choose which of your local file sys- tem folders you would like synced with your Ubuntu One cloud storage.
  • 82.      . Figure 3.31: This setup dialog lets you select which existing Ubuntu One folders you would like synced with your machine. Figure 3.32: This setup dialog lets you select which folders of your local file system you would like synced with your Ubuntu One cloud storage. e folder Ubuntu One is implicitly synced, but you can select additional folders you may like synced—your pictures, for instance. Once you’re finished selecting folders, click the Finish buon to complete the setup process. You are now ready to begin using Ubuntu One! Using Ubuntu One with the Nautilus file manager Ubuntu One integrates with Nautilus, the program you use to view your file system. You can add, sync, and share files directly from Nautilus. Figure 3.33: These symbols indicate the sync status of a file or folder. The Checkmark indicates that the file or folder has been Adding and Modifying Files synced, and the circular arrows indicate that the file or folder is in the process of syncing. You can add files to your Ubuntu One folder (or any other folder that you have selected for sync) just as you normally would, and Ubuntu One will automatically sync them to your personal cloud. For example, if you add your vacation photos, you should see a screen similar to Figure .. Aer moving the files into the Ubuntu One synced folder, you should re- ceive a notification informing you that syncing has begun. You can also see that each file shows the circular arrow icon, indicating that it is currently syncing with your personal cloud. When syncing completes, the circular arrows will be replaced with check marks.
  • 83.     Figure 3.34: When you add files to an Ubuntu One synced folder, they automatically sync to your personal cloud. Whenever you add or modify files that are in folders synced with Ubuntu One, they will automatically sync to your personal cloud. Aer syncing is complete, you can view the files on the Ubuntu One Web UI, and they will also be synced to any other computers or mobile devices that you are using Ubuntu One on. Adding Folders to Sync You can add other folders to be synced with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud, not just your Ubuntu One folder. You can add folders to be synced through Nautilus by right-clicking the folder you would like to sync. In the right-click menu, choose Ubuntu One ‣ Synronize is Folder, as shown in Figure .. You can also stop syncing a folder through the same right-click menu. To view which files on your system are are currently syncing with Ubuntu One, open the Ubuntu One Control Panel by clicking the Ubuntu One Launcher icon, as shown in Figure .; a dialog similar to that in Fig- ure . should appear. In the Ubuntu One Control Panel you can see which of your folders are synced with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. You can also add files from here, by clicking the Add a folder from this computer buon. Using Ubuntu One with the Ubuntu One Web UI You can access your files from any computer using the Ubuntu One Web A Web UI (User Interface) is a web site that you UI at https://one.ubuntu.com. When you first reach the web page, you will can go to and do the same things that you do on your computer. Emails, for instance, are need to log in by clicking Log in or Sign up in the upper right-hand corner commonly accessed through a Web UI. of the page. On the following page, fill in your email address and Ubuntu One password, then click the Continue buon. Once logged in, you should be taken to your Dashboard. e Dashboard shows you a summary of your data usage, and keeps you informed of new features in Ubuntu One.
  • 84.      . Figure 3.35: Use a folder’s right-click menu to sync or un-sync the folder from your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. Figure 3.36: The Ubuntu One Control Panel shows you which folders in your file system are synced with your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. To view your files, click the Files link in the navigation bar in the upper portion of the page. Downloading and Uploading Files To access your files from the Ubuntu One Web UI, you can simply down- load them from your personal cloud. To download a file, click More shown to the right of the file, as shown in the browser, then click on Download file, as shown in Figure .. Clicking Download file will initiate a file download through your browser. If you make changes to the file or want to add a new file to your personal cloud, simply click the Upload file buon in the upper portion of the page. is will upload the file into the current folder and overwrite any old ver- sions of the file. Once you have uploaded the file, it will be available in your personal cloud, and will sync to your Ubuntu machine’s local file system.
  • 85.     Figure 3.37: A file’s More button in the Web UI gives you many options. Making Files Public You can make a file public on the web by clicking More and choosing the Publish file buon—this is also shown in Figure .. Aer clicking the Publish file buon, the Web UI will generate a Public URL; you can share this URL with anyone. By directing a browser to the Public URL of the file, the browser should begin to download the file or it may display it, depending on what type of file it is. You can make the file private again at any time by clicking the Stop publishing buon located to the le of the Public URL. Aer you click the Stop publishing buon the Public URL field will go away, and the URL will stop working. If someone tries to use a Public URL for a file that has been made private they will receive an error message and the file will not download or displayed. Sharing Files Ubuntu One lets you share files with other Ubuntu One users, leing you collaborate on files with ease. When one user makes a change to a shared file the changes automatically sync to the other users’ personal clouds and their local file system, so all users automatically have the most recent version of the file. To share files in Ubuntu One, you must share an entire folder. Before you begin to share files, you should make sure only the files you want to share are in this folder. en to share this folder, navigate to it in the Ubuntu One Web UI, and click the More buon to the le of the folder name. In the More menu, click on Share folder. A dialog box similar to that shown in figure . should appear. Complete the fields in the dialog box, and click the Share this folder buon when you are finished. Once you share the folder, the user you are trying to share the folder with should receive an email informing them that you would like to share the file. ey will then have to accept the share request. If the email address
  • 86.      . Figure 3.38: Sharing folders with other users makes collaborating on files simple. you provide does not yet have an Ubuntu One account, they must first sign up for an Ubuntu One account before they can access the shared folder. To stop sharing a folder, navigate to it, click the More buon, and click Stop sharing. If another user shares a folder with you, you will receive an email in- forming you of the share, and a link to click on to accept the share request. Folders that are shared with you by other users will appear in the Shared With Me folder inside your Ubuntu One folder (~/Ubuntu One/Shared With Me/). To stop syncing files that are shared with you, navigate to the folder in the Ubuntu One Web UI, click the More buon, then click the Delete this share buon. Exceeding your Ubuntu One Storage Limit If you exceed the storage limit of your Ubuntu One account—GB is the free limit—Ubuntu One will stop syncing your files to your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud. Remedying an Exceeded Storage Limit You can do several things to remedy an exceeded storage limit. Among them are: ‣ Delete any files you no longer need—it’s good to clean out old files. ‣ Move any files you no longer need synced—to another location that is not synced with Ubuntu One. ‣ Purchase additional storage space—you can purchase additional storage in GB blocks. Purchasing Additional Storage Space You can purchase additional storage space by clicking the Get more storage buon in the Ubuntu One Control Panel, or at https://one.ubuntu.com/
  • 87.     services/. Additional storage is available in GB blocks and is priced at $./month, or $./year. Figure 3.39: You can purchase additional storage space on the Ubuntu One website. Figure 3.40: Ubuntu One accepts credit cards, and PayPal for purchasing additional storage. Getting Ubuntu One Mobile Apps Ubuntu One has mobile applications for Android and iPhone mobile de- vices. ese applications allow you to access your personal cloud files on-the-go. You can get more information about the Android and iPhone Figure 3.41: This is the icon for the Ubuntu One applications at https://one.ubuntu.com/downloads/android/ and https://one. Android and iPhone apps. ubuntu.com/downloads/iphone/, respectively.
  • 88.      . Getting Ubuntu One for Windows Ubuntu One also has a Windows application, which can sync your Ubuntu One Personal Cloud files to the file system of a Windows operating system. More information can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/downloads/ windows/. Additional Services of Ubuntu One In addition to file syncing, Ubuntu One offers Contact Syncing and Music Streaming services. ese services are not discussed in this book, but ad- ditional information can be found at https://one.ubuntu.com/help/tutorial/ contact-sync-for-ubuntu--lts/ and https://one.ubuntu.com/services/ music/ respectively. e Music Streaming service requires a paid subscrip- tion of $./month, and has a  day free trial period.
  • 89. 4 Hardware Using your devices Ubuntu supports a wide range of hardware, and support for new hardware improves with every release. Hardware identification ere are various ways to identify your hardware in Ubuntu. e easiest would be to install an application from the Ubuntu Soware Center, called Sysinfo. Firstly, open the “Ubuntu Soware Center”, then use the search box in the top right corner to search for sysinfo. Select the Application, click Install. Enter your password when prompted, to install the application. To run the application, search for Sysinfo at the Dash search bar. Click on the program once you find it. e Sysinfo program will open a window that displays information about the hardware in your system. Displays Hardware drivers A driver is a piece of soware which tells your computer how to communi- cate with a piece of hardware. Every component in a computer requires a driver to function, whether it’s the printer,  player, hard disk, or graph- ics card. e majority of graphics cards are manufactured by three well-known Your graphics card is the component in your companies: Intel, /, and  Corp. You can find your video card computer which outputs to the display. Whether you are watching videos on YouTube, manufacturer by referring to your computer’s manual, by looking for the viewing DVDs, or simply enjoying the smooth specifications of your computer’s model on the Internet, or by using the transition effects when you maximize/minimize command lspci in a terminal. e Ubuntu Soware Center houses a num- your windows, your graphics device is doing the hard work behind the scenes. ber of applications that can tell you detailed system information. SysInfo is one such program that you can use to find relevant information about your System devices. Ubuntu comes with support for graphics devices manufac- tured by the above companies, and many others, out of the box. at means you don’t have to find and install any drivers yourself, Ubuntu takes care of it all. Keeping in line with Ubuntu’s philosophy, the drivers that are used by default for powering graphics devices are open source. is means that the drivers can be modified by the Ubuntu developers and problems with them can be fixed. However, in some cases a proprietary driver (restricted driver) provided by the company may provide beer performance or fea- tures that are not present in the open source driver. In other cases, your particular device may not be supported by any open source drivers yet. In those scenarios, you may want to install the restricted driver provided by the manufacturer. For both philosophical and practical reasons, Ubuntu does not install restricted drivers by default but allows the user to make an informed choice. Remember that restricted drivers, unlike the open source drivers for your device, are not maintained by Ubuntu. Problems caused by those drivers
  • 90.      . will be resolved only when the manufacturer wishes to address them. To see if restricted drivers are available for your system, press the Su- per/Windows key on your keyboard to show the Dash or click the Ubuntu icon on the Unity Launcher, and search for Additional Drivers. If a driver is provided by the company for your particular device, it will be listed there. You can simply click Activate to enable the driver. is process requires an active Internet connection and it will ask for your password. Once installa- tion is complete you may have to reboot your computer to finish activating the driver. e Ubuntu developers prefer open source drivers because they allow any problem to be identified and fixed by anyone with knowledge within Another useful resource is the official online the community. Ubuntu development is extremely fast and it is likely that documentation (http://help.ubuntu.com), which contains detailed information about various your device will be supported by open source drivers. You can use the graphics drivers and known problems. This Ubuntu Live  to check your device’s compatibility with Ubuntu before same documentation can be found by searching installing, or go online to the Ubuntu forums or to http://www.askubuntu. for Yelp in the Dash search bar or by pressing F1 on your keyboard. com to ask about your particular device. Setting up your screen resolution One of the most common display related tasks is seing the correct screen resolution for your desktop monitor or laptop. Ubuntu correctly identifies your native screen resolution by itself and Displays are made up of thousands of tiny sets it for you. However, due to a wide variety of devices available, some- pixels. Each pixel displays a different color, and when combined they all display the image times it can’t properly identify your resolution. that you see. The native screen resolution is a To set or check your screen resolution, go to System Settings ‣ Displays. measure of the amount of actual pixels on your e “Displays” window detects automatically the type of display and shows display. your display’s name, size. e screen resolution and refresh rate is set to the recommended value by Ubuntu. If the recommended seings are not to your liking, you can change the same from the Resolution drop-down to the resolution of your choice. Adding an extra display Sometimes, you may want to add more than one display device to your desktop, or may want to add an external monitor to your laptop. Doing this is quite simple. Whether it’s an extra monitor, LCD TV, or a projector, Ubuntu can handle it all. Ubuntu supports the addition of multiple displays by default, which is as easy as plug and play. Ubuntu recognizes almost all the latest monitors, TVs and projectors by default. Sometimes it may happen that your additional display is not detected when you connect it to the machine. To resolve this, go to System Settings ‣ Displays and click on Detect Displays. is will detect the monitors connected to the machine. is menu can also be found from the Power Off menu on the top panel. You can also search for Displays at the Dash search bar. Now, there are two modes which you can enable for your displays. One option is to spread your desktop across two or more monitors. is is particularly useful if you are working on multiple projects and need to keep an eye on each of them at the same time. e second option is to mirror the desktop onto each of the displays. is is particularly useful when you are using a laptop to display something on a larger screen or a projector. To enable this option just check the box beside Mirror displays and click Apply to save the seings. You will get a pop-up notification asking if you want to keep the current seing or revert to the previous seing. Click to keep the current seing.
  • 91.   Starting from Ubuntu ., you can also select whether you want the Unity Launcher in both the displays or only in the primary display. Connecting and using your printer Ubuntu supports most new printers. You can add, remove, and change printer properties by navigating to System Settings ‣ Printing. You can also search for Printing from the Dash search bar. Opening Printing will display the “Printing-localhost” window. When you want to add a printer, you will need to make sure that it is switched on, and plugged into your computer with a  cable or connected to your network. Adding a local printer If you have a printer that is connected to your computer with a  cable then this is termed a local printer. You can add a printer by clicking on the Add Printer buon. In the le hand pane of the “New Printer” window any printers that you can install will be listed. Select the printer that you would like to install and click Forward. You can now specify the printer name, description and location. Each of If your printer can automatically do double these should remind you of that particular printer so that you can choose sided printing, it will probably have a duplexer. Please refer to the instructions that came with the right one to use when printing. Finally, click Apply. the printer if you are unsure. If you do have a duplexer, make sure the Duplexer Installed option is checked and then click the Forward Adding a network printer button. Make sure that your printer is connected to your network either with an Ethernet cable or via wireless and is turned on. You can add a printer by clicking Add Printer. e “New Printer” window will open. Click the “+” sign next to Network Printer. If your printer is found automatically it will appear under Network Printer. Click the printer name and then click Forward. In the text fields you can now specify the printer name, description and location. Each of these should remind you of that particular printer so that you can choose the right one to use when printing. Finally click Apply. You can also add your network printer by entering the  address of the printer. Select “Find Network Printer,” enter the  address of the printer in the box that reads Host: and press the Find buon. Ubuntu will find the The default printer is the one that is automat- printer and add it. Most printers are detected by Ubuntu automatically. If ically selected when you print a file. To set a printer as default, right-click the printer that Ubuntu cannot detect the printer automatically, it will ask you to enter the you want to set as default and then click Set As make and model number of the printer. Default. Changing printer options Printer options allow you to change the printing quality, paper size and media type. ey can be changed by right-clicking a printer and choosing Properties. e “Printer Properties” window will show; in the le pane, select Printer Options. You can now specify seings by changing the drop-down entries. Some of the options that you might see are explained. Media size is is the size of the paper that you put into your printer tray.
  • 92.      . Media source is is the tray that the paper comes from. Color Model is is very useful if you want to print in Grayscale to save on ink, or to print in Color, or Inverted Grayscale. Media type Depending on the printer you can change between: ‣ Plain Paper ‣ Automatic ‣ Photo Paper ‣ Transparency Film ‣  or  Media Print quality is specifies how much ink is used when printing, Fast Dra using the least ink and High-Resolution Photo using the most ink. Sound Ubuntu usually detects the audio hardware of the system automatically during installation. e audio in Ubuntu is provided by a sound server named PulseAudio. e audio preferences are easily configurable with the help of a very easy to use  which comes preinstalled with Ubuntu. Volume icon and Sound Preferences A volume icon, siing on the top right corner of the screen, provides quick access to a number of audio related functions. When you le-click on the volume icon you are greeted with four options: A mute option at the very top, a slider buon which you can move horizontally to increase/decrease volume, a shortcut to the default music player, Rhythmbox, and an option for accessing the Sound Seings. Selecting Sound Seings opens up another window, which provides access to options for changing input and output hardware preferences for speakers, microphones and headphones.It also provides options for seing the volume level for each application. Sound Seings can also be found from System Settings. It is known as Sound. Output e Output tab will have a list of all the sound cards available A microphone is used for making audio/video in your system. Usually there is only one listed; however, if you have a calls which are supported by applications like Skype or Empathy. It can also be used for sound graphics card which supports  audio, it will also show up in the list. recording. e Output tab is used for configuring the output of audio. You can in- If you change your sound output device, it will crease/decrease and mute/unmute output volume and select your preferred remain as default. output device. If you have more than one output device, it will be listed in the section which reads “Choose a device for sound output.” e default output hardware, which is automatically detected by Ubuntu during instal- lation will be selected. is section also allows you to change the balance of sound on the le and right speakers of your desktop/laptop.
  • 93.   Input e second tab is for configuring audio Input.You will be able to You should note that by default in any Ubuntu use this section when you have an in-built microphone in your system or installation, the input sound is muted. You will have to manually unmute to enable your if you’ve plugged in an external microphone. You can also add a Bluetooth microphone to record sound or use it during headset to your input devices which can serve as a microphone. You can audio/video calls. increase/decrease and mute/unmute input volume from this tab. If there is By default, the volume in Ubuntu is set to more than one input device, you will see them listed in the white box which maximum during installation. reads Choose a device for sound input. Sound Effects e third tab is Sound Effects. You can enable, disable, or You can add new sound themes by installing change the existing sound theme from this section. You can also change the them from Software Center (e.g., Ubuntu Studio’s GNOME audio theme.) You will get the alert sounds for different events. installed sound themes from the drop down menu. You can also enable window and button sounds. Applications e Applications tab is for changing the volume for running The Ubuntu Design Team have made a few applications. is comes in handy if you have multiple audio applications changes to the volume icon post Ubuntu 11.10. running, for example, if you have Rhythmbox, Totem Movie Player and a web-based video playing at the same time. In this situation, you will be able to increase/decrease, mute/unmute volume for each application from this tab. More functionality e icon can control various aspects of the system, application volume and music players like Rhythmbox, Banshee, Clementine and Spotify. e volume indicator icon can now be easily referred to as the sound menu, given the diverse functionality of the icon. Media controls available include You can start and control the default music play/pause, previous track, and next track. You can also switch between player, Rhythmbox, by simply left clicking on the sound menu and selecting Rhythmbox from different playlists from the Choose Playlist option. ere is also a seek bar the list. Clicking the play button also starts the which you can manually drag to skip some portions of any song. If the player. current playing song has album art, it will show up beside the name of the current track, otherwise you will see only the details of the song. It displays the track name, the artist name and the album name of the current track. Using a webcam Webcams oen come built into laptops and netbooks. Some desktops, such as Apple iMacs, have webcams built into their displays. If you purchase a webcam because your computer doesn’t have its own, it will most likely have a  connection. To use a  webcam, plug it into any empty  port of your desktop. Almost all new webcams are detected by Ubuntu automatically. You can There are several applications which are useful configure webcams for individual applications such as Skype and Empathy if you have a webcam. Cheese can capture pictures with your webcam and VLC media from the application’s setup menu. For webcams which do not work right player can capture video from your webcam. away with Ubuntu, visit https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Webcam for help. You can install these from the Ubuntu Software Center. Scanning text and images Scanning a document or an image is very simple in Ubuntu. Scanning is handled by the application Simple Scan. Most of the time, Ubuntu will simply detect your scanner and you should just be able to use it. To scan a document, follow these steps: . Place what you want to scan on the scanner. . Click to open the Dash and enter scan.
  • 94.      . . Click on Simple Scan. . Click to choose between Text or Photo from Document ‣ Scan ‣ Text. . Click Scan. . Click the Paper Icon to add another page. . Click Save to save. You can save the scanned documents and pictures in . You can also save in  format to enable opening in Acrobat Reader. To do that, add the extension .pdf at the end of the filename. Troubleshooting your scanner If your scanner is not detected, Ubuntu may give you a “No devices avail- able” message when trying to scan. ere may be a reason why Ubuntu cannot find your scanner. ‣ Simply unplug the scanner and plug it back in. If it is a newer  scan- ner, it is likely that it will just work. ‣ e driver for your scanner is not being automatically loaded. Restart your system. It might help! ‣ Your scanner is not supported in Ubuntu. e most common type of scanner not supported is old parallel port or Lexmark All-in-One printer/scanner/faxes. ‣  project listing of supported scanners. e  (Scanner Access Now Easy) project provides most of the back-ends to the scanning so- ware on Ubuntu. ‣ Check https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HardwareSupportComponentsScanners to find out which scanners work with Ubuntu. Other devices USB USB ports are available as standard on almost all computers available now. ey are used to connect a multitude of devices to your computer. ese could include portable hard drives, flash drives, removable //Blu-ray drives, printers, scanners and mobile phones. When connected, flash drives and portable hard drives are automatically detected—the file manager will open and display the contents of the drive. You can then use the drives for copying data to and from the computer. All new cameras, camcorders and mobile phone  cards are automatically detected by Ubuntu. ese SD cards have different types of data, so a window will appear with a drop down menu to choose between video, audio import and the file manager —you can choose your desired action from this menu. Firewire Firewire is a connection on some computers that allows you to transfer data Firewire is officially known as IEEE 1394. It from devices. is port is generally used by camcorders and digital cameras. is also known as the Sony i.LINK and Texas Instruments Lynx. If you want to import video from your camcorder you can do so by connecting your camcorder to the Firewire port. You will need to install a program called Kino which is available in the Ubuntu Soware Center. To find out more about Kino, visit http://www. kinodv.org/.
  • 95.   Bluetooth Bluetooth is a wireless technology that is widely used by different types of devices to connect to each other. It is common to see a mouse or a keyboard that supports Bluetooth. You can also find  devices, mobile phones, headsets, music players and many other devices that can connect to your desktops or laptop and let you transfer data, listen to music, or play games as an example. If your computer has Bluetooth support then you should see a Bluetooth icon in the top panel, usually near the volume icon. Click on the Bluetooth icon to open a popup menu with several choices, such as an option to Turn off Bluetooth. e Bluetooth preferences can also be accessed from System Settings ‣ Bluetooth. If you want to connect a new device—for example, to have a mobile phone send pictures or videos to your computer—select Setup new device…. Figure 4.1: The Bluetooth applet menu. Ubuntu will open a window for new device setup. When you click For- ward, Ubuntu will show you how many Bluetooth devices are present near your computer. e list of available devices might take a minute or so to appear on the screen as your system scans for these devices. Each device will be displayed as soon as it is found by Ubuntu. Once a device you’d like to connect with appears in the list, click on it. en, choose a  number by selecting PIN options. ree predefined  numbers are available, but you can also create a When you pair two Bluetooth devices, you are custom . You will need to enter this  on the device you will be pairing letting each device trust the other one. After you pair two devices, they will automatically with Ubuntu. connect to each other in the future without Once the device has been paired, Ubuntu will open the “Setup com- requiring a PIN. pleted” window. In Ubuntu, your computer is hidden by default for security reasons. is means that your Ubuntu system can search other Bluetooth devices, but others cannot find your Ubuntu system when they perform a search on their own computer. If you would like to let another device find your computer, you will have to explicitly allow your computer to be found. To allow your computer to be found, select “Make computer discoverable” in Bluetooth preferences. You can also click on the Bluetooth icon and select Visible to make your computer discoverable. You can also add a fancy name for your Bluetooth-enabled Ubuntu sys- tem by changing the text under Friendly Name. Another feature present in the Bluetooth icon menu is “Send files to device.” Use this option to send a file to a mobile phone without pairing with the computer. Android devices need to be paired at all times, even while transferring files.
  • 97. 5 Software Management Software management in Ubuntu As discussed in Chapter : Working with Ubuntu, Ubuntu offers you a wide range of applications for your daily work. Ubuntu comes with a basic set of applications for common tasks like surfing the Internet, checking your email, listening to music, and organizing your photos and videos. Sometimes you may need an extra level of specialization: for example you may want to retouch your photos, run some soware for your business, or play some new games. In each of these cases you can search for an application, install it and use it—usually, with no extra cost. Soware in Ubuntu is delivered as packages, simplifying the installa- tion to one click. A package is a compressed file archive containing every- Figure 5.1: Software Center icon thing needed to run the application. Packages can also contain information We recommend Ubuntu Software Center for describing which other applications, called dependencies or libraries, are searching, installing and removing applications, needed. Linux is designed in a way that any library can be updated without although you still have the possibility to use the command-line application apt-get, or install having to reinstall the complete application, minimizing hard drive usage by and use the advanced application Synaptic leing other applications use the same library. Package Manager. Most other operating systems require a user to purchase commercial soware (online or through a physical store), or search the Internet for a free alternative (if one is available). e correct installation file must then be verified for integrity, downloaded and located on the computer, followed by the user proceeding through a number of installation prompts and op- tions. By default Ubuntu gives you a centralized point with two different ways to browse the repositories for searching, installing and removing so- ware. ‣ Ubuntu Soware Center ‣ Command line apt-get Searching, installing and/or removing applications with Ubuntu Soware Center is the easiest and most comfortable way. It is recommended for all kinds of users, starting from beginners to the most experienced. Using the Ubuntu Software Center ere are numerous ways to install soware on an operating system. In Ubuntu, the quickest and easiest way to find and install new applications is through the Ubuntu Soware Center. To start the application, click on the Ubuntu Soware Center icon in the Launcher, or click on the Dash and search for Ubuntu Soware Center. e Ubuntu Soware Center can be used to install applications that are available in the official Ubuntu repositories. e Soware Center window has four parts—a list of categories on the le, a banner at the top, a Recom- mended For You panel at the boom and two featured areas on the right. Clicking on a category will take you to a list of related applications. For example, the Internet category contains Firefox Web Browser. e featured areas highlight What’s New and Top Rated soware. Each area shows dif- ferent application icons. Just click an icon to get more information on the application or to install it. To see all soware the area contains, click More.
  • 98.      . Figure 5.2: You can install and remove applica- tions from your computer using the Software Center. Figure 5.3: Ubuntu Software Center icon in the Launcher. ree sections at the top represent your current view of the Soware Center’s catalog. Click the All Soware buon to see soware that is avail- able to install, click Installed to see a list of soware that is already installed on your computer, or click History to see previous installations and dele- tions organized by date. Find your application Ubuntu Soware Center displays different sources in the “Get Soware” section. Clicking the arrow next to “All Soware” will show a list of in- dividual sections. Selecting “Provided by Ubuntu” will show free official soware, “For Purchase” will show soware for purchasing, and “Canonical Partners” will show soware from partners of Canonical, such as Adobe. If you are looking for an application, you may already know a specific name (for example, VLC Media Player), or you may just have a general category in mind (for example, the Sound and Video category includes a number of different soware applications such as video converters, audio editors, and music players). To help you find the right application, you can browse the Soware Center catalog by clicking on the category that reflects the type of soware you are looking for, or use the Search field at the top right of the window to look for specific names or keywords. When you select a category, you will be shown a list of applications. Some categories have sub-categories—for example, the Games category has subcategories for Simulation and Card Games. To move through categories you can use the back and forward buons at the top of the window. is
  • 99.    version of Ubuntu has a new category “Books & Magazines” which contains interesting books and magazines. Installing software Once you have found an application you would like to try, installing it is just one click away. To install soware: . Click the Install buon to the right of the selected package to install it. If you would like to read more about the soware package before installing it, first click on “More Info.” is will take you to a short description of the application, as well as a screenshot and a Web link when available. Related add-ons will be listed below the application’s description. You can click Install from this screen as well. In addition, if you use the You must have administrative privileges, and Gwibber micro-blogging application, you can hit the “Share…” link below you will need to be connected to the Internet for the Software Center to work. To learn how the description of an application to tell your friends about it. to set up your Internet connection, see Getting . Aer clicking Install, enter your password into the authentication win- online. dow that appears. is is the same password you use to log in to your account. You are required to enter it whenever installing or removing soware in order to prevent someone without administrator access from making unauthorized changes to your computer. If you receive an Authentication Failure message aer typing in your password, check that you typed it correctly by trying again. If the error continues, this may mean that your account is not authorized to install soware on the computer. . Wait until the package is finished installing. During the installation (or removal) of programs, you will see an animated icon of rotating arrows to the le of the In Progress buon in the sidebar. If you like, you can now go back to the main browsing window and choose additional soware packages to be installed by following the steps above. At any time, clicking the Progress buon on the top will take you to a summary of all operations that are currently processing. Here you can also click the X icon to cancel any operation. Once the Soware Center has finished installing an application, it is ready to be used. You can start the newly installed application by going to the Dash and typing the name of the application in the search bar. By default application is added to the Launcher. You can change this behavior by deselecting View ‣ New Applications in Launer. Removing software Removing applications is very similar to installing them. First find the in- stalled soware in Ubuntu Soware Center. You can click on the Installed buon which will show all the installed soware listed in different cate- gories. Scroll down to the application you wish to remove. If you click on the arrow next to Installed buon, you will find a list of soware providers, which can help you to narrow your search. You also can enter keywords in the Search field to quickly find installed soware, or you can search by date in the History tab (more on History below). To remove soware: . Click the Remove buon to the right of the selected application. . Enter your password into the authentication window that appears. Re- moving Soware also requires that you enter your password to help
  • 100.      . Figure 5.4: Installing Software via the Ubuntu Software Center. protect your computer against unauthorized changes. e package will then be queued for removal, and will appear under the progress section in the top. Removing a package will also update your menus accordingly. Software history e Ubuntu Soware Center keeps track of past soware management in the History section. is is useful if you wish to revert installations or removals and do not remember the application’s name. ere are four buons in the history section—All Changes, Installations, Updates and Removals. Clicking one will show a list of days that action occurred. If you click the arrow next to a day, a list of individual packages will be shown, along with what was done with them and at what time. e History section shows all soware installation history, not just changes made within the Soware Center. For example, packages updated through the Update Manager will also be listed. Software Recommendations e Ubuntu Soware Center offers two types of recommendations—per user based and per application based. Click the Turn On Recommendations buon at the boom of the Ubuntu Soware Center to enable per—user based recommendations. You will have to log in with your Ubuntu So- ware Center account. is is the same as your Ubuntu One or Launchpad account. When you enable recommendations, your list of installed soware will be periodically sent to servers of Canonical. Recommendations will appear in the boom panel. If you want to disable these recommendations then go to View ‣ Turn Off Recommendations. Per—application based recommendations do not require log in. ey are labeled as “People Also Installed.” ese are the applications installed by users who also installed the application which you are about to install.
  • 101.    Figure 5.5: You can turn on Software Rec- ommendations via clicking on the Turn On Recommendations button. ese recommendations are shown in the detailed page of particular appli- cation. Figure 5.6: The “People Also Installed” section shows applications installed by users who also installed the application which you are about to install. Managing additional software Although the Ubuntu Soware Center provides a large library of appli- cations to choose from, initially only those packages available within the official Ubuntu repositories are listed. At times, you may be interested in a particular application that is not available in these repositories. If this hap- pens, it is important to understand some alternative methods for accessing and installing soware in Ubuntu, such as downloading an installation file manually from the Internet, or adding extra repositories. First, we will look at how to manage your repositories through Soware Sources. Software Sources e Ubuntu Soware Center lists only those applications that are available in your enabled repositories. Repositories can be added or removed through the Soware Sources application. You can open Soware Sources from the Ubuntu Soware Center. Simply go to Edit ‣ Soware Sources or open the  (Alt key) and search for “sources.” Managing the official repositories When you open Soware Sources, it shows you the Ubuntu Soware tab where the first four options are enabled by default. The Ubuntu Software tab lists the official Ubuntu repositories, each containing different types of packages. Canonical-supported open source soware (main) is repository contains all the open-source packages that are maintained by Canonical. Community-maintained open source soware (universe) is repository contains all the open-source packages that are developed and maintained by the Ubuntu community. Proprietary drivers for devices (restricted) is repository contains propri- Closed-source packages are sometimes etary drivers, which may be required to utilize the full capabilities of referred to as non-free. This is a reference to freedom of speech, rather than monetary cost. some of your devices or hardware. Payment is not required to use these packages. Soware restricted by copyright or legal issues (multiverse) is repository contains soware that may be protected from use in some states or countries by copyright or licensing laws. By using this repository you assume responsibility for the usage of any packages that you install. Source code is repository contains the source code that is used to build the soware packages from some of the other repositories. e Source
  • 102.      . Figure 5.7: Drivers can be installed or removed via the Additional Drivers application. code option should not be selected unless you have experience with building applications from source. Building applications from source is an ad- vanced process for creating packages, and usually only concerns developers. You may Selecting the best software server also require source files when using a custom kernel, or if trying to use the latest version of Ubuntu provides and allows many servers around the world to mirror the an application before it is released for Ubuntu. packages from the sources listed under “Managing the official repositories.” As this is a more advanced area, it will not be covered in this manual. When selecting a server, you may want to consider the following: Ubuntu grants permission to many servers all across the world to act as mirrors. That is, they Distance to server. is will affect the speed you can achieve with the file host an exact copy of all the files contained in server. the official Ubuntu repositories. Internet Service Provider. Some Internet service providers offer cheaper, or even unlimited free downloads from their own servers. ality of server. Some servers may only offer downloads at a capped speed, limiting the rate at which you can install and update soware on your computer. Ubuntu will automatically choose an appropriate server while installing, and as such these seings should not be changed unless your physical location changes drastically or if you feel a higher speed should be achieved by your Internet connection. e guide below will help in choosing an optimal server. Ubuntu provides a tool for selecting the server that provides the fastest connection with your computer. . Click the dropdown box next to “Download from:” in the Soware Sources window. . Select “Other…” from the list. . In the “Server Selection” window that appears. Click the Select Best Server buon in the upper right. Your computer will now aempt a connection with all the available servers, then select the one with the fastest speed. If you are happy with the automatic selection, click Choose Server to return to the Soware Sources window. If you are not happy with the automatic selection or prefer not to use the tool, the fastest server is oen the closest server to you geographically.
  • 103.    In this case simply choose “Other” then find the nearest location to your computer. When you are happy with the seings chosen click Choose Server to return to the Soware Sources window. If you do not have a working Internet connection, updates and programs can be installed from the installation media itself by inserting your media and clicking the box under “Installable from /.” Once this box is checked the media within the/ drive will function as an online repository and as such the soware on the media will be installable from the Ubuntu Soware Center. Adding more software repositories Ubuntu makes it easy to add additional, third-party repositories to your A PPA is a Personal Package Archive. These list of soware sources. e most common repositories added to Ubuntu are online repositories used to host the latest versions of software packages, digital projects, are called s. ese allow you to install soware packages that are not and other applications. available in the official repositories, and automatically be notified whenever updates for these packages are available. If you know the web address of a ’s Launchpad site, adding it to your list of soware sources is relatively simple. To do so, you will need to use the Other Soware tab in the “Soware Sources” window. On the Launchpad site for a , you will see a heading to the le called “Adding this PPA to your system.” Underneath will be a short paragraph containing a unique  in the form of ppa:test-ppa/example. Highlight this  by selecting it with your mouse, then right-click and select Copy. Figure 5.8: This is an example of the Launchpad page for the Lifesaver PPA. Lifesaver is an application that is not available in the official Ubuntu repositories. However, by adding this PPA to your list of software sources, it would then be easy to install and update this application through the Software Center. Return to the “Soware Sources” window, and in the Other Soware tab click Add… at the boom. A new window will appear, and you will see the words “Apt line:” followed by a text field. Right-click on the empty space in this text field and select Paste, and you should see the  appear that you copied from the s Launchpad site earlier. Click Add Source to return to the “Soware Sources” window. You will see a new entry has been added to the list of sources in this window, with a selected check box in front meaning it is enabled.
  • 104.      . If you click Close in the boom right corner of this window, a message will appear informing you that “e information about available soware is out-of-date.” is is because you have just added a new repository to Ubuntu, and it now needs to connect to that repository and download a list of the packages that it provides. Click Reload, and wait while Ubuntu refreshes all of your enabled repositories (including this new one you just added). When it has finished, the window will close automatically. Congratulations, you have just added a  to your list of soware sources. You can now open the Soware Center and install applications from this , in the same way you previously installed applications from the default Ubuntu repositories. Manual software installation Although Ubuntu has extensive soware available, on some occasions you may want to manually install soware packages that are not available in the repositories. If there is not a  for the soware, you will need to install it manually. Before you choose to do so, make sure you trust the package and its maintainer. Packages in Ubuntu have a .deb extension. Double-clicking a package will open an overview page in the Soware Center, which will give you more information about that package. e overview gives some technical information about that package, a website link (if applicable) and the option to install. Clicking Install will install the package just like any other installation in the Soware Center. Figure 5.9: Installing .deb files manually using software center. Updates and upgrades Ubuntu also allows you to decide how to manage package updates through the Updates tab in the Soware Sources window.
  • 105.    Ubuntu updates In this section, you are able to specify the kinds of updates you wish to install on your system, and usually depends on your preferences around stability, versus having access to the latest developments. Figure 5.10: You can update installed software by using the Update Manager application in Ubuntu. Important security updates ese updates are highly recommended to ensure your system remains as secure as possible. ese are enabled by default. Recommended updates ese updates are not as important for keeping your system secure, but will mean your packages always have the most recent bug fixes or minor updates that have been tested and approved. is option is also enabled by default. Pre-released updates is option is for those who would rather remain up-to-date with the very latest releases of applications, at the risk of in- stalling an update that has unresolved bugs or conflicts. Note that it is possible that you will encounter problems with these updated applica- tions, therefore this option is not enabled by default. Unsupported updates ese are updates that have not yet been fully tested and reviewed by Canonical. Some bugs may occur when using these updates, and so this option is also not enabled by default. Automatic updates e middle section of this window allows you to customize how your sys- tem manages updates, such as the frequency with which it checks for new packages, as well as whether it should install important updates right away (without asking for your permission), download them only, or just notify you about them. Release upgrade Here you can decide which system upgrades you would like to be notified Every six months, Canonical will release a new about. version of the Ubuntu operating system. These are called normal releases. Every four normal releases—or 24 months—Canonical releases Never Choose this if you would rather not be notified about any new a long-term support (LTS) release. Long-term Ubuntu releases. support releases are intended to be the most stable releases available, and are supported for a longer period of time.
  • 106.      . For any new version Choose this if you always want to have the latest Ubuntu release, regardless of whether it is a long-term support release or not. is option is recommended for normal home users. For long-term support versions Choose this option if you need a release that will be more stable and have support for a longer time. If you use Ubuntu for business purposes, you may want to consider selecting this option.
  • 107.    Ubuntu for advanced users We hope you understand how using Ubuntu can make your computing experience easier, safer, and more efficient. To this point, we’ve provided detailed instructions on geing the most from Ubuntu’s basic features. In this chapter, we’ll detail some of Ubuntu’s more advanced features—like the terminal, a powerful utility that can help you accomplish tasks without the need for a graphical user interface (). We’ll also discuss some advanced security measures you can implement to make your computer even safer. We’ve wrien this chapter with advanced users in mind. If you’re new to Ubuntu, don’t feel as though you’ll need to master these topics to get the most out of your new soware (you can quite easily skip to the next chapter without any adverse impact to your experience with Ubuntu). However, if you’re looking to expand your knowledge of Ubuntu, we encourage you to keep reading. Introduction to the terminal roughout this manual, we have focused primarily on the graphical desk- top user interface. In order to fully realize the power of Ubuntu, you may want to learn how to use the terminal. What is the terminal? Most operating systems, including Ubuntu, have two types of user in- terfaces. e first is a graphical user interface (). is is the desktop, windows, menus, and toolbars that you click to get things done. e second, and much older, type of interface is the command-line interface (). e terminal is Ubuntu’s command-line interface. It is a method of controlling some aspects of Ubuntu using only commands that you type on the keyboard. Why would I want to use the terminal? You can perform most day-to-day activities without ever needing to open the terminal. However, the terminal is a powerful and invaluable tool that can be used to perform many useful tasks you might not be able to accom- plish with a . For example: ‣ Troubleshooting any difficulties that may arise when using Ubuntu sometimes requires you to use the terminal. ‣ A command-line interface is sometimes a faster way to accomplish a task. For example, it is oen easier to perform operations on many files concurrently using the terminal. ‣ Learning the command-line interface is the first step towards more advanced troubleshooting, system administration, and soware develop- ment skills. If you are interested in becoming a developer or an advanced Ubuntu user, knowledge of the command-line will be essential. Opening the Terminal You can open the terminal by clicking Dash ‣ Applications ‣ Terminal. The terminal gives you access to what is called a When the terminal window opens, it will be largely blank apart from shell. When you type a command in the terminal the shell interprets this command, resulting some text at the top le of the screen, followed by a blinking block. is in the desired action. Different types of shells text is your prompt—it displays, by default, your login name and your accept slightly different commands. The most popular is called “bash,” and is the default shell in Ubuntu.
  • 108.      . computer’s name, followed by the current directory. e tilde (~) means that In GUI environments the term “folder” is the current directory is your home directory. Finally, the blinking block is commonly used to describe a place where files are stored. In CLI environments the term the cursor—this marks where text will be entered as you type. “directory” is used to describe the same thing. To test a terminal command, type pwd and press Enter. e terminal This metaphor is exposed in many commands should display /home/yourusername. is text is called the “output.” You (i.e., cd or pwd) throughout this chapter. have just used the pwd (print working directory) command, which outputs (displays) the current directory. Figure 5.11: The default terminal window al- lows you to run hundreds of useful commands. All commands in the terminal follow the same approach: Type a com- mand, possibly followed by some parameters, and press Enter to perform the specified action. Oen some output will be displayed that confirms the Parameters are extra segments of text, action was completed successfully, although this can depend on the com- usually added at the end of a command, that change how the command itself is interpreted. mand being executed. For example, using the cd command to change your These usually take the form of -h or -- current directory (see below) will change the prompt, but will not display help, for example. In fact, --help can be any output. added to most commands to display a short description of the command, as well as a list e rest of this chapter covers some very common uses of the terminal. of any other parameters that can be used with However, it cannot address the nearly infinite possibilities available to that command. you when using the command-line interface in Ubuntu. roughout the second part of this manual, we will continue to refer to the command line, particularly when discussing steps involved in troubleshooting and the more advanced management of your computer. Ubuntu file system structure Ubuntu uses the Linux file system, which is based on a series of folders in the root directory. Each of these folders contains important system files that cannot be modified unless you are running as the root user or use sudo. is restriction exists for both security and safety reasons: computer viruses will not be able to change the core system files, and ordinary users should not be able to accidentally damage anything vital. Below are some of the most important directories. e root directory—denoted by /—contains all other directories and files. Here are the contents of some essential system directories: /bin & /sbin Many essential system applications (equivalent to C:Windows) /etc System-wide configuration files /home Each user will have a subdirectory to store personal files (for exam- ple /home/your-username, equivalent to C:Users or C:Documents and Settings) /lib Library files, similar to .dll files on Windows
  • 109.    Figure 5.12: Some of the most important directories in the root file system. /media Removable media ( and  drives) will be mounted in this directory /root is contains the root user’s files (not to be confused with the root directory) /usr Pronounced “user,” it contains most program files (not to be confused with each user’s home directory, equivalent to C:Program Files) /var/log Contains log files wrien by many applications Every directory has a path. e path is a directory’s full name—it de- scribes a way to navigate the directory from anywhere in the system. For example, the directory /home/your-username/Desktop contains all the files that are on your Ubuntu desktop. e path /home/your-username/Desktop can be broken down into a handful of key pieces: . /—indicates that the path starts at the root directory . home/—from the root directory, the path goes into the home directory . your-username/—from the home directory, the path goes into the your- username directory . Desktop—from the your-username directory, the path ends up in the Desktop directory Every directory in Ubuntu has a complete path that starts with the / (the root directory) and ends in the directory’s own name. Directories and files that begin with a period are hidden directories. If you are creating a file or directory from ese are usually only visible with a special command or by selecting a the command line and ultimately want it hidden, then simply start the filename or specific option. In the Nautilus you can show hidden files and directories directory name with a dot (.)—this signals to by selecting View ‣ Show Hidden Files, or by pressing Ctrl+H. If you are the filesystem that the file/directory should using the terminal, then you would type ls -a and press Enter to see the be hidden unless expressly viewed through showing hidden files and folders through the hidden files and directories. ere are many hidden directories in your GUI or through the appropriate command line home folder used to store program preferences. For example, /home/your- switch. username/.evolution stores preferences used by the Evolution mail appli- cation.
  • 110.      . Mounting and unmounting removable devices Any time you add storage media to your computer—an internal or external hard drive, a  flash drive, a —it needs to be mounted before it is accessible. Mounting a device means associating a directory name with the device, allowing you to navigate to the directory to access the device’s files. When a device, such as a  flash drive or a media player, is mounted in Ubuntu, a folder is automatically created for it in the media directory, and you are given the appropriate permissions to be able to read and write to the device. Most file managers will automatically add a shortcut to the mounted device in the side bar of your home folder so the device is easy to access. You shouldn’t have to physically navigate to the media directory in Ubuntu, unless you choose to do so from the command line. When you’ve finished using a device, you can unmount it. Unmounting a device disassociates the device from its directory, allowing you to eject it. Securing Ubuntu Now that you know a bit more about using the command line, we can use it to make your computer more secure. e following sections discuss various security concepts, along with procedures for keeping your Ubuntu running smoothly, safely, and securely. Why Ubuntu is safe Ubuntu is secure by default for a number of reasons: Just because Ubuntu implements strong security by default doesn’t mean the user ‣ Ubuntu clearly distinguishes between normal users and administrative can ”throw caution to the wind.” Care should be taken when downloading files, opening users. email, and browsing the Internet. Using a good ‣ Soware for Ubuntu is kept in a secure online repository, which contains antivirus program is warranted. no false or malicious soware. ‣ Open-source soware like Ubuntu allows security flaws to be easily detected. ‣ Security patches for open-source soware like Ubuntu are oen released quickly. ‣ Many viruses designed to primarily target Windows-based systems do not affect Ubuntu systems. Basic security concepts e following sections discuss basic security concepts—like file permissions, passwords, and user accounts. Understanding these concepts will help you follow the remaining procedures for securing your computer. Permissions In Ubuntu, files and folders can be set up so that only specific users can view, modify, or run them. For instance, you might wish to share an impor- tant file with other users, but do not want those users to be able to edit the file. Ubuntu controls access to files on your computer through a system of “permissions.” Permissions are seings configured to control exactly how files on your computer are accessed and used.
  • 111.    To learn more about modifying permissions, visit https://help.ubuntu. com/community/FilePermissions. Passwords You should use a strong password to increase the security of your com- puter. Your password should not contain names, common words, or com- mon phrases. By default, the minimum length of a password in Ubuntu is four characters. We recommend a password with more than the minimum number of characters. A password with a minimum of eight characters which includes both upper and lower case leers, numbers, and symbols is considered strong. Locking the screen When you leave your computer unaended, you may want to lock the screen. Locking your screen prevents anyone from using your computer until your password is entered. To lock the screen: ‣ Click the session menu icon in the right corner of the top panel, then select Lo Screen, or ‣ press Ctrl+Alt+L to lock the screen. is keyboard shortcut can be changed in Dash ‣ Applications ‣ Keyboard Shortcuts User accounts Users and groups When Ubuntu is installed, it is automatically configured for a single person to use. If more than one person will use the computer, each person should have his or her own user account. is way, each user can have separate seings, documents, and other files. If necessary, you can also protect files from being viewed or modified by users without administrative privileges. Like most operating systems, Ubuntu allows you to create separate user accounts for each person. Ubuntu also supports user groups, which allow you to administer permissions for multiple users at the same time. Every user in Ubuntu is a member of at least one group—at a bare min- imum, the user of the computer has permissions in a group with the same name as the user. A user can also be a member of additional groups. You can configure some files and folders to be accessible only by a user and a group. By default, a user’s files are only accessible by that user; system files are only accessible by the root user. Managing users You can manage users and groups using the Users and Groups administra- tion application. To find this application, click Session Indicator ‣ Systems and Settings ‣ User Accounts. To adjust the user seings, first click the Unlo buon and enter your password to unlock the user seings. Next, select the user that you want to modify from the list. en click on the element that you want to change. Adding a user Click the + buon which appears underneath the list of the current user accounts that have already been created. A window will ap- pear that has two fields. e Name field is for a friendly display name. e
  • 112.      . Figure 5.13: Add, remove and change the user accounts. Username field is for the actual username. Fill in the requested information, then click OK. A new dialog box will appear asking you to enter a password for the user you have just created. Fill out the fields, then click OK. You can also click the gears buon to generate a password. Privileges you grant to the new user can be altered in “Users Seings”. Modifying a user Click on the name of a user in the list of users, then click on the text entry which appears next to each of following options: ‣ Account type: ‣ Password: ‣ Automatic Login: Deleting a user Select a user from the list and click -. Ubuntu will deacti- vate the user’s account, and you can choose whether to remove the user’s home folder or leave it in place. If a user is removed and the user’s files remain, the only user that can access the files will be root or anyone associ- ated with the file’s group. Managing groups Group management is accomplished through the command line (Terminal) or by adding third-party applications that are beyond the scope of this man- ual. You will find more information in the subsection “Using the command line” below. Adding a group To add a group, type sudo addgroup groupname and press Enter, replacing groupname with the name of the group you wish to add. Modifying a group To alter the users in an existing group, type sudo ad- duser username groupname (adding a user) or sudo deluser username groupname (removing a user) and press Enter, replacing username and groupname with the user and group name with which you’re working. Deleting a group To delete a group, type sudo delgroup groupname and press Enter, replacing groupname with the name of the group you wish to delete.
  • 113.    Applying groups to files and folders To change the group associated with a file or folder, open the Nautilus file browser and navigate to the appropriate file or folder. en, either select the folder and choose File ‣ Properties from the menubar, or right-click on the file or folder and select Properties. In the Properties dialog window, click on the Permissions tab and select the desired group from the Groups drop-down list. en close the window. Using the command line You can also modify user and group seings via the command line. We recommend that you use the graphical method above unless you have a good reason to use the command line. For more information on using the command line to modify users and groups, see the Ubuntu Server Guide at hps://help.ubuntu.com/./serverguide/C/user-management.html System updates Good security happens with an up-to-date system. Ubuntu provides free soware and security updates. You should apply these updates regularly. See Updates and upgrades to learn how to update your Ubuntu computer with the latest security updates and patches. Trusting third party sources Normally, you will add applications to your computer via the Ubuntu So- ware Center which downloads soware from the Ubuntu repositories as described in Chapter : Soware Management. However, it is occasion- ally necessary to add soware from other sources. For example, you may need to do this when an application is not available in the Ubuntu reposito- ries or when you need a newer version of the one available in the Ubuntu repositories. Additional repositories are available from sites such as getdeb.net and Launchpad s which can be added as described in Soware Sources. You can download the  packages for some applications from their respective project sites on the Internet. Alternately, you can build applications from their source code (an advanced method of installing and using applications). Using only recognized sources such as a project’s site, , or various community repositories (such as getdeb.net) is more secure than down- loading applications from an arbitrary (and perhaps less reputable) source. When using a third party source, consider its trustworthiness, and be sure you know exactly what you’re installing on your computer. Firewall A firewall is an application that protects your computer against unautho- rized access by people on the Internet or your local network. Firewalls block connections to your computer from unknown sources. is helps prevent security breaches. Uncomplicated Firewall () is the standard firewall configuration pro- gram in Ubuntu. It runs from the command line, but a program called Gufw allows you to use it with a graphical user interface . See Chapter : Soware Management to learn more about installing the Gufw package.
  • 114.      . Once Gufw is installed, start Gufw by clicking Dash ‣ Applications ‣ Firewall configuration. To enable the firewall, select the Enable option. By default, all incoming connections are denied. is seing should be suitable for most users. If you are running server soware on your Ubuntu system (such as a web server, or an  server), then you will need to open the ports these services use. If you are not familiar with servers, you will likely not need to open any additional ports. To open a port click on the Add buon. For most purposes, the Precon- figured tab is sufficient. Select Allow from the first box and then select the program or service required. e simple tab can be used to allow access on a single port, and the Advanced tab can be used to allow access on a range of ports. Encryption You may wish to protect your sensitive personal data—for instance, finan- cial records—by encrypting it. Encrypting a file or folder essentially “locks” that file or folder by encoding it with an algorithm that keeps it scrambled until it is properly decoded with a password. Encrypting your personal data ensures that no one can open your personal folders or read your private data without your authorization through the use of a private key. Ubuntu includes a number of tools to encrypt files and folders. is chapter will discuss two of them. For further information on using en- cryption with either single files or email, see Ubuntu Community Help documents at hps://help.ubuntu.com/community. Home folder When installing Ubuntu, it is possible to encrypt a user’s home folder. See Chapter : Installation for more on encrypting the home folder. Private folder If you have not chosen to encrypt a user’s entire home folder, it is possible to encrypt a single folder—called Private—in a user’s home folder. To do this, follow these steps: . Install the ecryptfs-utils soware package from the Ubuntu Soware Center. (For more information about the Soware Center, review Using the Ubuntu Soware Center.) . Use the terminal to run ecryptfs-setup-private to set up the private folder. . Enter your account’s password when prompted. . Either choose a mount passphrase or generate one. . Record both passphrases in a safe location. ese are required if you ever have to recover your data manually. . Log out and log back in to mount the encrypted folder. Aer the Private folder has been set up, any files or folders in it will automatically be encrypted. If you need to recover your encrypted files manually see https://help. ubuntu.com/community/EncryptedPrivateDirectory.
  • 115. 6 Troubleshooting Resolving problems Sometimes, things may not work as they should. Luckily, problems that are encountered while working with Ubuntu are oen easily fixed. Below, we offer a guide for resolving the basic problems that users may encounter while using Ubuntu. If you need any additional help beyond what this chapter provides, take a look at other support options that are discussed in Finding additional help and support later in this book. Troubleshooting guide e key to an effective troubleshooting is to work slowly, complete all of troubleshooting steps, and to document the changes that you make to Ubuntu. is way, you will be able to undo your work, or give fellow users the information about your previous aempts in cases when you need to turn to the community for support. Ubuntu fails to start after I’ve installed Windows Occasionally you may install Ubuntu and then decide to install Microso Windows as a second operating system running side-by-side with Ubuntu. is is supported by Ubuntu, but you might also find that aer installing Windows you will no longer be able to start Ubuntu. When you first turn on your computer, a “bootloader” must start Ubuntu or another operating system. When you installed Ubuntu, you installed an A bootloader is the initial software that loads advanced bootloader called  which allows you to choose between the the operating system when you switch on the computer. various operating systems on your computer, such as Ubuntu, Windows, Solaris or Mac OS X. However, when you installed Windows, it replaced the  with its own bootloader, thus removing the ability to choose which operating system you’d like to use. You can restore  and regain the ability to choose your operating system by using the same  you used to install Ubuntu. First, insert your Ubuntu  into your computer and then restart it, making sure to have your computer start from the  (see Chapter : Instal- lation). Next, choose your language (e.g., English) and select Try Ubuntu. Once Ubuntu starts, click on the top-most icon in the Launcher (the Dash icon). en, search for Terminal using the search box and then select Ter- minal in the search results. A window should open with a blinking prompt line. Enter the following, and press Enter: $ sudo fdisk -l Disk /dev/hda: 120.0 GB, 120034123776 bytes 255 heads, 63 sectors/track, 14593 cylinders Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 = 8225280 bytes Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System /dev/sda1 1 1224 64228+ 83 Linux /dev/sda2 * 1225 2440 9767520 a5 Windows /dev/sda3 2441 14593 97618972+ 5 Extended /dev/sda4 14532 14593 498015 82 Linux swap
  • 116.      . Partition table entries are not in disk order The device (/dev/sda1, /dev/sda2, etc) we are is output shows that your system (Linux, on which Ubuntu is based) looking for is identified by the word “Linux” in the System column. Modify the instructions is installed on device /dev/sda, but your computer is booting to /dev/sda below if necessary, replacing /dev/sda1 with (where Windows is located). We need to fix this by telling the computer to the name of your Linux device. boot to the Linux device instead. To do this, first create a place to connect your existing existing Ubuntu installation with your temporary troubleshooting session: $ sudo mkdir /media/root Next, link your Ubuntu installation and this new folder: $ sudo mount /dev/sda1 /media/root If you’ve done this correctly, then you should see the following: $ ls /media/root bin dev home lib mnt root srv usr boot etc initrd lib64 opt sbin sys var cdrom initrd.img media proc selinux tmp vmlinuz Now, you can reinstall : $ sudo grub-install --root-directory=/media/root /dev/sda Installation finished. No error reported. This is the contents of the device map /boot/grub/device.map. Check if this is correct or not. If any of the lines is incorrect, fix it and re-run the script grub-install. (hd0) /dev/sda Finally, remove the Ubuntu disc from your  drive, reboot your computer, and then start enjoying your Ubuntu operating system once again. is guide may not work for all Ubuntu users due to differences in the various system configuration. Still, this is the recommended and most successful method for restoring the  bootloader. If you are following this guide and if it does not restore  on your computer, then try the other troubleshooting methods at https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ RecoveringUbuntuAfterInstallingWindows. I forgot my password If you forget your password in Ubuntu, you will need to reset it using the “Recovery mode.” To start the Recovery mode, shut down your computer and then start again. As the computer starts up, press Shift. Select the Recovery mode option using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Recovery mode should be the second item in the list. Wait until Ubuntu starts up—this may take a few minutes. Once booted, you will not be able to see a normal login screen. Instead, you will be pre- sented with the Recovery Menu. Select root using the arrow keys and press Enter. You will now be at a terminal prompt: root@ubuntu:~# To reset your password, enter:
  • 117.   Figure 6.1: This is the grub screen in which you can choose recovery mode. # passwd username Replace “username” above with your username, aer which Ubuntu will prompt you for a new password. Enter your desired password and press the Enter key and then re-type your password again, and press Enter. (Ubuntu asks for your password twice to make sure you did not make a mistake while typing). Once you have restored your password, return to the normal system environment by entering: # init 2 Login as usual and continue enjoying Ubuntu. I accidentally deleted some files that I need If you’ve deleted a file by accident, you may be able to recover it from Ubuntu’s trash folder. is is a special folder where Ubuntu stores deleted files before they are permanently removed from your computer. To access the trash folder click on the Trash icon at the boom of the Unity Launcher. If you want to restore deleted items from the trash: . Open Trash . Click on each item you want to restore to select it. Press and hold Ctrl to select multiple items. . Click Restore Selected Items to move the deleted items back to their original locations. How do I clean Ubuntu? Over time, Ubuntu’s soware packaging system can accumulate unused packages and temporary files. ese temporary files, also called caches, contain files from all of the packages that you have installed. Over time this cache can grow quite large. Cleaning out the cache allows you to reclaim space on your computer’s hard drive for storing your documents, music, photographs, or other files. To clear the cache, you can either use the clean, or the autoclean option for the command-line program apt-get. The clean command will remove every To run clean, open Terminal and enter: single cached item, while the autoclean command only removes cached items that can $ sudo apt-get clean no longer be downloaded (these items are often unnecessary).
  • 118.      . Packages can also become unused over time. If a package was installed to assist with running another program—and that program was subsequently removed you no longer need the supporting package. You can remove it with apt-get autoremove. Load Terminal and enter: $ sudo apt-get autoremove I can’t play certain audio or video files Many of the formats used to deliver rich media content are proprietary, meaning they are not free to use, modify, or distribute with an open-source operating system like Ubuntu. erefore, Ubuntu does not include the ca- pability to use these formats by default; however, users can easily configure Ubuntu to use these proprietary formats. For more information about the differences between open source and proprietary soware, see Chapter : Learning More. If you find yourself in need of a proprietary format, you may install the files necessary for using this format from the Ubuntu Soware Center. Ensure that you have Universe and Multiverse repositories enabled before continuing. See the Soware Sources section to learn how to do this. When you are ready to continue, install the necessary soware as follows: . Open the Ubuntu Soware Center by searching for it from the Dash (the top-most buon on the Launcher). . Search for ubuntu-restricted-extras by typing “Ubuntu restricted extras” in the search box on the right-hand side of the Ubuntu Soware Center main window. When the Soware Center finds the appropriate soware, click the arrow next to its title. . Click Install, then wait while Ubuntu installs the soware. One program that can play many of these formats is VLC media player. It can be installed from the Ubuntu Soware Center. Once Ubuntu has successfully installed this soware, your rich media content should work properly. How can I change my screen resolution? e image on every monitor is composed of millions of lile colored dots called pixels. Changing the number of pixels displayed on your monitor is called “changing the resolution.” Increasing the resolution will make the displayed images sharper, but will also tend to make them smaller. e opposite is true when screen resolution is decreased. Most monitors have a “native resolution,” which is a resolution that most closely matches the number of pixels in the monitor. Your display will usually be sharpest when your operating system uses a resolution that matches your display’s native resolution. e Ubuntu configuration utility Displays allows users to change the resolution. Open it by clicking on the session indicator and then on Dis- plays…. e resolution can be changed using the drop-down list within the program. Picking options higher up on the list (for example, those with larger numbers) will increase the resolution. You can experiment with various resolutions by clicking Apply at the boom of the window until you find one that is comfortable for you. Typ- ically the highest resolution will be the native resolution. Selecting a res- olution and clicking Apply will temporarily change the screen resolution
  • 119.   Figure 6.2: You can change your display settings. to the selected value and a dialog box will also be displayed. It allows you to revert to the previous resolution seing or keep the new resolution. e dialog box will disappear in  seconds, restoring the old resolution. Figure 6.3: You can revert back to your old settings if you need to. is feature was implemented to prevent someone from being locked out of the computer by a resolution that distorts the monitor and makes it unusable. When you have finished seing the screen resolution, click Close. Ubuntu is not working properly on my Apple MacBook or MacBook Pro When installed on notebook computers from Apple—such as the MacBook or MacBook Pro—Ubuntu does not always enable all of the computer’s built-in components, including the iSight camera and the Airport wireless Internet adapter. Luckily, the Ubuntu community offers documentation on fixing these and other problems. If you are having trouble installing or using Ubuntu on your Apple notebook computer, please follow the instruc- tions at https://help.ubuntu.com/community/MacBook. You can select the appropriate guide aer identifying your computer’s model number. For instructions on doing this, visit the web page above. Ubuntu is not working properly on my Asus EeePC When installed on netbook computers from Asus—such as the EeePC— Ubuntu does not always enable all of the computer’s built-in components, including the keyboard shortcut keys and the wireless Internet adapter. e Ubuntu community offers documentation on enabling these com- ponents and fixing other problems. If you are having trouble installing or using Ubuntu on your Asus EeePC, please follow the instructions at https://help.ubuntu.com/community/EeePC. is documentation page con- tains information pertaining specifically to EeePC netbooks.
  • 120.      . To enable many of the features and Function Keys, a quick fix is to add “acpi_osi=Linux” to your grub configuration. From the Terminal $ gksudo gedit /etc/default/grub and very carefully change the line GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT="quiet splash" to GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX_DEFAULT="quiet splash acpi_osi=Linux" Save and close the file. en, from the terminal: sudo update-grub Aer the command finishes, and you restart the computer, you will be able to use the Fn keys normally. My hardware is not working properly Ubuntu occasionally has difficulties running on certain computers, gen- erally when hardware manufacturers use non-standard or proprietary components. e Ubuntu community offers documentation to help you troubleshoot many common issues that may arise from this situation, in- cluding problems with wireless cards, scanners, mouse and printers. You can find the complete hardware troubleshooting guide on Ubuntu’s sup- port wiki, accessible at https://wiki.ubuntu.com/HardwareSupport. If your hardware problems persist, please see Geing more help for more trou- bleshooting options or information on obtaining support or assistance from an Ubuntu user. Getting more help is guide does not cover every possible workflow, task or issue in Ubuntu. If you require assistance beyond the information in the manual, you can find a variety of support opportunities online. More details about many support options available to you can be found at Finding additional help and support later in this book.
  • 121. 7 Learning More What else can I do with Ubuntu? You should now be able to use Ubuntu for most of your daily activities —such as browsing the web, sending email, and creating documents. But you may be interested in learning about other versions of Ubuntu you can integrate into your digital lifestyle. In this chapter, we’ll introduce you to additional versions of Ubuntu specialized for certain tasks. We’ll also provide you with resources for answering any remaining questions you may have, and tell you how you can get involved in the worldwide community of Ubuntu users. But first, we’ll discuss the technologies that make Ubuntu a powerful collection of soware. Open source software Ubuntu is open source soware. Open source soware differs from pro- prietary soware—soware whose source code is not freely available for modification or distribution by anyone but the rightsholder. Microso The source code of a program is the collection Windows and Adobe Photoshop are examples of proprietary soware. of files that have been written in a computer language to make the program. Unlike proprietary soware applications, the soware included with Proprietary software is software that cannot be Ubuntu is specifically licensed to promote sharing and collaboration. e copied, modified, or distributed freely. legal rules governing Ubuntu’s production and distribution ensure that anyone can obtain, run, or share it for any purpose she or he wishes. Computer users can modify open source soware like Ubuntu to suit their individual needs, to share it, to improve it, or to translate it into other languages—provided they release the source code for these mod- ifications so others can do the same. In fact, the terms of many open source licensing agreements actually make it illegal not to do so. For more information regarding Ubuntu’s soware licensing standards, see http://www.ubuntu.com/project/about-ubuntu/licensing. Because open source soware is developed by large communities of programmers distributed throughout the globe, it benefits from rapid de- velopment cycles and speedy security releases (in the event that someone discovers bugs in the soware). In other words, open source soware is updated, enhanced, and made more secure every day as programmers all over the world continue to improve it. Aside from these technical advantages, open source soware also has economic benefits. While users must adhere to the terms of an open source licensing agreement when installing and using Ubuntu, they needn’t pay to obtain this license. And while not all open source soware is free of monetary costs, much is. To learn more about open source soware, see the Open Source Initia- tive’s open source definition, available at http://www.opensource.org/docs/ definition.php. Distribution families Ubuntu is one of several popular operating systems based on Linux (an open source operating system). ese Linux-based operating systems—
  • 122.      . called Linux “distributions,”—may look different from Ubuntu at first glance, but they share similar characteristics because of their common roots. A distribution, or “distro,” is an operating Linux distributions can be divided into two broad families: the Debian system made from open source applications, which are bundled together to make them family and the Red Hat family. Each family is named for a distribution on easier to install and use. which subsequent distributions are based. For example, “Debian” refers to both the name of a Linux distribution as well as the family of distribu- tions derived from Debian. Ubuntu is part of this family. When describing relationships between various open source projects, soware developers oen use the metaphor of tributaries connecting to a common body of water. For this reason, you may hear someone say that Ubuntu is located “downstream” from Debian, because alterations to Debian flow into new versions of Ubuntu. Additionally, improvements to Ubuntu usually trickle “upstream”—back to Debian and its family members, which benefit from the work of the Ubuntu community. Other distributions in the Debian family include Linux Mint, Xandros, and CrunchBang Linux. Distributions in the Red Hat family include Fedora, and Mandriva. e most significant difference between Debian-based and Red Hat- based distributions is the system each uses for installing and updating soware. ese systems are called “package management systems.” Debian Package management systems are the means by soware packages are  files, while Red Hat soware packages are  which users can install, remove, and organize software installed on computers with open files. e two systems are generally incompatible. For more information source operating systems like Ubuntu. about package management, see Chapter : Soware Management. You will also find Linux distributions that have been specialized for certain tasks. Next, we’ll describe these versions of Ubuntu and explain the uses for which each has been developed. Choosing amongst Ubuntu and its derivatives Just as Ubuntu is based on Debian, several distributions are subsequently based on Ubuntu. Each differs with respect to the soware included as part of the distribution. Some are developed for general use, while others are designed for accomplishing a more narrow set of tasks. Alternative interfaces Ubuntu features a graphical user interface () based on the open source  desktop. As we explained in Chapter : e Ubuntu Desktop, a “user interface” is a collection of soware elements—icons, colors, windows, themes, and menus—that determines how someone may interact with a computer. Some people prefer using alternatives to , so they have created Ubuntu distributions featuring different user interfaces. ese include: ‣ Kubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the  environment found in Ubuntu; ‣ Lubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the  environment found in Ubuntu; and ‣ Xubuntu, which uses the  graphical environment instead of the  environment found in Ubuntu. Additionally, each of these distributions may contain default applications different from those featured in Ubuntu. For instance, the default music player in Ubuntu is Rhythmbox, but in Lubuntu the default music player is Aqualung, and in Kubuntu the default is Amarok. Be sure to investigate
  • 123.    these differences if you are considering installing an Ubuntu distribution with an alternative desktop environment. For more information about these and other derivative distributions, see http://www.ubuntu.com/project/derivatives. Task-specific distributions Other Ubuntu distributions have been created to accomplish specific tasks or run in specialized seings. Ubuntu Server Edition e Ubuntu Server Edition is an operating system optimized to perform multi-user tasks when installed on servers. Such tasks include file shar- A server is a computer that’s been configured to ing and website or email hosting. If you are planning to use a computer manage, or “serve,” files many people wish to access. to perform tasks like these, you may wish to use this specialized server distribution in conjunction with server hardware. is manual does not explain the process of running a secure web server or performing other tasks possible with Ubuntu Server Edition. For details on using Ubuntu Server Edition, refer to the manual at http://www.ubuntu. com/business/server/overview. Edubuntu Edubuntu is an Ubuntu derivative customized for use in schools and other educational institutions. It contains soware similar to that offered in Ubuntu, but also features additional applications—like a collaborative text editor and educational games. For additional information regarding Edubuntu, visit http://www. edubuntu.org/ Ubuntu Studio is derivative of Ubuntu is designed specifically for people who use com- puters to create and edit multimedia projects. It features applications to help users manipulate images, compose music, and edit video. While users can install these applications on computers running the desktop version of Ubuntu, Ubuntu Studio makes them all available immediately upon installa- tion. If you would like to learn more about Ubuntu Studio (or obtain a copy for yoursel), visit http://ubuntustudio.org/home. Mythbuntu Mythbuntu allows users to turn their computers into entertainment sys- tems. It helps users organize and view various types of multimedia content such as movies, television shows, and video podcasts. Users with  tuners in their computers can also use Mythbuntu to record live video and televi- sion shows. To learn more about Mythbuntu, visit http://www.mythbuntu.org/. Finding additional help and support is guide cannot possibly contain everything you’ll ever need to know about Ubuntu. Because Geing Started with Ubuntu . could never an-
  • 124.      . swer all your questions, we encourage you to take advantage of Ubuntu’s vast community when seeking further information, troubleshooting tech- nical issues, or asking questions about your computer. Next, we’ll discuss a few of these resources so you can learn more about Ubuntu or other Linux distributions. Live chat If you are familiar with Internet relay chat (), you can use chat clients such as XChat or Pidgin to join the channel #ubuntu on irc.freenode.net. Here, hundreds of volunteer users can answer your questions or offer sup- port in real time. To learn more about using Internet Relay Chat to seek help with Ubuntu, visit https://help.ubuntu.com/community/InternetRelayChat. LoCo teams Within the Ubuntu community are dozens of local user groups called “LoCo teams.” Spread throughout the world, these teams offer support and advice, answer questions and promote Ubuntu in their communities by hosting regular events. To locate and contact the LoCo team nearest you, visit http://loco.ubuntu.com/. Books and Magazines Many books have been wrien about Ubuntu, and professional magazines oen feature news and information related to Ubuntu. You will frequently find these resources at your local bookstore or newsstand. However, many of these print publications are also available as digital downloads for pur- chase in the Ubuntu Soware Center. To find these, launch the Soware Center, then click on “Books & Magazines” in the le panel. Official Ubuntu Documentation e Ubuntu Documentation team maintains a series of official wiki pages In addition to official Ubuntu and community designed to assist both new and experienced users wishing to learn more help, you will often find third-party help avail- able on the Internet. While these documents about Ubuntu. e Ubuntu community endorses these documents, which can often seem like great resources, some serve as a reliable first point of reference for users seeking help online. You could be misleading or outdated. It’s always can access these at http://help.ubuntu.com. To get to the built-in Ubuntu best to verify information from third-party sources before taking their advice. When possi- Desktop Guide, press F1 on your desktop, or type yelp in the Dash. ble, rely on official Ubuntu documentation for assistance with Ubuntu. The Ubuntu Forums e Ubuntu Forums are the official forums of the Ubuntu community. Mil- lions of Ubuntu users use them daily to seek help and support from one another. You can create an Ubuntu Forums account in minutes. To create an account and learn more about Ubuntu from community members, visit http://ubuntuforums.org. Launchpad Answers Launchpad, an open source code repository and user community, provides a question and answer service that allows anyone to ask questions about any Ubuntu-related topic. Signing up for a Launchpad account requires only a few minutes. You can ask a question by visiting Launchpad at https:// answers.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+addquestion.
  • 125.    Ask Ubuntu Ask Ubuntu is a free, community-driven website for Ubuntu users and developers. Like the Ubuntu Forums, it allows users to post questions that other members of the Ubuntu community can answer. But Ask Ubuntu also allows visitors to “vote” on the answers users provide, so the most useful or helpful responses get featured more prominently on the site. Ask ubuntu is part of the Stack Exchange network of websites, and is one of the best Ubuntu support resources available at no cost. Visit http://www.askubuntu. com to get started. Search Engines Because Ubuntu is a popular open source operating system, many users have wrien about it online. erefore, using search engines to locate answers to your questions about Ubuntu is oen an effective means of acquiring help. When using search engines to answer questions about Ubuntu, ensure that your search queries are as specific as possible. In other words, a search for “Unity interface” will return results that are less useful than those associated with the query “how to use Ubuntu Unity interface” or “how to customize Ubuntu Unity interface.” Community support If you’ve exhausted all these resources and still can’t find answers to your questions, visit Community Support at http://www.ubuntu.com/support/ community. The Ubuntu community Surrounding Ubuntu is a global community of passionate users who want to help others adopt, use, understand, and even modify or enhance Ubuntu. By choosing to install and run Ubuntu, you’ve become part of this community. As you learn more about Ubuntu, you may wish to collaborate with others to make it beer—to discuss the future of Ubuntu, to report soware bugs you discover, to promote Ubuntu to new users, to share Ubuntu advice, or to answer other users’ questions. In this section, we’ll discuss a few community projects that can connect you to other Ubuntu users. Full Circle Magazine Full Circle Magazine is “the independent magazine for the Ubuntu Linux community.” Released every month, Full Circle Magazine contains reviews of new soware (including games) for Ubuntu, step-by-step tutorials for projects you can undertake with Ubuntu, editorials discussing important issues in the Ubuntu community, and Ubuntu tips from other users. You can download issues of Full Circle Magazine at http://fullcirclemagazine.org/. The Ubuntu UK Podcast Produced by members of the UK’s Ubuntu LoCo team, this bi-weekly online audio broadcast (or “podcast”) features lively discussion about Ubuntu, and oen includes interviews with Ubuntu community members who work to improve Ubuntu. Episodes are available at http://podcast.ubuntu-uk.org/. A podcast is a radio-style broadcast available as an audio file for download to computers and portable media players.
  • 126.      . OMG! Ubuntu! OMG! Ubuntu! is a weblog that aims to inform the Ubuntu community about Ubuntu news, events, announcements, and updates in a timely fash- ion. It also allows Ubuntu users to discuss ways they can promote or share Ubuntu. You can read this blog or subscribe to it at http://www.omgubuntu. co.uk/. Contributing Contributing to Ubuntu As we mentioned earlier in this chapter, Ubuntu is a community-maintained operating system. You can help make Ubuntu beer in a number of ways. e community consists of thousands of individuals and teams. If you would like to contribute to Ubuntu, please visit https://wiki.ubuntu.com/ ContributeToUbuntu. You can also participate in the Ubuntu community by contributing to this manual. You might choose to write new content for it, edit its chapters so they are easier for new Ubuntu users to understand and use, or trans- late it in your own language. You may also provide the screenshots found throughout the manual. To get involved in the Ubuntu Manual Project, visit http://ubuntu-manual.org/getinvolved.
  • 127. A License Creative Commons Attribution–ShareAlike 3.0 Legal Code   (  )            (“”  “”).       /   .                 .         ,             .            ,                  . . Definitions (a) “Adaptation” means a work based upon the Work, or upon the Work and other pre-existing works, such as a translation, adaptation, derivative work, arrangement of music or other alterations of a lit- erary or artistic work, or phonogram or performance and includes cinematographic adaptations or any other form in which the Work may be recast, transformed, or adapted including in any form recog- nizably derived from the original, except that a work that constitutes a Collection will not be considered an Adaptation for the purpose of this License. For the avoidance of doubt, where the Work is a musical work, performance or phonogram, the synchronization of the Work in timed-relation with a moving image (“synching”) will be considered an Adaptation for the purpose of this License. (b) “Collection” means a collection of literary or artistic works, such as encyclopedias and anthologies, or performances, phonograms or broadcasts, or other works or subject maer other than works listed in Section () below, which, by reason of the selection and arrangement of their contents, constitute intellectual creations, in which the Work is included in its entirety in unmodified form along with one or more other contributions, each constituting separate and independent works in themselves, which together are assembled into a collective whole. A work that constitutes a Collection will not be considered an Adaptation (as defined below) for the purposes of this License. (c) “Creative Commons Compatible License” means a license that is listed at http://creativecommons.org/compatiblelicenses that has been approved by Creative Commons as being essentially equivalent to this License, including, at a minimum, because that license: (i) contains terms that have the same purpose, meaning and effect as the License Elements of this License; and, (ii) explicitly permits the relicensing of adaptations of works made available under that license under this License or a Creative Commons jurisdiction license with the same License Elements as this License. (d) “Distribute” means to make available to the public the original and copies of the Work or Adaptation, as appropriate, through sale or other transfer of ownership.
  • 128.      . (e) “License Elements” means the following high-level license aributes as selected by Licensor and indicated in the title of this License: Ari- bution, ShareAlike. () “Licensor” means the individual, individuals, entity or entities that offer(s) the Work under the terms of this License. (g) “Original Author” means, in the case of a literary or artistic work, the individual, individuals, entity or entities who created the Work or if no individual or entity can be identified, the publisher; and in addition (i) in the case of a performance the actors, singers, musicians, dancers, and other persons who act, sing, deliver, declaim, play in, interpret or otherwise perform literary or artistic works or expressions of folklore; (ii) in the case of a phonogram the producer being the person or legal entity who first fixes the sounds of a performance or other sounds; and, (iii) in the case of broadcasts, the organization that transmits the broadcast. (h) “Work” means the literary and/or artistic work offered under the terms of this License including without limitation any production in the literary, scientific and artistic domain, whatever may be the mode or form of its expression including digital form, such as a book, pamphlet and other writing; a lecture, address, sermon or other work of the same nature; a dramatic or dramatico-musical work; a choreo- graphic work or entertainment in dumb show; a musical composition with or without words; a cinematographic work to which are assim- ilated works expressed by a process analogous to cinematography; a work of drawing, painting, architecture, sculpture, engraving or lithography; a photographic work to which are assimilated works ex- pressed by a process analogous to photography; a work of applied art; an illustration, map, plan, sketch or three-dimensional work relative to geography, topography, architecture or science; a performance; a broadcast; a phonogram; a compilation of data to the extent it is pro- tected as a copyrightable work; or a work performed by a variety or circus performer to the extent it is not otherwise considered a literary or artistic work. (i) “You” means an individual or entity exercising rights under this Li- cense who has not previously violated the terms of this License with respect to the Work, or who has received express permission from the Licensor to exercise rights under this License despite a previous violation. (j) “Publicly Perform” means to perform public recitations of the Work and to communicate to the public those public recitations, by any means or process, including by wire or wireless means or public digital performances; to make available to the public Works in such a way that members of the public may access these Works from a place and at a place individually chosen by them; to perform the Work to the public by any means or process and the communication to the public of the performances of the Work, including by public digital performance; to broadcast and rebroadcast the Work by any means including signs, sounds or images. (k) “Reproduce” means to make copies of the Work by any means includ- ing without limitation by sound or visual recordings and the right of fixation and reproducing fixations of the Work, including storage of a protected performance or phonogram in digital form or other electronic medium.
  • 129.   . Fair Dealing Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict any uses free from copyright or rights arising from limitations or exceptions that are provided for in connection with the copyright protection under copyright law or other applicable laws. . License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, Licen- sor hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpet- ual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: (a) to Reproduce the Work, to incorporate the Work into one or more Collections, and to Reproduce the Work as incorporated in the Collec- tions; (b) to create and Reproduce Adaptations provided that any such Adap- tation, including any translation in any medium, takes reasonable steps to clearly label, demarcate or otherwise identify that changes were made to the original Work. For example, a translation could be marked “e original work was translated from English to Spanish,” or a modification could indicate “e original work has been modi- fied.”; (c) to Distribute and Publicly Perform the Work including as incorpo- rated in Collections; and, (d) to Distribute and Publicly Perform Adaptations. (e) For the avoidance of doubt: i. Non-waivable Compulsory License Schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme cannot be waived, the Licensor re- serves the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; ii. Waivable Compulsory License Schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme can be waived, the Licensor waives the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; and, iii. Voluntary License Schemes. e Licensor waives the right to col- lect royalties, whether individually or, in the event that the Licen- sor is a member of a collecting society that administers voluntary licensing schemes, via that society, from any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License. e above rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether now known or hereaer devised. e above rights include the right to make such modifications as are technically necessary to exercise the rights in other media and formats. Subject to Section (), all rights not expressly granted by Licensor are hereby reserved. . Restrictions. e license granted in Section  above is expressly made subject to and limited by the following restrictions: (a) You may Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work only under the terms of this License. You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Re- source Identifier (URI) for, this License with every copy of the Work You Distribute or Publicly Perform. You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that restrict the terms of this License or the abil- ity of the recipient of the Work to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under the terms of the License. You may not sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties with every copy of the Work You Dis-
  • 130.      . tribute or Publicly Perform. When You Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work, You may not impose any effective technological measures on the Work that restrict the ability of a recipient of the Work from You to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under the terms of the License. is Section (a) applies to the Work as incorporated in a Collection, but this does not require the Collection apart from the Work itself to be made subject to the terms of this License. If You create a Collection, upon notice from any Licensor You must, to the extent practicable, remove from the Collection any credit as required by Section (c), as requested. If You create an Adaptation, upon notice from any Licensor You must, to the extent practicable, remove from the Adaptation any credit as required by Section (c), as requested. (b) You may Distribute or Publicly Perform an Adaptation only under the terms of: (i) this License; (ii) a later version of this License with the same License Elements as this License; (iii) a Creative Commons juris- diction license (either this or a later license version) that contains the same License Elements as this License (e.g., Aribution-ShareAlike . US)); (iv) a Creative Commons Compatible License. If you license the Adaptation under one of the licenses mentioned in (iv), you must comply with the terms of that license. If you license the Adaptation under the terms of any of the licenses mentioned in (i), (ii) or (iii) (the “Applicable License”), you must comply with the terms of the Ap- plicable License generally and the following provisions: (I) You must include a copy of, or the URI for, the Applicable License with every copy of each Adaptation You Distribute or Publicly Perform; (II) You may not offer or impose any terms on the Adaptation that restrict the terms of the Applicable License or the ability of the recipient of the Adaptation to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under the terms of the Applicable License; (III) You must keep intact all notices that refer to the Applicable License and to the disclaimer of warranties with every copy of the Work as included in the Adapta- tion You Distribute or Publicly Perform; (IV) when You Distribute or Publicly Perform the Adaptation, You may not impose any effective technological measures on the Adaptation that restrict the ability of a recipient of the Adaptation from You to exercise the rights granted to that recipient under the terms of the Applicable License. is Section (b) applies to the Adaptation as incorporated in a Collection, but this does not require the Collection apart from the Adaptation itself to be made subject to the terms of the Applicable License. (c) If You Distribute, or Publicly Perform the Work or any Adaptations or Collections, You must, unless a request has been made pursuant to Section (a), keep intact all copyright notices for the Work and provide, reasonable to the medium or means You are utilizing: (i) the name of the Original Author (or pseudonym, if applicable) if supplied, and/or if the Original Author and/or Licensor designate another party or parties (e.g., a sponsor institute, publishing entity, journal) for ari- bution (“Aribution Parties”) in Licensor’s copyright notice, terms of service or by other reasonable means, the name of such party or par- ties; (ii) the title of the Work if supplied; (iii) to the extent reasonably practicable, the URI, if any, that Licensor specifies to be associated with the Work, unless such URI does not refer to the copyright no- tice or licensing information for the Work; and (iv) , consistent with Ssection (b), in the case of an Adaptation, a credit identifying the use of the Work in the Adaptation (e.g., “French translation of the
  • 131.   Work by Original Author,” or “Screenplay based on original Work by Original Author”). e credit required by this Section (c) may be implemented in any reasonable manner; provided, however, that in the case of a Adaptation or Collection, at a minimum such credit will appear, if a credit for all contributing authors of the Adaptation or Collection appears, then as part of these credits and in a manner at least as prominent as the credits for the other contributing authors. For the avoidance of doubt, You may only use the credit required by this Section for the purpose of aribution in the manner set out above and, by exercising Your rights under this License, You may not im- plicitly or explicitly assert or imply any connection with, sponsorship or endorsement by the Original Author, Licensor and/or Aribution Parties, as appropriate, of You or Your use of the Work, without the separate, express prior wrien permission of the Original Author, Licensor and/or Aribution Parties. (d) Except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Licensor or as may be otherwise permied by applicable law, if You Reproduce, Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work either by itself or as part of any Adap- tations or Collections, You must not distort, mutilate, modify or take other derogatory action in relation to the Work which would be prej- udicial to the Original Author’s honor or reputation. Licensor agrees that in those jurisdictions (e.g. Japan), in which any exercise of the right granted in Section (b) of this License (the right to make Adap- tations) would be deemed to be a distortion, mutilation, modification or other derogatory action prejudicial to the Original Author’s honor and reputation, the Licensor will waive or not assert, as appropriate, this Section, to the fullest extent permied by the applicable national law, to enable You to reasonably exercise Your right under Section (b) of this License (right to make Adaptations) but not otherwise. . Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer          ,                 , , ,   , ,  ,    , ,     , ,        ,  ,       ,    .          ,        . . Limitation on Liability.         ,                , , ,               ,            . . Termination (a) is License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automat- ically upon any breach by You of the terms of this License. Individuals or entities who have received Adaptations or Collections from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those licenses. Sections , , , , , and  will survive any termination of this License.
  • 132.      . (b) Subject to the above terms and conditions, the license granted here is perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above. . Miscellaneous (a) Each time You Distribute or Publicly Perform the Work or a Collec- tion, the Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Work on the same terms and conditions as the license granted to You under this License. (b) Each time You Distribute or Publicly Perform an Adaptation, Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the original Work on the same terms and conditions as the license granted to You under this License. (c) If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action by the parties to this agreement, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable. (d) No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent. (e) is License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the Work licensed here. ere are no understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified here. Licensor shall not be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. is License may not be modified without the mutual wrien agreement of the Licensor and You. () e rights granted under, and the subject maer referenced, in this License were draed utilizing the terminology of the Berne Conven- tion for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works (as amended on September , ), the Rome Convention of , the WIPO Copy- right Treaty of , the WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty of  and the Universal Copyright Convention (as revised on July , ). ese rights and subject maer take effect in the relevant jurisdiction in which the License terms are sought to be enforced according to the corresponding provisions of the implementation of those treaty provisions in the applicable national law. If the standard suite of rights granted under applicable copyright law includes addi- tional rights not granted under this License, such additional rights are deemed to be included in the License; this License is not intended to restrict the license of any rights under applicable law. Creative Commons Notice Creative Commons is not a party to this License, and makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work. Creative Commons will not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever,
  • 133.   including without limitation any general, special, incidental or consequen- tial damages arising in connection to this license. Notwithstanding the foregoing two () sentences, if Creative Commons has expressly identified itself as the Licensor hereunder, it shall have all rights and obligations of Licensor. Except for the limited purpose of indicating to the public that the Work is licensed under the CCPL, Creative Commons does not authorize the use by either party of the trademark “Creative Commons” or any related trade- mark or logo of Creative Commons without the prior wrien consent of Creative Commons. Any permied use will be in compliance with Creative Commons’ then-current trademark usage guidelines, as may be published on its website or otherwise made available upon request from time to time. For the avoidance of doubt, this trademark restriction does not form part of the License. Creative Commons may be contacted at http://creativecommons.org/.
  • 135. Glossary Canonical Canonical, the financial backer of Ubuntu, provides support for the core Ubuntu system. It has over  paid staff members worldwide who ensure that the foundation of the operating system is stable, as well as checking all the work submied by volunteer contributors. To learn more about Canonical, go to http://www.canonical.com.   or command-line interface is another name for the terminal. cursor e (usually) blinking square or vertical line used to show you where text will appear when you start typing. You can move it around with the arrow keys on your keyboard prompt in a terminal or other text-input application. desktop environment A generic term to describe a  interface for humans to interact with computers. ere are many desktop environments such as , ,  and  just to name a few.   stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, it is used by a  server to assign computers on a network an  address automati- cally. dialup connection A dialup connection is when your computer uses a mo- dem to connect to an  through your telephone line. distribution A distribution is a collection of soware that is already com- piled and configured ready to be installed. Ubuntu is an example of a distribution. dual-booting dual-booting is the process of being able to choose one of two different operating systems currently installed on a computer from the boot menu. Once selected your computer will then boot into whichever operating system you chose at the boot menu. Dual booting is oen used generically, and may refer to booting among more than two operating systems. encryption Encryption is a security measure, it prevents others from access- ing and viewing the contents of your files and/or hard drives, the files must first be decrypted with your password. Ethernet port An Ethernet port is what an Ethernet cable is plugged into when you are using a wired connection.   (which once stood for  Network Object Model Environ- ment) is the default desktop environment used in Ubuntu.  e  (which stands for Graphical User Interface) is a type of user in- terface that allows humans to interact with the computer using graphics and images rather than just text.   stands for Internet Service Provider, an  is a company that provides you with your Internet connection. kernel A kernel is the central portion of a Unix-based operating system, responsible for running applications, processes, and providing security for the core components.
  • 136.      . maximize When you maximize an application in Ubuntu it will fill the whole desktop, excluding the panels. minimize When you minimize an open application, the window will no longer be shown. If you click on a minimized application’s panel buon, it will then be restored to its normal state and allow you to interact with it. output e output of a command is any text it displays on the next line aer typing a command and pressing enter, e.g., if you type pwd into a terminal and press Enter, the directory name it displays on the next line is the output. package Packages contain soware in a ready-to-install format. Most of the time you can use the Soware Center instead of manually installing packages. Packages have a .deb extension in Ubuntu. parameter Parameters are special options that you can use with other commands in the terminal to make that command behave differently, this can make a lot of commands far more useful. partition A partition is an area of allocated space on a hard drive where you can put data. partitioning partitioning is the process of creating a partition. prompt e prompt displays some useful information about your computer, it can be customized to display in different colors as well as being able to display the time, date and current directory as well as almost anything else you like. proprietary Soware made by companies that don’t release their source code under an open source license. router A router is a specially designed computer that using its soware and hardware, routes information from the Internet to a network. It is also sometimes called a gateway. server A server is a computer that runs a specialized operating system and provides services to computers that connect to it and make a request. shell e terminal gives access to the shell, when you type a command into the terminal and press enter the shell takes that command and performs the relevant action. Soware Center e Soware Center is where you can easily manage so- ware installation and removal as well as the ability to manage soware installed via Personal Package Archives. terminal e terminal is Ubuntu’s text-based interface, it is a method of controlling the operating system using only commands entered via the keyboard, the other method if using your Ubuntu computer is to use a  such as Unity. USB Universal Serial Bus is a standard interface specification for connect- ing peripheral hardware devices to computers. USB devices range from external hard drives to scanners and printers. wired connection A wired connection is when your computer is physically connected to a router or Ethernet port with a cable, this is the most method of connecting to the Internet and local network for desktop computers.
  • 137.   wireless connection A network connection that uses a wireless signal to communicate with either a router, access point, or computer.
  • 139. Credits is manual wouldn’t have been possible without the efforts and contribu- tions from the following people: Team leads Kevin Godby—Lead TEXnician John Xygonakis—Authors Coordinator  Translation Maintainer Hannie Dumoleyn—Editors Coordinator  Translation Maintainer orsten Wilms—Design Adnane Belmadiaf—Web development Authors Herat Gandhi Amrish Sayantan Das Brian Peredo Bryan Behrenshausen Che Dean Joel Picke Senthil Velan Bhooplan Patrick Dickey Kev irk Mario Burgos Hannie Dumoleyn Tom Swartz Jim Conne Andrew Montag Editors Mario Burgos Sco Gwin Chris Woollard Jim Conne Paddy Landau Hannie Dumoleyn Vibhav Pant Designers orsten Wilms Developers Adnane Belmadiaf Kevin Godby Translation editors Fran Diéguez (Galician) Xuacu Saturio (Asturian) Chris Woollard (British English) Hannie Dumoleyn (Dutch) Daniel Schury (German) John Xygonakis (Greek) Shazedur Rahim Joardar (Bengali) Shrinivasan (Tamil) Past contributors Benjamin Humphrey (Project Founder) Mez Pahlan (Author) Jim Conne (Author) Kartik Sulakhe (Author) Will Kromer (Author) David Wales (Author) Simon Lewis (Author) Rick Fosburgh (Editor-in-Chie) Ryan Macnish (Author)
  • 141. Index -bit versus -bit, – s and s, see s and s home folder,  accessibility,  EeePC  ,  screen reader,  troubleshooting,  installing Ubuntu in Windows, – Apple, see MacBook email, see underbird instant messaging, see Empathy applications Empathy, – Internet adding and removing,  chaing, – browsing, – presentation, see LibreOffice desktop sharing,  connecting, – running,  setup,  wireless,  searching,  video chat,  Internet radio,  spreadsheet, see LibreOffice encryption, see security word processor, see LibreOffice kernel,  audio, see sound and music Facebook, see Gwibber audio, playing, see Rhythmbox file system structure, – Launcher,  files running applications,  Bluetooth,  browsing,  LibreOffice,  booting Nautilus Linux, – troubleshooting,  opening files,  Linux distributions, – recovering,  Live , see Ubuntu Live  camera, importing photos,  sync, see Ubuntu One locking the screen,  Canonical,  files and folders logging out,  s and s copying,  login options,  blanking,  creating,  burning, – displaying hidden,  Mac  , see MacBook codecs,  moving,  MacBook copying,  searching,  troubleshooting,  playing, ,  Firefox, – microblogging, see Gwibber ripping,  Firewall monitor, see display cloud storage, see Ubuntu One using,  mounting devices,  codecs firewall Movie Player,  audio,  installing,  music, see Rhythmbox video,  FireWire, see   downloading,  command line, see terminal groups, see also users Dash,  adding,  Nautilus,  Debian, , see also Linux deleting,  multiple tabs,  desktop files and folders,  multiple windows,  background,  managing,  navigating,  customization,  modifying,  window,  appearance,  Gwibber, – NetworkManager,  background,  theme,  hardware open-source soware,  places,  troubleshooting,  sharing online,  help password, see security top bar,  Ask Ubuntu,  photos, see also Shotwell disk, see s and s documentation,  editing,  display forums,  importing,  adding secondary, – Full Circle Magazine,  viewing,  changing resolution,  general help,  podcasts,  troubleshooting,  heads-up display (),  presentation application,  downloading Ubuntu,  Launchpad Answers,  printer,  drivers, – live chat,  add via ,  dual-booting,  online,  adding via network, 
  • 142.      . rebooting,  spreadsheet,  Ubuntu Promise,  Rhythmbox, – video players,  Ubuntu Soware Center,  Internet radio,  web browser,  Unity,  playing music,  word processor,  Unix, ,  podcasts,  Soware Center,  unmounting devices,  sound updates scanner,  input,  about,  troubleshooting,  output,  automatic,  screen, see display recording,  release updates, – security troubleshooting,  ,  encryption,  volume,  users, see also groups introduction,  sound effects,  adding,  passwords,  spreadsheet,  creating during installation, – permissions,  start up, see boot deleting,  reseing passwords,  suspending the computer,  managing,  screen locking,  system requirements,  modifying,  system updates,  Shotwell, – terminal, – video shuing down,  underbird, – troubleshooting,  Shuleworth, Mark,  setup,  video chat,  slide show, see LibreOffice torrent videos soware Ubuntu image,  codecs,  adding repository, – Twier, see Gwibber playing,  email,  volume, see sound finding applications, – Ubuntu installation history,  alternate interfaces, – installing,  bootable  drive,  webcam,  managing,  definition of,  Wi-Fi,  manual installation,  derivatives,  windows,  movie players,  downloading,  closing,  multimedia players,  Edubuntu,  force on top,  music players,  history of,  minimizing,  office suites,  installing, – moving,  podcast readers,  Mythbuntu,  moving between,  presentation,  philosophy of,  resizing,  recommendations, – Server Edition,  restoring,  removing, – Ubuntu Studio,  switching,  repositories,  Ubuntu Live , – word processor,  servers, – Ubuntu One, – workspaces, 
  • 143.  is book was typeset with XƎLTEX. A e book design is based on the Tue-LTEX document classes available at http://code.google.com/p/tufte-latex/. A e text face is Linux Libertine, designed by Philipp H. Poll. It is an open font available at http://linuxlibertine.sf.net/. e captions and margin notes are set in Ubuntu, a font commissioned by Canonical and designed by Dalton Maag. It is freely available for download at http://font.ubuntu.com/. e terminal text and keystrokes are set in DejaVu Sans Mono (available at http://dejavu-fonts.org/), originally developed by Bitstream, Inc. as Bitstream Vera. e screenshots were captured using ickshot, available at http://ubuntu-manual.org/quickshot. e cover and title page pictograms contain shapes taken from the Humanity icon set, available at https://launchpad.net/humanity. e title page and cover were designed using Inkscape, available at http://inkscape.org/.